Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of Exodus\n\n1. Israel in Egypt; preparing to depart from slavery (1–12)\n * First genealogy (1:1–6)\n * Israel as slaves in Egypt (1:7–22)\n * Moses’ history to the time of the Exodus (2:1–4:26)\n * Israel suffers in Egypt (4:27–6:13)\n * Second genealogy (6:14–27)\n * Moses and Aaron go to Pharaoh (6:28–7:25)\n * The plagues (8:1–11:10)\n2. Instructions for celebrating the Passover (12:1–30)\n3. From Egypt to Mount Sinai (12:31–18:27)\n * The Passover; preparing to leave Egypt; leaving Egypt (12:31–50, 13:1–22)\n * Journey from Egypt to Mount Sinai (14:1–18:27)\n4. Mount Sinai and the Law (19-40)\n * Preparing for the covenant (19:1–25)\n * The Ten Commandments (20:1–17)\n * The covenant described (20:18–23:33)\n * The people agree to the covenant; Moses returns to Mount Sinai (24:1–18)\n * Design of the Dwelling and its furnishings; what was required of those who serve in it; dwelling functions (25:1–31:18)\n * The golden calf; Moses prays for the people (32:1–33:22)\n * The covenant described again (34:1–35)\n * Making of the ark and its furnishings (35:1–38:31) and priestly garments (39:1–43, 40:1–33)\n * The cloud (40:34–38)\n\n### What is the book of Exodus about?\n\nExodus continues the story of the previous book, Genesis. The first half of Exodus is about how Yahweh made Abraham’s descendants into a nation. This nation, which would be called “Israel,” was meant to belong to Yahweh and worship him. The second half of Exodus describes how God gave the Israelites his law through Moses. The law of Moses told the Israelites how to obey and worship Yahweh properly.\n\nThe book of Exodus tells how the Israelites were to build the Dwelling. The Dwelling was a tent where Yahweh would be among his people. The Israelites worshiped and sacrificed animals to Yahweh at the Dwelling. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\n“Exodus” means “exit” or “departure.” Translators may translate this title in a way that can communicate its subject clearly, for example, “About the Israelites Leaving Egypt” or “How the Israelites Left the Land of Egypt.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the book of Exodus?\n\nThe writers of both the Old and New Testaments present Moses as being very involved with writing the book of Exodus. Since ancient times, both Jews and Christians have thought that Moses wrote Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy.\n\n### Why did Moses write so much about God delivering or rescuing the people of Israel?\n\nMoses wrote much about God rescuing his people from the Egyptians to show that Yahweh is very powerful. Egypt was a very powerful nation in the region at that time, but Yahweh was still able to free the Israelites from the Egyptians. Also, by rescuing the Israelites, Yahweh showed that he had chosen them as his people and that they should worship him.\n\n### How does the book of Exodus show the fulfillment of the promises given to Abraham?\n\nThe book of Exodus shows God beginning to fulfill his promise to Abraham. In Genesis, God promised Abraham that he would have many descendants and that they would become a large nation. When God rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians, he took them to Mount Sinai. There he made a covenant with them, and they became the nation that belonged to Yahweh.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the Jewish Passover?\n\nThe Jewish Passover was a religious festival. Yahweh commanded the Israelites to celebrate it every year. Passover was a time to remember how God rescued Israel from the Egyptians. The first Passover meal was eaten in the evening just before they left Egypt. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])\n\n### What was the law of Moses to the people of Israe
1:intro cj55 0 # Exodus 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is intended to form a smooth transition from the last chapter of the book of Genesis.\n\n- v. 1-7: Jacob’s family grows\n- v. 8-22: Pharaoh oppresses the Israelites and tries to limit the Israelites’ growth\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Israel’s growth\n\nIsrael grew in number. This was the beginning of God’s fulfilling his promises to Abraham. It also caused the Pharaoh to worry that there would be more Israelites than Egyptians, with the result that the Egyptians would be unable to defend themselves against so many people. Pharaoh tried to kill all of the male babies so they would not become soldiers who fought against him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/fulfill]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n- “All of the descendants of Jacob were 70 in number”\nThis number included both Jacob’s children and grandchildren. It may cause confusion, but it is important to remember Jacob only had 12 sons.\n- Starting from verse 7, the terms **Hebrews** and **sons of Israel** both refer to the Israelite nation or people group.\n- God blesses the Hebrew midwives for lying to the wicked Pharaoh. Translators should not attempt to hide this. They showed that they feared God by disobeying a wicked order in order to preserve the lives of God’s people. They “acted wisely toward him” (or shrewdly, see [1:10](../01/10.md)) by lying to foil Pharaoh.\n- Pharaoh is a specifically Egyptian word for their kings (and queens).
1:1 h51f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 Verses 1–7 are background information for the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1:1 fxbx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go הַבָּאִ֖ים & בָּֽאוּ 1 The words translated as **came in** could also be translated as “went in.” Use whichever form is most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1:1 e65z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל & יַעֲקֹ֔ב 1 **Jacob** and **Israel** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:1 g89k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וּבֵית֖וֹ 1 Here, **house** refers to all of the people who live together, usually a large family with servants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and his household” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:5 uk67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַֽיְהִ֗י כָּל־נֶ֛פֶשׁ יֹצְאֵ֥י יֶֽרֶךְ־יַעֲקֹ֖ב שִׁבְעִ֣ים נָ֑פֶשׁ 1 Here, **lives** refers to people (specifically, men); **going out of the loins of Jacob** is a reference to these people as being in his seed or semen and produced through his sexual acts–therefore meaning they are his descendants. See also Hebrews 7:9-10. Alternate translation: “And all the male descendants of Jacob numbered 70.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:6 sh42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וַיָּ֤מָת 1 They did not die immediately. Jacob and his sons spent the rest of their lives in Egypt and died there. If necessary, use a transition word that conveys that some time passed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
1:6 g5qg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship וְכָל־אֶחָ֔יו 1 **All his brothers** includes ten older brothers and one younger brother. If your language has different words for those, you can say, “his ten older brothers and his younger brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
1:7 c368 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וּבְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל 1 This is the first of many times in this book that **sons of Israel** refers to the Israelite nation or people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the people of Israel” or “And the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:7 c7ep rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet פָּר֧וּ וַֽיִּשְׁרְצ֛וּ וַיִּרְבּ֥וּ וַיַּֽעַצְמ֖וּ 1 All of these verbs mean similar things; they are used together to emphasize that the Israelites became very numerous. If your language doesn’t have as many words that mean the same thing, you can use fewer words and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “had many children and became strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:7 uo65 פָּר֧וּ & וַיִּרְבּ֥וּ & וַתִּמָּלֵ֥א הָאָ֖רֶץ 1 Compare your translation of **fruitful … and multiplied … and the land was filled** here to Genesis 1:28, 9:1, 9:7, and especially Genesis 35:11 where God renamed Jacob to be called Israel.
1:7 nk2l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor פָּר֧וּ וַֽיִּשְׁרְצ֛וּ 1 The birth of children to the Israelites is spoken of as if they were plants that were producing fruit and causing new plants to grow around them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “had many children” or “gave birth to many children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:7 x97m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בִּמְאֹ֣ד מְאֹ֑ד 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **greatness** in another way. Alternate translation: “and were very great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:7 r2f1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַתִּמָּלֵ֥א הָאָ֖רֶץ אֹתָֽם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language Alternate translation: “and they filled the land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:7 e110 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בִּמְאֹ֣ד מְאֹ֑ד 1 Here the same word is used twice to emphasize how many the Israelite people had become. If your language does not repeat words like this, express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “with much power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:7 piq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns אֹתָֽם 1 Here, **them** refers to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:8 eu8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיָּ֥קָם 1 This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1:8 d20y rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants מֶֽלֶךְ־חָדָ֖שׁ 1 The story begins with the new king. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1:8 t6jd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַיָּ֥קָם מֶֽלֶךְ־חָדָ֖שׁ עַל־מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Here, **Egypt** refers to the place and the people of Egypt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And a new king began to rule over the Egyptians and the country of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:8 dnkw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לֹֽא־יָדַ֖ע אֶת־יוֹסֵֽף 1 Here, **Joseph** refers to both the person Joseph and to all of the good things that he did for Egypt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:9 aku3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations הִנֵּ֗ה 1 **Behold** draws special attention to what is about to be said. Use a way of drawing people’s attention that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Listen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1:9 x65i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession עַמּ֑וֹ 1 The people whom the king rules over and who are also part of his group (probably shared ethnicity, tribe, or clan) rather than the Israelite group are spoken of as if they belonged to the king. This is an instance of the possessive of social relationship. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1:9 t7s1 עַמּ֑וֹ 1 There is some ambiguity as to whom exactly Pharaoh was addressing. It could have been: (1) the people who lived in Egypt, the Egyptians or (2) some group of “his people” like his advisors, generals, nobles, or friends and family. Even if option 1 is meant, it is quite possible that he actually spoke to some smaller group of representatives, as in option 2.
1:9 jik8 מִמֶּֽנּוּ 1 Use a way that is natural in your language to compare non-specific sizes of groups of people. Alternate translation: “and much greater than us”
1:9 njuf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks הִנֵּ֗ה 1 Beginning from **behold** and extending to the end of [verse 10](../01/10.md) is a direct quotation of what the king said. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1:10 hiq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive נִֽתְחַכְּמָ֖ה & שֹׂ֣נְאֵ֔ינוּ & בָּ֖נוּ 1 The word **us** is inclusive and refers to the king and his people, the Egyptians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:10 wkvf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ל֑וֹ & יִרְבֶּ֗ה & וְנוֹסַ֤ף & הוּא֙ & וְנִלְחַם & וְעָלָ֥ה 1 Here, **him, he**, and **himself** refer to the Israelite people. The pronouns agree grammatically with the singular “people” in the original. This occurs in many places in Exodus. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the plural, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1:10 il4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical פֶּן־יִרְבֶּ֗ה וְהָיָ֞ה כִּֽי־תִקְרֶ֤אנָה מִלְחָמָה֙ 1 The king suggests a combination of two hypothetical events: 1. There are even more Israelites, 2. There is a battle. These are followed by a series of undesirable consequences: 3. The Israelites join an enemy, 4. The Israelites attack the Egyptians, 5. The Israelites leave Egypt. While the series of consequences is also technically hypothetical, the king’s language indicates that if 1-2 happen, then 3-5 are certain. Use language that makes it clear that the first two events are hypothetical and that the next three are consequences that could be expected if the first two events happen. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
1:11 y2mi שָׂרֵ֣י 1 **Overseers** were Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work.
1:11 o926 מִסִּ֔ים 1 Here the plural means groups. Alternative translation: “work crews”
1:11 l9lj לְמַ֥עַן עַנֹּת֖וֹ בְּסִבְלֹתָ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “to force the Israelites to do hard work for the Egyptians”
1:11 pkz4 עָרֵ֤י מִסְכְּנוֹת֙ 1 These were places where the leaders put away food and other important things to keep them safe. Alternative translation: “cities in which to put away things to keep them safe”
1:11 dy34 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession עָרֵ֤י מִסְכְּנוֹת֙ 1 The possessive is objective; storage of goods is what occurs in the cities. Alternate translation: “cities for storing things”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1:12 c1fy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְכַאֲשֶׁר֙ יְעַנּ֣וּ אֹת֔וֹ כֵּ֥ן יִרְבֶּ֖ה וְכֵ֣ן יִפְרֹ֑ץ 1 This sentence expresses a result that is the opposite of what the king expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1:12 pdfk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וַיָּקֻ֕צוּ מִפְּנֵ֖י 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **dread** in another way. Alternate translation: “And they were very afraid of the face of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:12 qgzz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִפְּנֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 Here, **face** means the presence of a person. The phrase means that the Egyptians were afraid of the Israelites’ existence in their country. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “of the growing Israelite population” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:13 j1q6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וַיַּעֲבִ֧דוּ מִצְרַ֛יִם אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּפָֽרֶךְ 1 Here, **rigor** is a noun used to modify the verb **enslaved**. **Rigor** could refer either to how hard the work was or how unkindly the Egyptians treated the Israelites. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “And the Egyptians made the sons of Israel work very hard” or “And harshly, the Egyptians made the sons of Israel work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:14 mx6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיְמָרְר֨וּ אֶת־חַיֵּיהֶ֜ם 1 The difficult lives of the Israelites are spoken of as if their daily lives were bitter food that was difficult to eat. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And they made their lives very difficult” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:14 jre2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בַּעֲבֹדָ֣ה קָשָׁ֗ה 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind **slavery** in another way. Alternative translation: “by making them work hard as slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:14 cuq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּחֹ֨מֶר֙ 1 Mortar is a mixture of lime with cement, sand, and water, used in building to bond bricks or stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:14 h5dx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וּבִלְבֵנִ֔ים 1 **Bricks** are blocks made of clay or mud with straw in them. They are hardened in the sun or in another manner before they are used for building.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:14 gzq7 אֵ֚ת כָּל־עֲבֹ֣דָתָ֔ם אֲשֶׁר־עָבְד֥וּ בָהֶ֖ם בְּפָֽרֶךְ׃ 1 See how you translated this in [verse 13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “the Egyptians made them work very hard” or “the Egyptians forced them to work very hard”
1:14 ct02 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns וַיְמָרְר֨וּ & בָהֶ֖ם 1 Here, **they** and **them** refer to the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:14 acj5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns חַיֵּיהֶ֜ם & עֲבֹ֣דָתָ֔ם & עָבְד֥וּ 1 Here, **their** and **they** refer to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:14 tqyl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בְּפָֽרֶךְ 1 See how you translated **rigor** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:15 yoaj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent 0 This sentence introduces a new event in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1:15 hhw1 לַֽמְיַלְּדֹ֖ת 1 **Midwives** were women who helped a pregnant woman give birth to a baby.
1:15 h8f8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names שִׁפְרָ֔ה & פּוּעָֽה 1 **Shiphrah** and **Puah** are women’s names. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:15 h59t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants שִׁפְרָ֔ה & פּוּעָֽה 1 The midwives are introduced here as new participants in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1:16 t8f5 וַיֹּ֗אמֶר 1 In the UST, the phrase and **the king said**, is combined with “spoke” from [verse 15](../01/15.md) (ULT) because the verb for “say” is used twice before he speaks. Having two speech verbs may be strange in some languages. If it would be unnatural to say that the king spoke or said words twice, you may leave one off.
1:16 zfcv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual בְּיַלֶּדְכֶן֙ & וּרְאִיתֶ֖ן & וַהֲמִתֶּ֣ן 1 The king is speaking to the two midwives, so the form of **you** is plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1:16 h3mb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עַל־הָאָבְנָ֑יִם 1 Women sat on this short stool as they gave birth. Therefore, it was associated with birth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the birthing process” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:16 nms7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical אִם־בֵּ֥ן הוּא֙ וַהֲמִתֶּ֣ן אֹת֔וֹ וְאִם־בַּ֥ת הִ֖יא וָחָֽיָה 1 These two statements are hypothetical conditions (starting at **if**) with instructions for what the midwives should do in each situation (starting at **then**). Use a natural form in your language for hypothetical situations connected to instructions. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
1:17 gy7k rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַתִּירֶ֤אןָ 1 **But** introduces a contrast to what was expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1:18 y9g5 לַֽמְיַלְּדֹ֔ת 1 Women whose work is to help other woman give birth to a baby are called **midwives**. See how you translated this in [Exodus 1:15](../01/15.md).
1:18 y73k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיֹּ֣אמֶר לָהֶ֔ן מַדּ֥וּעַ עֲשִׂיתֶ֖ן הַדָּבָ֣ר הַזֶּ֑ה וַתְּחַיֶּ֖יןָ אֶת־הַיְלָדִֽים 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate this quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “and he asked them why they were letting the sons live.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1:18 q1sy מַדּ֥וּעַ עֲשִׂיתֶ֖ן הַדָּבָ֣ר הַזֶּ֑ה וַתְּחַיֶּ֖יןָ אֶת־הַיְלָדִֽים 1 Alternate translation: “Why have you not killed the baby boys?”
1:18 o97u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual עֲשִׂיתֶ֖ן 1 This **you** is plural. The king is speaking to the two midwives. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1:19 qbvy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י לֹ֧א כַנָּשִׁ֛ים הַמִּצְרִיֹּ֖ת הָֽעִבְרִיֹּ֑ת כִּֽי־חָי֣וֹת הֵ֔נָּה בְּטֶ֨רֶם תָּב֧וֹא אֲלֵהֶ֛ן הַמְיַלֶּ֖דֶת וְיָלָֽדוּ 1 The midwives give a reason, **the Hebrew women are not like the Egyptian women**, and then they expand on that reason, **for they are lively** (or energetic), with the result that **before the midwife comes to them, they have given birth.** (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:19 cxu1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche וַתֹּאמַ֤רְןָ הַֽמְיַלְּדֹת֙ 1 Here, **midwives said** means that a midwife spoke representing the thoughts of the group. It may not make sense in your language to say that multiple people said something, so you may need to translate it in the singular (see UST). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1:19 wl8h הַֽמְיַלְּדֹת֙ 1 These were women who helped a woman give birth to a baby. See how you translated this in [Exodus 1:15](../01/15.md).
1:20 eh25 לַֽמְיַלְּדֹ֑ת 1 These were women who helped a woman give birth to a baby. See how you translated this in [Exodus 1:15](../01/15.md).
1:20 fj18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background וַיִּ֧רֶב הָעָ֛ם וַיַּֽעַצְמ֖וּ מְאֹֽד 1 This sentence gives background information about the events at the time. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1:20 h133 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וַיִּ֧רֶב & וַיַּֽעַצְמ֖וּ מְאֹֽד 1 These words mean similar things and are used together to emphasize their numeric growth. If your language doesn’t have as many words that mean the same thing, you can use fewer words and express the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:20 eo1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וַיֵּ֥יטֶב אֱלֹהִ֖ים לַֽמְיַלְּדֹ֑ת 1 This phrase is more logically connected to the statements in verse 21. It describes the result of the midwives fearing God with a general statement. If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange verses 20-21 so that the reason (verses 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:21 de53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־יָֽרְא֥וּ הַֽמְיַלְּדֹ֖ת אֶת־הָאֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 This is the reason for what God did. If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange verses 20-21 so that the reason (verses 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:21 pbve rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וַיַּ֥עַשׂ לָהֶ֖ם בָּתִּֽים 1 This describes the result of the midwives fearing God with a specific statement. If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange verses 20-21 so that the reason (verses 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:22 ld1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כָּל־הַבֵּ֣ן הַיִּלּ֗וֹד הַיְאֹ֨רָה֙ תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔הוּ 1 This order was given in order to drown the male Hebrew children. The full meaning of this may be made explicit. Alternate translation: “You must dispose of each new baby boy in the river so he will drown” or “Drown each baby boy in the river when he is born” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:22 a6b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיְצַ֣ו פַּרְעֹ֔ה לְכָל־עַמּ֖וֹ לֵאמֹ֑ר כָּל־הַבֵּ֣ן הַיִּלּ֗וֹד הַיְאֹ֨רָה֙ תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔הוּ וְכָל־הַבַּ֖ת תְּחַיּֽוּן 1 From **You shall** to the end of the verse is a direct quote of Pharaoh’s speech. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. However, it could be translated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And Pharaoh commanded all of his people to throw every baby boy into the river, but to let every girl live.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1:22 stag rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔הוּ & תְּחַיּֽוּן 1 The uses of the word **you** here refer to all the Egyptians. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
2:intro rwf3 0 # Exodus 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-10: Moses’ birth and early life\n- v. 11-15: Moses’ attempted intervention and flight\n- v. 16-22: Moses settles in Midian\n- v. 23-25: God sees the Israelites’ plight\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Covenant\n\nAt the end of the chapter, God begins to relate to the Israelites based on his covenant with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Identification of participants\n\n* Moses is the only participant named in most of this chapter. This is because many of the participants play very minor roles and because this part of the story is focusing on Moses’ life.\n\n### Moses’ heritage\n\nIn the first part of this chapter, Pharaoh’s daughter recognizes Moses as being a Hebrew, but in the last part of this chapter, the Midianites believe him to be an Egyptian.\n\n### Ironic situations\n\n* While Pharaoh tried to diminish the power of the Israelites by killing all of their baby boys, God used Pharaoh’s own daughter to save Moses.\n* Moses believes he is meant to be the rescuer of his people, but they reject him. Ultimately, Moses was correct, but the people rejected him at this point (see Acts 7).
2:1 wvj9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֵּ֥לֶךְ 1 A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2:1 riy7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants אִ֖ישׁ & בַּת 1 These are new participants. They remain unnamed until [Exodus 6:20](../06/20.md) where they are identified as Amram and Jochebed. For now it is best to leave them unnamed in your language, if possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2:1 mp7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַיִּקַּ֖ח אֶת־בַּת־לֵוִֽי 1 Here, **took a daughter** is an idiom for marrying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:2 s49k ט֣וֹב 1 Alternative translations: “pleasing” or “fine”
2:2 q4c0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וַתֵּ֤רֶא & וַֽתִּצְפְּנֵ֖הוּ 1 Hiding the boy was a result of seeing that he was good. Alternative translation: “Since she saw … she hid him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:3 t2gj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תֵּ֣בַת גֹּ֔מֶא 1 The **ark** is a basket made from a tall grass (**papyrus reeds**) that grows by the Nile River in Egypt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:3 tn3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַתַּחְמְרָ֥ה בַחֵמָ֖ר וּבַזָּ֑פֶת 1 You could explicitly state that this was to keep out water. Alternate translation: “and she daubed it with bitumen and with pitch to keep water from getting into it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:3 wpb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וַתַּחְמְרָ֥ה 1 This means that she applied a waterproof coating. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:3 ym3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בַחֵמָ֖ר 1 This is a sticky black substance made from oil. It can be used to keep out water. Alternate translation: “with tar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:3 v825 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וּבַזָּ֑פֶת 1 This is a sticky brown or black substance that can be made from tree sap. It too can be used to keep out water. Alternate translation: “and with tar” or “and with resin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:3 y8gq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בַּסּ֖וּף 1 These **reeds** were a type of tall grass with wide blades that formed a flat surface when woven together. They grew in flat, wet areas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:4 av8b וַתֵּתַצַּ֥ב אֲחֹת֖וֹ מֵרָחֹ֑ק 1 This means she stood far enough away so that she would not be noticed, but close enough to see the ark. Use a word that expresses this sort of distance in your language.
2:4 uf14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns מֵרָחֹ֑ק 1 This probably means somewhere in the reeds where she could see the basket, but no one would see her. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **distance** in another way. Alternate translation: “not far away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:4 ruvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship אֲחֹת֖וֹ 1 Here, the actions of **his sister** show that she was older. If your language uses a different term for siblings based on their relative ages or the gender of the siblings or both, use one that means “a boy’s older sister.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
2:4 z1cy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal לְדֵעָ֕ה מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה לֽוֹ 1 This is her purpose in being close by. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternative translation: “in order to learn what would happen to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2:5 m3i0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go וַתֵּ֤רֶד 1 **Came down** may be literal or figurative, as important places are often considered to be in a higher place. This means she came from her home, probably Pharaoh’s palace. If a perspective is required for Pharaoh’s daughter, you may choose go or come as works best in your language. “Come” is better as the scene is at the river and she comes to the scene location. However, you also need to consider your language’s way of introducing new participants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2:5 y26h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants וַתֵּ֤רֶד בַּת־פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 The **daughter of Pharaoh** is introduced here as a new participant. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2:5 jjke rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants וְנַעֲרֹתֶ֥יהָ 1 These women are introduced here as new participants; however, they are not mentioned again after this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2:5 im0d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor עַל־יַ֣ד הַיְאֹ֑ר 1 Here, **hand** is a metaphor for side or, as relating to a river, shore. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could simply translate the meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:5 bi7s וְנַעֲרֹתֶ֥יהָ 1 These were the young women whose job it was to be with her and make sure nothing bad happened to her.
2:5 am7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns וַתִּקָּחֶֽהָ 1 It is not clear who is meant by **she** here, either Pharaoh’s daughter or the servant. It is likely that Pharaoh’s daughter remains the subject. Alternative translation: “and she took the ark from her slave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:6 g9n6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations וְהִנֵּה 1 The word **behold** signals the surprising information that follows. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2:6 tyub rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וַתַּחְמֹ֣ל עָלָ֔יו 1 The text does not state exactly what caused her to have compassion on the baby. If a reason must be provided in your language, it should be connected to either his crying (this is the better option) or that he was a “good” baby ([verse 2](../02/02.md)). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:6 jg0d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks מִיַּלְדֵ֥י הָֽעִבְרִ֖ים זֶֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. It seems to have been said loud enough for the baby’s sister to hear. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2:7 x5ja וְקָרָ֤אתִי לָךְ֙ אִשָּׁ֣ה מֵינֶ֔קֶת מִ֖ן הָעִבְרִיֹּ֑ת 1 This is a suggestive question. The child’s sister is hopeful that Pharaoh’s daughter does not yet have a plan for the baby beyond saving his life. However, it is still a true question, for without Pharaoh’s daughter’s permission, the child’s sister will not be able to fetch the woman. If your language has a way of forming questions that are also suggestions, use it here.
2:7 d7aj מֵינֶ֔קֶת & וְתֵינִ֥ק 1 Here, **nursing** or **to nurse** means to feed with milk from the breast.
2:7 tqq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal וְתֵינִ֥ק לָ֖ךְ אֶת־הַיָּֽלֶד 1 This is the purpose of the sister’s proposal. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternative translation: “And she could nurse the infant for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2:8 ab1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go לֵ֑כִי & וַתֵּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 The girl left Pharaoh’s daughter to go to the child’s mother. The girl was almost certainly on foot. Use verbs of motion that express this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2:9 u554 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants לָ֣הּ 1 The child’s mother is reintroduced as a participant. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character. Alternative translation: “to the baby’s mother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2:9 mogg שְׂכָרֵ֑ךְ 1 This refers to payment that Pharaoh’s daughter would give to the mother in exchange for her service of nursing the baby.
2:9 hqsa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַתִּקַּ֧ח & וַתְּנִיקֵֽהוּ 1 The mother’s acceptance of the deal is implied. You could make it explicit, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:10 zj8h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וַיִגְדַּ֣ל הַיֶּ֗לֶד וַתְּבִאֵ֨הוּ֙ 1 **And the child grew older** marks an unspecified amount of time. He would have stayed with his mother at least until he was weaned (no longer feeding on his mother’s milk). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
2:10 j7n1 וַֽיְהִי־לָ֖הּ לְבֵ֑ן 1 Alternate translation: “and he became the adopted son of Pharaoh’s daughter”
2:10 h7to rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וַֽיְהִי־לָ֖הּ לְבֵ֑ן וַתִּקְרָ֤א שְׁמוֹ֙ מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 These events were likely simultaneous, because her act of naming him may have been what made him become **as a son to her**. Consider using a conjunction that does not make a great separation between these events. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2:10 nh2m מֹשֶׁ֔ה וַתֹּ֕אמֶר כִּ֥י מִן־הַמַּ֖יִם מְשִׁיתִֽהוּ 1 Translators may add a footnote that says, “The name Moses sounds like the Hebrew word that means ‘draw out.’”
2:10 ityq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַתֹּ֕אמֶר כִּ֥י מִן־הַמַּ֖יִם מְשִׁיתִֽהוּ 1 **For** begins a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “because she said she drew him out of the water” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2:11 tyol rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וַיְהִ֣י ׀ בַּיָּמִ֣ים הָהֵ֗ם וַיִּגְדַּ֤ל מֹשֶׁה֙ וַיֵּצֵ֣א 1 A significant amount of time has passed; later texts state that Moses was 40 years old at this point. Alternative translation: “Many years later, once Moses was grown, he went out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
2:11 p7gx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיְהִ֣י ׀ בַּיָּמִ֣ים הָהֵ֗ 1 This introduces a new event in the story. In your language, use a phrase that indicates a new event occurring after significant time has passed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2:11 uy39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go וַיֵּצֵ֣א 1 The UST supplies a probable location that he **went out** from; it could also have been simply out from the Egyptian area or out to the work area or cities. Use go or come as appropriate in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2:11 swn3 מַכֶּ֥ה אִישׁ־עִבְרִ֖י 1 Alternate translation: “hitting a Hebrew” or “beating a Hebrew”
2:12 m9bn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism וַיִּ֤פֶן כֹּה֙ וָכֹ֔ה 1 These two opposite directions have the combined meaning of “everywhere.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “He looked all around” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2:12 rmgn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַיַּךְ֙ 1 The context makes clear that Moses struck the Egyptian hard enough or repeatedly until Moses killed him. Consider using a word that indicates a deadly blow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:13 qn45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go וַיֵּצֵא֙ 1 See how you translated this in [Exodus 2:11](../02/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2:13 wqrm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal הַשֵּׁנִ֔י 1 The ordinal number here could mean “the next day” (UST) or simply on some day following the events of the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
2:13 rgn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations וְהִנֵּ֛ה 1 Here, **behold** shows that Moses was surprised by what he saw. You can use a word in your language that will give this meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2:13 i4d6 לָֽרָשָׁ֔ע 1 Based on Moses’ question, this means the aggressor or the man wrongfully attacking his neighbor. Alternate translation: “the man who was guilty of starting the fight”
2:14 qb2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מִ֣י שָֽׂמְךָ֞ לְאִ֨ישׁ שַׂ֤ר וְשֹׁפֵט֙ עָלֵ֔ינוּ 1 The man is not asking a question, he is using this question to rebuke Moses for intervening in the fight. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are not our leader and have no right to judge us!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:14 k6s5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony הַלְהָרְגֵ֨נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּאֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַמִּצְרִ֑י 1 The man used a question here to be sarcastic. Alternate translation: “We know that you killed an Egyptian yesterday. You had better not kill me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
2:14 l62d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הַלְהָרְגֵ֨נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּאֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַמִּצְרִ֑י 1 Again, the man asks a question that is intended to make a statement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do you think you could kill me without anyone finding out? We know what you did to the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:14 d2ja הַלְהָרְגֵ֨נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר 1 Alternate translation: “Are you planning to kill me” or “Are you threatening to kill me”
2:14 lyqh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside וַיֹּאמַ֔ר 1 **Certainly the thing is known** was likely something Moses said to himself, that is, he thought it to himself rather than speaking to the men in front of him. If this would be confusing in your language, you might introduce it as a thought. Alternate translation: “and thought” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
2:14 vfw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיֹּאמַ֔ר אָכֵ֖ן נוֹדַ֥ע הַדָּבָֽר 1 It may be clearer to present what was likely a thought Moses had as an indirect quotation. Alternative translation (as indirect quotation): “because he thought that everyone knew what he had done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2:15 yutr וַיְבַקֵּ֖שׁ לַהֲרֹ֣ג אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 Pharaoh most likely delegated this task. Alternative translation: “and he sought to have Moses killed” (note that the passive form will not work in every language)
2:15 l5rc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִפְּנֵ֣י 1 His **face** means his presence. Alternate translation: “from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:15 otsl וַיֵּ֥שֶׁב & וַיֵּ֥שֶׁב 1 In Hebrew, these are the same verb. In English, they could be translated as “settle,” which can mean to dwell in a certain place, but it can also mean to lower one’s body into a seated position. This could mean: (1) Moses lived in Midian. He sat by this well one day. This may have been the well for the town he lived in. (2) Moses lived in Midian. His home was by this well. (3) Moses was a wanderer. He was in Midian and sat by this well when the next event occurred.
2:16 shg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background וּלְכֹהֵ֥ן מִדְיָ֖ן שֶׁ֣בַע בָּנ֑וֹת 1 This sentence is background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2:16 pjzc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וּלְכֹהֵ֥ן מִדְיָ֖ן שֶׁ֣בַע בָּנ֑וֹת 1 This sentence marks a scene transition. However, the last clause of the previous verse (“and he sat down by a well”) seems to be related to this new scene, so you may want to make your transition before that, as is done in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2:16 cfe5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants בָּנ֑וֹת 1 The **daughters** are new participants. Use the natural form in your language for introducing new characters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2:16 sm8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go וַתָּבֹ֣אנָה 1 The perspective of the narrative is set at the well. The daughters came from elsewhere to the well. They were probably on foot. Here each language will need to choose the appropriate motion word. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2:16 i2jh וַתִּדְלֶ֗נָה 1 This means that they brought up water from a well.
2:16 g1e6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ֣רְהָטִ֔ים 1 The **troughs** were long, narrow, open containers for animals to eat or drink out of. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:17 k5yc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go וַיָּבֹ֥אוּ 1 A group of **men came**. They may not have been far away before coming and driving the women away. Use an appropriate form of moving verb. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2:17 zksv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants הָרֹעִ֖ים 1 These are new characters only seen briefly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2:17 z17m rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַיָּ֤קָם 1 Use an expression that communicates that what Moses did was unexpected. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2:18 omzv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go וַתָּבֹ֕אנָה 1 The daughters came from the well to their father, probably on foot. You can use either come or go, whichever is more natural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2:18 t78y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names רְעוּאֵ֖ל 1 **Reuel**, a name or perhaps a title, is used of the man only here and in Numbers 10:29. He is otherwise called “Jethro.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:18 juqu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants רְעוּאֵ֖ל 1 The priest of Midian was mentioned in [v. 16](../02/16.md) in a background statement but is a new character starting here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2:18 lukb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיֹּ֕אמֶר מַדּ֛וּעַ מִהַרְתֶּ֥ן בֹּ֖א הַיּֽוֹם 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “and he asked how they were able to return so quickly that day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2:19 w57e אִ֣ישׁ מִצְרִ֔י 1 Jethro’s daughters assume Moses was Egyptian. When you translate it, you should be clear that this refers to Moses.
2:19 hvb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִיַּ֣ד 1 Here, **hand** refers to the power, control, or actions of the shepherds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “from the strength of” or “from the harm of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:19 a7v2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom דָּלֹ֤ה דָלָה֙ 1 This expresses surprise or emphasizes the magnitude of Moses’ act of kindness to the women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:20 x9yb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion וְאַיּ֑וֹ לָ֤מָּה זֶּה֙ עֲזַבְתֶּ֣ן אֶת־הָאִ֔ישׁ 1 These questions are a mild rebuke to the daughters for not inviting Moses into their home according to the normal hospitality of that culture. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not have left this man at the well!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:20 hal8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche לָֽחֶם 1 Here, **bread** is used to refer to food in general. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternative translation: “food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:21 zvr1 וַיּ֥וֹאֶל מֹשֶׁ֖ה לָשֶׁ֣בֶת אֶת־הָאִ֑ישׁ 1 Alternate translation: “Moses agreed to live with Reuel”
2:22 l3xg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks גֵּ֣ר הָיִ֔יתִי בְּאֶ֖רֶץ נָכְרִיָּֽה 1 Only this portion is a quotation. As a possibility for clarity, the UST includes both speech events as one quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2:22 f76m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names גֵּרְשֹׁ֑ם 1 His name, **Gershom**, sounds somewhat like the Hebrew for “a stranger here.” You may consider using a footnote to explain that. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:22 q7d8 גֵּ֣ר הָיִ֔יתִי בְּאֶ֖רֶץ נָכְרִיָּֽה 1 Alternate translation: “stranger in a foreign land”
2:23 fjkt rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיְהִי֩ בַיָּמִ֨ים הָֽרַבִּ֜ים הָהֵ֗ם וַיָּ֨מָת֙ מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 This introduces a new section and series of events. A large amount of time went by. According to Stephen’s sermon in Acts 7:30, Moses was in Midian 40 years. Alternative translation: “This is what happened during the many days Moses was in Midian. The king of Egypt died.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2:23 ym88 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 Verses 23-25 give a summary of what happened in Egypt and with the Israelites and God while Moses was in exile. These verses give background information to set the scene. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2:23 csg2 וַיֵּאָנְח֧וּ 1 They **groaned** because of their sorrow and misery. Alternate translation: “sighed deeply”
2:23 x84a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification וַתַּ֧עַל שַׁוְעָתָ֛ם אֶל־הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 The **plea** of the Israelites are spoken of as if they were a person and were able to travel up to where God is. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and God heard their pleading” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2:24 sja4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַיִּזְכֹּ֤ר אֱלֹהִים֙ 1 This a common biblical way of saying that God thought about what He had promised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “and God recalled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:intro n6ze 0 # Exodus 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is one conversation in which Yahweh begins to commission and send Moses to rescue the Israelites.\n\nThis chapter records one of the most important events in the history of the Israelite people: the revelation of the name Yahweh at the burning bush. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### God’s holiness\n\nGod is so holy that people can not look upon him without dying. This is why Moses covered his eyes. It is also why he took off his shoes. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Yahweh\n\nThe name Yahweh is the personal name of God, which he revealed to Moses. Yahweh is probably related to the phrase “I am” which he tells Moses in verse 14. Some translations use all capitals to set this apart: “I AM.” Great care must be taken in translating the phrase “I am that I am.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]])\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Participants\n\n“The angel of Yahweh,” “Yahweh,” and “God” all appear to be speaking to Moses and interacting with him from the burning bush. Furthermore, God says that his name is “I AM.” (See note above on Yahweh and I AM.) Yahweh and God are the same, while there is speculation about who the angel of Yahweh is.
3:1 gqvh rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וּמֹשֶׁ֗ה הָיָ֥ה רֹעֶ֛ה 1 This phrase brings the story focus back to Midian and Moses. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
3:1 oqcr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 Verse 1 provides immediate background context, setting the scene for Moses’ interaction with Yahweh. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3:1 l7x6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession כֹּהֵ֣ן מִדְיָ֑ן 1 This is a possessive of social relationship. **Jethro** is a **priest** who serves the Midianites. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3:1 p27s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession הַ֥ר הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 This is an associative possessive. This mountain was associated with God in some way. In [Exodus 3:12](../03/12.md) God tells Moses that he and the Israelites will serve him on this mountain. Later in the story, this promise is fulfilled, and it is where God makes his covenant with Israel and gives them the 10 Commandments. So it may have been called **the mountain of God** in retrospect (as Moses probably wrote this book sometime after the Israelites were wandering in the wilderness). However, it is possible that the mountain was already somehow associated with God’s presence or worship before Moses went there with the flock. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3:2 p0nt וַ֠יֵּרָא מַלְאַ֨ךְ יְהֹוָ֥ה אֵלָ֛יו בְּלַבַּת־אֵ֖שׁ מִתּ֣וֹךְ הַסְּנֶ֑ה 1 This is a summary of what happened. The next few verses tell the story of how this happened and how Moses discovered what was happening.
3:2 x5ci יְהֹוָ֥ה 1 This is the name of God that he revealed to his people in the Old Testament. See the translationWord page about Yahweh concerning how to translate this.
3:2 d3tf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְהִנֵּ֤ה הַסְּנֶה֙ בֹּעֵ֣ר בָּאֵ֔שׁ וְהַסְּנֶ֖ה אֵינֶ֥נּוּ אֻכָּֽל 1 The word **behold** here shows that Moses saw something that was very different from what he expected. He expected the bush to be burnt up completely by the fire. Consider using an interjection in your language that expresses that what follows is a surprise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
3:2 jmz0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֻכָּֽל 1 Here, **being consumed** means being eaten completely until gone. In the case of fire, this is a metonym for burning completely until gone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “destroyed by the fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:3 fpww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks אָסֻֽרָה־נָּ֣א וְאֶרְאֶ֔ה אֶת־הַמַּרְאֶ֥ה הַגָּדֹ֖ל הַזֶּ֑ה מַדּ֖וּעַ לֹא־יִבְעַ֥ר הַסְּנֶֽה 1 This is a direct quote. It’s not specified who Moses spoke to; he may have been alone or with a group of shepherds or his family. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
3:3 jbue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns אֶת־הַמַּרְאֶ֥ה הַגָּדֹ֖ל 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for something strange that someone sees, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **sight** in another way. Alternate translation: “unusual thing that I see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:4 ue8v יְהוָ֖ה & אֱלֹהִ֜ים 1 These terms both refer to the same being, since God’s name is Yahweh.
3:5 prv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י הַמָּק֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֤ר אַתָּה֙ עוֹמֵ֣ד עָלָ֔יו אַדְמַת־קֹ֖דֶשׁ הֽוּא 1 This is the reason Moses must stop coming close to the burning bush and take off his sandals. If it would be more natural in your language, you could put the reason before the commands, as in, “The place on which you are standing, it is holy ground, so you must not come close to here. Take your sandals off from on your feet.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:6 sxk8 אָנֹכִי֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י אָבִ֔יךָ אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵאלֹהֵ֣י יַעֲקֹ֑ב 1 All of these men worshiped the same God. Alternate translation: “the God of your father, of Abraham, of Isaac, and of Jacob”
3:6 fgym rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks אָנֹכִי֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י אָבִ֔יךָ אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵאלֹהֵ֣י יַעֲקֹ֑ב 1 This a direct quotation. The UST continues the quotation from verse 5 rather than including an additional “he said.” This may be more natural in some languages. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate the direct quotation with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
3:6 l5sy אָבִ֔יךָ 1 This could mean (1) “your father,” if it means “your father,” then it refers to Moses’ own father (2) “your ancestor,” if it means “your ancestor,” then the phrases following it clarify who “your father” refers to: it refers to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In most cases, it will be best to translate it as “your father,” i.e. Amram, Moses’ father.
3:6 lfbb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וַיַּסְתֵּ֤ר מֹשֶׁה֙ פָּנָ֔יו כִּ֣י יָרֵ֔א מֵהַבִּ֖יט אֶל־הָאֱלֹהִֽים 1 Reason: **for he was afraid from staring toward God** Result: **And Moses hid his face** If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]] and [Exodus 33:20](../33/20.md))
3:7 nl33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks וַיֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues through the end of [verse 10](../03/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
3:7 xoz0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom רָאֹ֥ה רָאִ֛יתִי 1 The Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Here, “see” is repeated in Hebrew. This expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having **seen** how his people were suffering. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:7 tpk0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession אֶת־עֳנִ֥י עַמִּ֖י 1 There are two possessives here: (1) “affliction of … people”: This is an event-related possessive where the people are the objects of affliction. They are treated badly as slaves. (2) “my people”: This one is more difficult as it involves both ownership and the possessive of social relationship. God views his people as his possession, and he is also in relationship with them as their God because they are descended from Abraham, though at this time they may not know God as theirs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3:7 nbft rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns עֳנִ֥י עַמִּ֖י אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּמִצְרָ֑יִם 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **affliction** in another way. Alternate translation: “how my people who are in Egypt are afflicted” or “how the Egyptians afflict my people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:7 p3tx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִפְּנֵ֣י נֹֽגְשָׂ֔יו 1 Here, **faces** refers to the whole person or the presence of the person(s) who were oppressing the Israelites. If this image is used in your language, you may translate it. If a similar image is used, you may consider using it. If neither is the case, you may omit the word “face” and translate the meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:7 ofxt כִּ֥י 1 Here, **surely** is intensifying the expression of Yahweh’s knowledge. Your translation should express Yahweh’s knowing with certainty or strength.
3:7 mfn2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns נֹֽגְשָׂ֔יו & מַכְאֹבָֽיו 1 These pronouns, **him** and **his**, refer to the Israelites as a group in the singular. They agree with “people” as a collective noun in [3:6](../03/06.md). Some languages may have to use plural pronouns. Others may have to match the pronoun’s gender to the grammatical gender of the word for “people” in their language. If necessary, change “him” to “them” or change “his” to “hers” or “its” (depending on grammatical gender of “people.”) Alternate translation: “those who oppress them … their anguish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
3:7 hkcj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession מַכְאֹבָֽיו 1 This is an event-related possessive where the people (as a group: **his**) are the subjects of **anguish.** Your translation should express that they are deeply distressed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3:7 ui28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מַכְאֹבָֽיו 1 It is implied that they are deeply distressed because they are treated badly as slaves. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his anguish from his slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:7 zth8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns מַכְאֹבָֽיו 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **anguish** in another way. Alternate translation: “how distressed they are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:8 a1yv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result 0 Verse 8 contains God’s intended result from his acts of seeing and hearing, expressed in both verses 7 and 9. You may need to expressly mark this, for instance by introducing verse 8 with something like “Therefore,” and verse 9 with something like “Again, because.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:8 xy36 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go וָאֵרֵ֞ד 1 God is expressing that he is descending from heaven to earth to intervene. God is always everywhere, but this phrase means that his special attention will be directed to this situation. Use whatever form of come or go is appropriate in your language for this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
3:8 nahb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns לְהַצִּיל֣וֹ & וּֽלְהַעֲלֹתוֹ֮ 1 Here, **him** refers in the singular to the Israelites as a group. It is agreeing with “people” as a collective noun in [3:6](../03/06.md). Some languages may have to use plural pronouns. Others may have to match the pronoun’s gender to the grammatical gender of the word for “people” in their language. See what you did in the [previous verse](../03/07.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
3:8 bi4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִיַּ֣ד 1 Someone’s **hand** is a common Biblical metaphor for power and control. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:8 djbz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession מִיַּ֣ד מִצְרַ֗יִם 1 This is a possessive where the Egyptians are the subject of **the hand**, which means power. The Egyptians used their power and control to oppress the Israelites. Use a phrase in your language that expresses the idea of a group of people having power. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3:8 mqyp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism אֶל־אֶ֤רֶץ טוֹבָה֙ וּרְחָבָ֔ה אֶל־אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּדְבָ֑שׁ 1 There are multiple levels of parallelism here. First, the statements, **to a good and wide land** and **to a land flowing with milk and honey** are in parallel with each other. Within each of those, **good** and **wide** are in parallel with each other, and **milk** and **honey**are in parallel with each other. Each of these levels is meant to reinforce and expand upon one another. These are not examples of synonymous parallelism, and each part of the statement should be translated. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
3:8 xs87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּדְבָ֑שׁ 1 Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. The next note explains further. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:8 pxy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּדְבָ֑שׁ 1 God spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the milk and honey from those animals and plants were flowing through the land. If this metaphor makes sense in your language, you may translate it. If your language has metaphors that mean a land is good for producing healthy livestock and good crops, you may consider using those. If neither is the case, you may translate the meaning. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:8 dtz9 זָבַ֥ת 1 Alternate translation: “full of” or “with an abundance of”
3:8 q94i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב 1 Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:8 l1as rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וּדְבָ֑שׁ 1 Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:9 a2kf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism 0 This verse parallels [verse 7](../03/07.md). Yahweh is restating that the Israelite’s plight has gotten his attention. This creates emphasis and connection to what Yahweh will do with what Moses will do as Yahweh’s appointed leader. If this repetition would confuse your readers consider a paragraph break at the start of this verse to separate the two parallel statements or use some other strategy of emphasis and connection that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
3:9 tp2v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations הִנֵּ֛ה 1 This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “certainly.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
3:9 uup9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification צַעֲקַ֥ת בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בָּ֣אָה אֵלָ֑י 1 Here, **the cry** is spoken of as if it were a person who is capable of moving on his own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have heard the cries of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3:9 gwou rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns רָאִ֨יתִי֙ אֶת־הַלַּ֔חַץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִצְרַ֖יִם לֹחֲצִ֥ים אֹתָֽם 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **oppression** in another way. Alternate translation: “I have seen how the Egyptians are oppressing them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:10 y4m1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְעַתָּ֣ה 1 **And now** functions as a discourse marker expressing logical conclusion. “So then,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:11 y8cr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מִ֣י אָנֹ֔כִי כִּ֥י אֵלֵ֖ךְ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה וְכִ֥י אוֹצִ֛יא אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִמִּצְרָֽיִם 1 Moses uses this question to tell God that he, Moses, is not the right person for the task. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3:12 xugf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual תַּֽעַבְדוּן֙ 1 If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
3:13 lqms rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical הִנֵּ֨ה אָנֹכִ֣י בָא֮ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵל֒ וְאָמַרְתִּ֣י לָהֶ֔ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבוֹתֵיכֶ֖ם שְׁלָחַ֣נִי אֲלֵיכֶ֑ם וְאָֽמְרוּ־לִ֣י מַה־שְּׁמ֔וֹ 1 Moses presents God with a hypothetical situation here. The three events (**go, say, say**) are part of one hypothetical event. You should translate this in a way that makes it clear that this is a future, not-yet-real event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
3:13 jq42 הִנֵּ֨ה 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. In this case, Moses uses it to introduce what he views as a probable future occurrence. Alternative translation: “Now”
3:13 e03n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go בָא֮ 1 In your language, use **go** or “come” as makes most sense for Moses’ hypothetical action of going from the mountain to where the Israelites are. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
3:13 m9uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבוֹתֵיכֶ֖ם שְׁלָחַ֣נִי אֲלֵיכֶ֑ם 1 This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation inside a quotation. However, you may also choose to translate it as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “that the God of their fathers has sent me to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3:13 ru0a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבוֹתֵיכֶ֖ם 1 Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “The God of your ancestors” or “The God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:13 bkei rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result מָ֥ה אֹמַ֖ר אֲלֵהֶֽם 1 Moses is asking God what he should do as a result of the hypothetical situation he presented. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:14 cli8 אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽהְיֶ֑ה 1 This is God’s response to Moses’ question about God’s name. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “God said to Moses, ‘Tell them that God says his name is “I AM THAT I AM.”’”
3:14 b6vk אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽהְיֶ֑ה 1 This could mean: (1) this whole sentence is God’s name or (2) God is not telling his name but something about himself. By saying this, God is teaching that he is eternal; he has always lived and always will live.
3:14 s62u אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה & אֶֽהְיֶ֑ה & אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה 1 Languages that do not have an equivalent to the verb “am” may need to render this as “I LIVE” or “I EXIST.”
3:14 t745 וַיֹּ֗אמֶר 1 This indicates that God is still speaking. It may make more sense to omit this in some languages.
3:14 vigc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה שְׁלָחַ֥נִי אֲלֵיכֶֽם 1 This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation inside a quotation. However, you may also choose to translate it as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3:15 ubw7 וַיֹּאמֶר֩ ע֨וֹד אֱלֹהִ֜ים אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֗ה 1 As God is still speaking, it may make more sense to omit this in some languages.
3:15 i6lg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֗ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quotation begins that continues until [the end of chapter 3 at verse 22](../03/22.md). This section contains four levels of quotations as God tells Moses to tell the Israelite elders a specific message from God. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
3:15 l962 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes יְהוָ֞ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתֵיכֶ֗ם אֱלֹהֵ֨י אַבְרָהָ֜ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֛ק וֵאלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹ֖ב שְׁלָחַ֣נִי אֲלֵיכֶ֑ם זֶה־שְּׁמִ֣י לְעֹלָ֔ם וְזֶ֥ה זִכְרִ֖י לְדֹ֥ר דֹּֽר 1 This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. It may be possible to translate it as an indirect quotation, but you will need to be careful to correctly change the pronoun persons. Alternative translation: “You must tell the Israelites that Yahweh, the God of their fathers, the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob, sent you to them. This is his name forever, and this is his memorial from generation to generation.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3:15 d91k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתֵיכֶ֗ם 1 Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:15 ixcb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism לְדֹ֥ר דֹּֽר 1 The repetition of **generation** is indicating “to each and every generation” which means “for all people at all times.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
3:16 ec3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks יְהוָ֞ה 1 # General Information:\n\nThis begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 17](../03/17.md). It contains a third-level quotation that begins at “I have certainly” and also continues to the end of verse 17. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. The closing marks for both the second and third-level quotations should not occur until the end of verse 17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
3:16 usas rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֱלֹהֵ֤י אֲבֹֽתֵיכֶם֙ 1 Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:16 xqy9 אַבְרָהָ֛ם יִצְחָ֥ק וְיַעֲקֹ֖ב 1 Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob were three of the Israelites’ ancestors. They all worshiped the same God.
3:16 dvsz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙ 1 This begins a third-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 17](../03/17.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation that is within a quotation. The closing marks for both the second-level and third-level quotations should not occur until the end of verse 17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
3:16 efhh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙ 1 The word translated **attended** often means God is coming to take action. Translate this phrase in a way that communicates God’s focused, caring observation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:16 p258 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙ 1 Here, **attended** is repeated in Hebrew. The Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. This expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having **attended to** how his people were suffering. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:16 fv77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אֶתְכֶ֔ם 1 The word **you** refers to the people of Israel. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
3:16 q4en rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הֶעָשׂ֥וּי 1 The focus of this passive is the mistreatment being **done to** the Israelites, not on who is doing it. In fact, **in Egypt** further dissociates the actors from this sentence. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:16 johw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּמִצְרָֽיִם 1 The phrase **in Egypt** is a metonym for the Egyptian oppressors. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “by the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:17 eloj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks 0 If you are using direct quotations, at the end of this verse you should have three closing markers. In English, it looks like ’ ” ’ (without spaces). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
3:17 c54k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes אַעֲלֶ֣ה אֶתְכֶם֮ מֵעֳנִ֣י מִצְרַיִם֒ אֶל־אֶ֤רֶץ הַֽכְּנַעֲנִי֙ וְהַ֣חִתִּ֔י וְהָֽאֱמֹרִי֙ וְהַפְּרִזִּ֔י וְהַחִוִּ֖י וְהַיְבוּסִ֑י אֶל־אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּדְבָֽשׁ 1 This is a fourth-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer three levels. Alternatively, it can be translated as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3:17 r8mg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אַעֲלֶ֣ה 1 Regardless of the geographic realities, to **bring up** does not primarily have a literal meaning. Rather, it means to bring the Israelites into a better situation. God promised to bring them up from their low status as slaves to a place where they would be the masters of a good land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:17 x1o0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns מֵעֳנִ֣י 1 See how you translated **affliction** in [3:7](../03/07.md). Alternate translation: “from being afflicted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:17 wyvt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּדְבָֽשׁ 1 Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. The next note explains further. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:17 pwn5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּדְבָֽשׁ 1 God spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the milk and honey from those animals and plants were flowing through the land. See how you translated this in [Exodus 3:8](../03/08.md). Alternate translation: “a land that is excellent for raising livestock and growing crops” or “a land where milk and honey flow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:17 za9l זָבַ֥ת 1 Alternate translation: “full of” or “with an abundance of”
3:17 rtr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב 1 Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:17 msf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וּדְבָֽשׁ 1 Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:18 cy2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְשָׁמְע֖וּ לְקֹלֶ֑ךָ 1 **Listen** often means “hear and do/obey.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternative translation: “And they will pay attention to your voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:18 j24k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns לְקֹלֶ֑ךָ & אַתָּה֩ 1 Here, **your** and **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:18 w742 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche לְקֹלֶ֑ךָ 1 This phrase means the elders will listen to the message Moses brings from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to your message” or “to my message which you tell them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3:18 r74o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession וְזִקְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 This is a possessive of social relationship. Alternative translation: “elders in charge of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3:18 eep7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 **Israel** is a collective noun that refers to all the Israelites. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternative translation: “the Israelites” or “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
3:18 ot9r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִצְרַ֗יִם 1 Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptian nation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:18 idp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual וַאֲמַרְתֶּ֤ם 1 # General Information:\n\nIf your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
3:18 i47o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive עָלֵ֔ינוּ & נֵֽלֲכָה & וְנִזְבְּחָ֖ה 1 These instances of **us** are exclusive; they include Moses, the elders, and all the Israelites, but exclude the king of Egypt. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3:19 qf46 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְלֹ֖א בְּיָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 The word **hand** is a metonym for the power of the owner of the hand. There are two further difficulties: (1) Whose hand (power) is being referred to, (2) does the negative mean “not unless” or “not even?” Possible meanings include: (1) “only if he sees that he has no power to do anything else,” where the **hand** belongs to Pharaoh (2) “only if I force him to let you go,” where the **hand** belongs to Yahweh, taking “not unless” for the negative (3) “not even if I force him to let you go,” where the **hand** belongs to Yahweh, taking “not even” for the negative (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:20 nuzx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְשָׁלַחְתִּ֤י 1 God says this will be a result of the king of Egypt’s stubbornness. Alternate translation: “Therefore, I will send out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:20 yds5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְשָׁלַחְתִּ֤י אֶת־יָדִי֙ 1 Here, **hand** refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “I will use my strength” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:20 dzsp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 **Egypt** refers to both the land and the people group, and then, by extension, to Pharaoh as well. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:20 c9a3 מִצְרַ֔יִם & בְּקִרְבּ֑וֹ 1 Here, **him** refers to Egypt as a collective.
3:20 g0i9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns נִפְלְאֹתַ֔י 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **wonders** in another way. Alternate translation: “my amazing acts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:20 sqmt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וְאַחֲרֵי־כֵ֖ן 1 Here the sequential nature of these happenings is emphasized. Consider using a stronger sequential connective term than usual here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
3:20 ay53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns יְשַׁלַּ֥ח 1 Here, **he** refers to the Pharaoh, the king of Egypt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:20 awxs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אֶתְכֶֽם 1 Here, **you** refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
3:21 btwc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom חֵ֥ן & בְּעֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 **In the eyes of the Egyptians** is an idiom for the Egyptian’s feelings. **Favor** means those feelings are positive. Taken together, this means that when the Egyptians see the Israelites (Hebrews) leaving Egypt, they will gladly help them (because they want them to leave so badly due to the Egyptians suffering under God’s judgment). If your language has the same or a similar idiom, you can translate or use it. Otherwise, you can translate the meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:21 hfrr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession בְּעֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 This is a part-whole possessive. Also, if your language uses a specific form of the possessive for things one cannot lose, it would be appropriate to use that form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3:21 uz3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual תֵֽלֵכ֔וּן & תֵלְכ֖וּ 1 If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
3:21 wymx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go תֵֽלֵכ֔וּן & תֵלְכ֖וּ 1 Alternate translation: “leave” or “go out” or “come out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
3:21 j9qz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives לֹ֥א & רֵיקָֽם 1 The double negative, **not … emptily** is used to mean “full.” If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “[go] with many things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3:21 kt7b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes לֹ֥א תֵלְכ֖וּ רֵיקָֽם 1 Here Yahweh uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “you will go with your hands full of good things” or “you will go with many valuable things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3:22 w2av וּמִגָּרַ֣ת בֵּיתָ֔הּ 1 The word, **sojourning** means living somewhere other than one’s native land, usually temporarily. It is unclear both who the sojourning (visiting) women are and in whose house they are sojourning, leaving several possibilities. Most translations which make a decision about who they are identify both the temporary resident and her host home as Egyptian. This makes sense as the Israelites will be plundering the Egyptians. If it is possible to leave this ambiguous in your translation, that would be best.
3:22 fmfu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual וְשַׂמְתֶּ֗ם עַל־בְּנֵיכֶם֙ וְעַל־בְּנֹ֣תֵיכֶ֔ם וְנִצַּלְתֶּ֖ם 1 Each of these is a plural **you.** If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
3:22 h38j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks מִצְרָֽיִם 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s word which started in [verse 15](../03/15.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
4:intro kap5 0 # Exodus 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-17: Moses hesitates to obey so Yahweh gives Moses signs to prove his commission\n- v. 18-28: Moses goes back to Egypt\n- v. 29-31: Moses and Aaron meet with the Israelite leaders and tell them what Yahweh said\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n### Quotations\n\n * There is a difficult transition between [4:4](../04/04.md) and [4:5](../04/05.md) because the quotation stops in the middle to inject a bit of narrative. When it resumes in [4:5](../04/05.md), the sentence seems incomplete (even if merged directly with the quotation fragment in [4:4](../04/04.md)). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])* Yahweh’s instructions to Moses are complex, and there are up to four levels of quotations in this chapter. Translators will need to decide if some of these need to become indirect quotations (if that is possible in their language) and take great care to use the proper quotation markings in the proper locations.\n\n### Order of events\n\n* The order of events is not always clear. In [4:14](../04/14.md) Yahweh tells Moses that Aaron is coming to meet him, but Yahweh telling Aaron to go meet Moses in the wilderness is not recorded until [4:27](../04/27.md).\n* The timing of the events in [4:18](../18/.md)\\-[4:27](../04/27.md), especially verses 18-19 and 27 in relation to the rest of the events of the chapter, is unclear.\n\n### Thus says Yahweh\n\nThe first of over 400 occurrences throughout the Old Testament of a standard phrase used to introduce direct, authoritative instruction from Yahweh occurs in [4:22](../04/22.md). It occurs ten times in the book of Exodus; nine of these are between chapters 4–11. It would be good for your team to have a standard way to translate this that makes it clear that the words that come next are directly from God. If your language has a standard way of introducing a new message from your leader that alerts the hearers that these are the words of the leader, that would be a good phrase to consider.\n\n### Yahweh’s attempt to kill someone\n\nThe encounter recorded from [4:24](../04/24.md) to [4:26](../04/26.md) is one of the strangest and most difficult passages in the entire book. Difficulties include:\n\n* To whom do the pronouns refer? Masculine pronouns are used throughout the section, but there are two possible antecedents, Moses (who is not named in the narrative) and Zipporah’s son (who was presumably also Moses’ son, but this is how he is referred to in this text. For why, see below on why Yahweh did this). Most commentators believe the pronouns refer to Moses.\n* Circumcision is described in fairly graphic detail. Different cultures will need to approach this differently. Some may have terms for circumcision, while others may be comfortable translating mostly literally, and others will need to use euphemisms or other strategies to translate. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]])\n* The meaning of the phrase **a bridegroom of blood** (ULT) is unknown.\n* Why did Yahweh attack Moses? Many commentators conclude that Moses had neglected to circumcise one of his sons because it displeased Zipporah, and Yahweh was holding Moses responsible before he returned to lead the Israelites (who should have been circumcised). When Zipporah repented by circumcising the son herself and touching the foreskin to Moses’ feet, Yahweh relents. These conclusions should help inform translation but should not be made explicit in the text.\n\n## Study Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Children of God\n\nThis chapter introduces the concept that Israel, the people group, is the chosen people of God and God’s firstborn son. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/elect]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/firstborn]])\n\n### Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart\n\nScholars are divided over how to understand this statement. There is debate over how Pharaoh has an active or passive role in the hardening of his own heart. Translators should simply follow the text. In Exodus
4:1 j4yg וַיַּ֤עַן מֹשֶׁה֙ וַיֹּ֔אמֶר 1 Here, **answered and said** is a Hebrew expression which does not convey any extra information. Unless your language naturally uses a similar structure, it is better to translate one verb and omit the other. Alternate translation: “Moses answered”
4:1 b3xv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks וְהֵן֙ לֹֽא־יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ לִ֔י וְלֹ֥א יִשְׁמְע֖וּ בְּקֹלִ֑י כִּ֣י יֹֽאמְר֔וּ לֹֽא־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֖יךָ יְהוָֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
4:1 pq8x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּקֹלִ֑י 1 See [3:18](../03/18.md). Alternate translation: “to what I say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:1 neto rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes לֹֽא־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֖יךָ יְהוָֽה 1 This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you could translate it as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “that Yahweh has not appeared to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
4:1 fu2x וְהֵן֙ 1 This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “Listen to me.”
4:2 qmvk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns אֵלָ֛יו & וַיֹּ֖אמֶר 1 Here, **him** and **he** refer to Moses. Alternate translation: “to Moses … And Moses said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:3 zycd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִפָּנָֽיו 1 Here, “face” represents the snake itself. Alternative translation: “from the snake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:4 g6bk וֶאֱחֹ֖ז בִּזְנָב֑וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “and pick it up by the tail” or “and grasp it by the tail”
4:4 bzmp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential שְׁלַח֙ יָֽדְךָ֔ וֶאֱחֹ֖ז בִּזְנָב֑וֹ 1 This direct quotation is interrupted by Moses obeying Yahweh. This is probably a tightly ordered sequence of events where Yahweh paused and then continued speaking immediately after Moses obeyed. The quote resumes in [verse 5](../04/05.md), and there is more discussion there about how to translate the quotation resumption. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
4:4 m86n וַיְהִ֥י לְמַטֶּ֖ה 1 Alternate translation: “and it turned into a rod” or “and it changed into a staff”
4:5 l4tn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks לְמַ֣עַן יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֛יךָ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵאלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב 1 This continues the direct quotation from the first part of [verse 4](../04/04.md). It may be more natural to reorganize verses four and five to keep the quote together. If you rearrange like this, Moses picking up the snake/staff should come after the full quotation. However, it is better to do something similar to the UST, which restates that Yahweh is speaking and provides some implied directives from Yahweh to make a complete sentence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
4:5 m4fk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis לְמַ֣עַן יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֛יךָ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵאלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב 1 This quote is not a complete sentence; the UST provides a clarification. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
4:5 zbfr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ & אֲבֹתָ֑ם 1 Here, **them** and **their** refer either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is a better option. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:5 jr8m אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵאלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב 1 Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob were three of their ancestors. They all worshiped the same God.
4:6 ep52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations וְהִנֵּ֥ה 1 This word, **behold**, is used to create an exclamation, showing surprise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
4:6 pw7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile כַּשָּֽׁלֶג 1 The word **like** (ULT) or “as” (UST) here is used to compare how Moses’ hand looked. You may not have a word for snow in your language. If so, consider an alternative that describes something very white. You may need to make the whiteness explicit. Alternate translation: “that made it look white like wool” or “that made it look white like the sand on the beach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
4:7 prr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations וְהִנֵּה 1 This word is used to create an exclamation, showing surprise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
4:8 well rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification וְלֹ֣א יִשְׁמְע֔וּ לְקֹ֖ל הָאֹ֣ת הָרִאשׁ֑וֹן וְהֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ לְקֹ֖ל הָאֹ֥ת הָאַחֲרֽוֹן 1 Here each **sign** is spoken of as if it had a **voice** with which it could speak. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly that makes explicit that the signs are meant to be proof that God sent Moses. Alternative translation: “and are not convinced that God has appeared to you by seeing the first sign, then they will be convinced by seeing the second sign.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
4:8 gxlg rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ & יִשְׁמְע֔וּ & וְהֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ 1 Here, **they** refers either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is the better option, but be sure to do the same as you did in [verse 5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:8 lsb3 לֹ֣א יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ & וְהֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ 1 Alternate translation: “they do not acknowledge … then they will acknowledge” or “they do not accept … then they will accept”
4:9 q82r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns יַאֲמִ֡ינוּ & יִשְׁמְעוּן֙ 1 Here, **they** refers either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is the better option, but be sure to do the same as you did in [verse 5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:9 jsvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְקֹלֶ֔ךָ 1 See [3:18](../03/18.md). Alternate translation: “to what you say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:10 t8i9 בִּ֣י 1 This word is used by a speaker to beg a superior to allow him to speak. Alternate translation: “Please”
4:10 w12a לֹא֩ אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים אָנֹ֗כִי גַּ֤ם מִתְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִשִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “I have never been an excellent speaker, not now, not before”
4:10 opes אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים 1 This expression means “a man who uses words well,” in other words, an eloquent man who can speak well and convincingly.
4:10 pk0l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism גַּ֤ם מִתְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִשִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 These phrases simply mean “in the past.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
4:10 wsl4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person עַבְדֶּ֑ךָ 1 Moses refers to himself as God’s servant to lower his status before God (and perhaps by doing so to make his argument of inability stronger). If this is confusing in your language, you can make who he means plain. Alternate translation: “me, your servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
4:10 bv64 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet כְבַד־פֶּ֛ה וּכְבַ֥ד לָשׁ֖וֹן 1 These phrases mean basically the same thing. Moses uses them to emphasize that he is not a good speaker. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “not good at public speaking”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:10 zm3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לָשׁ֖וֹן 1 Here, **tongue** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “speech” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:11 ks2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מִ֣י שָׂ֣ם פֶּה֮ לָֽאָדָם֒ 1 Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the Creator who makes it possible for people to speak. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Is it not I, Yahweh, who created the human mouth and the ability to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4:11 e1y6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מִֽי־יָשׂ֣וּם אִלֵּ֔ם א֣וֹ חֵרֵ֔שׁ א֥וֹ פִקֵּ֖חַ א֣וֹ עִוֵּ֑ר 1 Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the one who decides if people can speak and hear, and if they can see. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “make people able to speak or hear or to see or to be blind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4:11 uq7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הֲלֹ֥א אָנֹכִ֖י יְהוָֽה 1 Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he alone makes these decisions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am the one who does this!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4:12 kkr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְאָנֹכִי֙ אֶֽהְיֶ֣ה עִם־פִּ֔יךָ 1 Here, **mouth** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will give you the ability to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:13 brer בִּ֣י 1 This word is used by a speaker to beg a superior to allow him to speak. See what you did in [verse 10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “Please”
4:13 s8nl שְֽׁלַֽח־נָ֖א בְּיַד־תִּשְׁלָֽח 1 In translating this phrase, it is important to make clear that Moses is asking Yahweh to send someone else. Here he is not accepting Yahweh’s commission.
4:13 y4a7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche בְּיַד 1 This phrase means “by a person.” The figure is of a person taking Yahweh’s message in his hand to the Israelites and Pharaoh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
4:14 uy2v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַיִּֽחַר־אַ֨ף יְהוָ֜ה 1 This means that Yahweh is angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh became angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:14 okko rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הֲלֹ֨א אַהֲרֹ֤ן אָחִ֨יךָ֙ הַלֵּוִ֔י 1 Yahweh uses this rhetorical question to suggest an alternative to Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternative translation: “I know you have a brother, Aaron the Levite.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4:14 e0js rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship אָחִ֨יךָ֙ 1 Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
4:14 y5ed rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom דַבֵּ֥ר יְדַבֵּ֖ר 1 In Hebrew, the word **speak** is repeated. This means he speaks well. English cannot convey this by doubling, so the meaning of the repetition was translated in the ULT in this case. If your language can say something like “speaking speaks” to mean “speaks well,” consider it; otherwise, translate the meaning similarly to the ULT or UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:14 c51y הִנֵּה 1 Here, **behold** is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. If your language has a term that functions in that way (“Listen!” or “Look!” or “Pay Attention!”), use it here.
4:14 ettp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go יֹצֵ֣א 1 Yahweh says Aaron is coming from Egypt to Midian to find Moses. He is probably on foot. Depending on the language, the required form of go or come may vary. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
4:14 tfsa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְשָׂמַ֥ח 1 Aaron will be glad because he sees Moses. Consider a conjunction or other form that expresses result, as in the UST or alternative translation: “and because he sees you, he will have joy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4:14 ew4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּלִבּֽוֹ 1 Here, **heart** refers to inner thoughts and emotions. If the heart is not a body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s thoughts and emotions, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:15 u97f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor הַדְּבָרִ֖ים 1 Words here are spoken of as if they were something that can be physically placed in a person’s mouth. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message that he is to repeat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:15 q9cf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְאָנֹכִ֗י אֶֽהְיֶ֤ה עִם־פִּ֨יךָ֙ וְעִם־פִּ֔יהוּ 1 The word **mouth** here represents Moses’ and Aaron’s choice of words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And I will be with you as you speak and with him as he speaks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:15 v57x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אֶתְכֶ֔ם & תַּעֲשֽׂוּן 1 These refer to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form if you have one or, if not, use a plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
4:16 mnsp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile לְפֶ֔ה 1 This phrase compares Aaron to a mouth because he will be the one to actually vocalize to the Israelites and Pharaoh what Moses tells him to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one to say what you tell him to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
4:16 gn5v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile תִּֽהְיֶה־לּ֥וֹ לֵֽאלֹהִֽים 1 The word **like** here means Moses would represent the same authority to Aaron as God did to Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you will speak to Aaron with the same authority with which I speak to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
4:17 hm47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הַמַּטֶּ֥ה הַזֶּ֖ה 1 Yahweh assumes that Moses will know that by **this staff**, he means the one that Moses said he had in his hand in [verse 2](../04/02.md) and with which God told him to do a miracle in [verses 3-4](../04/03.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:18 j2ix rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants יֶ֣תֶר 1 Jethro is reintroduced as a participant in the narrative here. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
4:18 cbop rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go וַיֵּ֨לֶךְ 1 Because the setting has shifted back to Jethro’s home, some languages may need to use “come” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
4:18 b6mf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship חֹֽתְנ֗וֹ 1 This refers to the father of Moses’ wife. If your language uses a different term for the husband’s or wife’s father use the one for wife’s father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
4:18 urt0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אַחַ֣י 1 Here the term **brothers** refers more broadly to all of Moses’ people group, those he is related to. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my relatives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:18 gq2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְאֶרְאֶ֖ה הַעוֹדָ֣ם חַיִּ֑ים 1 Later in the Bible we are told that Moses was in Midian for 40 years. Moses’ request may have been literal or an idiom that meant he wanted to know how they were doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:18 yay3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing לֵ֥ךְ לְשָׁלֽוֹם 1 This is a phrase of assent and blessing. It may be necessary for some languages to explicitly add, “Yes,” to the beginning of Jethro’s response. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
4:19 wwr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וַיֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֤ה אֶל־מֹשֶׁה֙ 1 The timing and situation for Yahweh speaking to Moses here is not specified. Some conjecture that it was part of the narrative of the encounter with Yahweh from the previous verses but placed after his request to Jethro for an unknown reason. Another speculation is that Moses delayed returning to Egypt (either by his own choice, Yahweh’s instructions, or someone else delaying him) and Yahweh came and told him again (the UST explicitly offers this optional translation). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
4:19 clfj הַֽמְבַקְשִׁ֖ים אֶת־נַפְשֶֽׁךָ 1 This means they were seeking to end his life, that is, to kill him.
4:20 fua6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo בָּנָ֗יו 1 Moses’ second son is not introduced until [18:4](../18/.04.md) but had already been born before they left Midian. It is not necessary to make this explicit here, if it would confuse your readers you could add a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
4:20 zi5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וַיָּ֖שָׁב אַ֣רְצָה מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 It is clear from [verse 24](../04/24.md) and [25](../04/25.md) that Moses’ family went with him. If this is confusing in your language, you may need to change from **he** to “they” **returned**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
4:20 a1s5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וַיָּ֖שָׁב אַ֣רְצָה מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 After the incident on the road in verses [24-26](../04/24.md). Moses’ family is not mentioned again until [18:2](../18/02.md), which says that Moses sent them back, so it may be better to make a translation similar to the UST, which only commits to the family starting on the way to Egypt. This option has the further benefit of allowing for the several events that happen before Moses gets to Egypt. The ULT’s **toward** is another way of giving space in the translation for the next several events. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
4:20 f26l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מַטֵּ֥ה הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 The phrase **the staff of God** refers to the staff that God told Moses to take with him in [verse 17](../04/17.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:20 m4uj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מַטֵּ֥ה הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 The book describes this staff as **the staff of God** because God appointed it as his instrument so that Moses could do miraculous works through it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Make sure your translation does not lead people to think the staff was a magic wand or shaman’s staff that had its own power or power from Moses or that the staff gave Moses the ability to command God. In every instance where miracles happened, first God told Moses to do something with the staff, then Moses obeyed, and then God caused a miracle. Alternate translation: “the staff that God had told him to bring because God intended to work powerfully through it when Moses stretched it out.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:21 lva8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks בְּלֶכְתְּךָ֙ 1 This begins a direct quotation that continues to the end of [4:23](../04/23.md). It contains up to fourth-level quotations. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
4:21 oajf רְאֵ֗ה 1 Most translations and interpretations of the verb **see** take it to mean something like “see that you do.”
4:21 paos rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כָּל־הַמֹּֽפְתִים֙ אֲשֶׁר־שַׂ֣מְתִּי בְיָדֶ֔ךָ 1 Here the miracles are spoken of as if they were items Moses could carry. In part, this may be because the three signs already given to Moses involved the use of his hand. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “all the wonders I have authorized you to perform” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:21 kdsb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֑ה 1 This time, while **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Moses is to actually do the miracles in front of Pharaoh so he can see them. Alternative translation: “so Pharaoh can see them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:21 ovma rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַאֲנִי֙ אֲחַזֵּ֣ק 1 Referring to himself in the opening of this sentence serves to emphasize a contrast between what might normally be expected and what will actually happen. Translate this in a way that clearly contrasts the performance of miracles before Pharaoh (which might be expected to lead to him releasing the Israelites) with what Yahweh says Pharaoh will do. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
4:21 uvoh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַאֲנִי֙ אֲחַזֵּ֣ק אֶת־לִבּ֔וֹ 1 This means that God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart would be made stronger. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternate translation: “But as for me, I will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:21 uudz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְלֹ֥א יְשַׁלַּ֖ח אֶת־הָעָֽם 1 Make it clear in your translation that this is a result of God hardening Pharaoh’s heart. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4:22 ftde כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This is the first of hundreds of occurrences throughout the Old Testament of a standard phrase, **Thus says Yahweh**, used to introduce direct, authoritative instruction from Yahweh. It would be good for your team to have a standard way to translate this that makes it clear that the words that come next are directly from God. If your language has a standard way of introducing a new message from your rulers that alerts the hearers that these are the words of the rulers, that would be a good phrase to consider.
4:22 teyy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of [4:23](../04/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “that Yahweh says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
4:22 kud7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks בְּנִ֥י בְכֹרִ֖י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ 1 This is the beginning of a third-level quotation that continues until the end of [4:23](../04/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. (If you chose to translate, “Thus says Yahweh,” as an indirect quote, this will be a second- level quotation.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
4:22 gr2d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנִ֥י 1 Yahweh expresses his affection for the Israelites by calling them his **son**. Some languages may need to change the metaphor here into a simile. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:22 pt4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 The word **Israel** here represents all the people of Israel as a group. It is important to keep the singular reference to Israel as son rather than change it to something like ‘the Israelites are my children,’ because God is making a particular contrast here between his son and Pharaoh’s son. Some languages may not be able to use “Israel” as a collective noun and may need to choose a translation like “the nation of Israel” or “the Israelite nation.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
4:22 nbn7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 The Israelite nation is often referred to simply by the name of the patriarch. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “The Israelites are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:23 syar rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks שַׁלַּ֤ח אֶת־בְּנִי֙ וְיַֽעַבְדֵ֔נִי 1 This is a fourth-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. (If you chose to translate “Thus says Yahweh” as an indirect quote, this will be a third-level quotation.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
4:23 yyuo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וָאֹמַ֣ר אֵלֶ֗יךָ שַׁלַּ֤ח אֶת־בְּנִי֙ וְיַֽעַבְדֵ֔נִי וַתְּמָאֵ֖ן 1 The fourth-level quotation here may be a good one to translate as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “and I told you to let my son go that he may serve me. But you have refused” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
4:23 k7mh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנִי֙ 1 Yahweh continues to metaphorically speak of Israel as **my son.** See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternative translation: “the Israelite nation, which is like a son to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:23 u825 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns וְיַֽעַבְדֵ֔נִי & לְשַׁלְּח֑וֹ 1 The pronouns **he** and **him** agree with “son.” What you use may depend on how you translated son in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
4:23 ot2b הִנֵּה֙ 1 This is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternative translation: “Know this”
4:23 re11 בִּנְךָ֖ 1 Here, **your son** refers to the actual son of Pharaoh.
4:23 ubcw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks בִּנְךָ֖ בְּכֹרֶֽךָ 1 After this phrase, the three levels of direct quotations end, bringing a complete close to all quotations that started in verses [21](../04/21.md) and [22](../04/22.md). If you are using direct quotations, at the end of this verse you should have three closing markers: third level, second level and first level. In English, it looks like **” ’ ”** (without spaces). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
4:24 sp6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיְהִ֥י 1 This introduces a new event. Mark the transition in a natural way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
4:24 p820 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns וַיִּפְגְּשֵׁ֣הוּ & הֲמִיתֽוֹ 1 Here, it is not clear who **him** refers to. Most commentators believe it refers to Moses, but it could refer to the son, though that is less likely. If it is necessary to choose for your translation, use Moses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:25 m1la rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names צִפֹּרָ֜ה 1 **Zipporah** is the name of Moses’ wife. See how you translated it in [2:21](../02/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:25 sftg rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants צִפֹּרָ֜ה 1 **Zipporah** is introduced here as a new character. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
4:25 a36h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown צֹ֗ר 1 This was a flake or a sharp piece of a hard gray rock that was used as a knife.. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4:25 nkxn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown עָרְלַ֣ת 1 The**foreskin** is the retractable fold of skin which covers and protects the end of the penis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4:25 l6sr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism לְרַגְלָ֑יו 1 It is possible that the word **feet** may have been a more respectful way to refer to the genital area of the body. However, that possibility is not high enough that you should translate it either literally as genitals or with another euphemism meaning genitals in your language. If you have a word that means primarily feet or legs, but could in some cases also euphemistically mean genitals, you may consider it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
4:25 b2t3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּ֧י חֲתַן־דָּמִ֛ים אַתָּ֖ה לִֽי 1 The meaning of this metaphor is unclear. It was probably a known saying in that culture. Alternate translation: “You are related to me by this blood” or “You are my husband because of blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:26 ceqk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וַיִּ֖רֶף 1 God **relented** as a result of Zipporah’s action. Consider a conjunction or other form that expresses result, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4:26 k136 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns מִמֶּ֑נּוּ 1 As in [4:24](../04/24.md), **him** could refer to either Moses or the son, but most commentators think it is still Moses. The UST uses “anyone” to preserve ambiguity. Alternative translation: “from Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:26 r8hj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations חֲתַ֥ן דָּמִ֖ים 1 This is a unique quotation because Zipporah probably does not speak again; rather, the quotation refers back to her statement in [4:25](../04/25.md). Use a form from your language for quoting a portion of what someone previously said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
4:26 abmg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks חֲתַ֥ן דָּמִ֖ים לַמּוּלֹֽת 1 It is not clear if the quotation includes **because of the circumcision** or if that is a comment explaining the quotation. Translations are divided in where they end the quotation, but most exclude **because of the circumcision**, and it is best to follow that unless a locally respected translation includes it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
4:27 xk6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֹּ֤אמֶר 1 You may want to add a word that marks the beginning of a new part of the story, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
4:27 qxpc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 **Aaron** is introduced as a new participant. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
4:27 wy4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession בְּהַ֥ר הָאֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4:27 tfn2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַיִּשַּׁק 1 This was a traditional way of greeting which showed love. You can make this explicit, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
4:28 ad9x שְׁלָח֑וֹ & צִוָּֽהוּ 1 These are a bit awkward to translate in English, so the UST adds more information. Other languages may not have the same difficulty.
4:28 b429 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns שְׁלָח֑וֹ & צִוָּֽהוּ 1 Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Yahweh, and **him** refers to Moses. Alternative translation: “Yahweh sent Moses … Yahweh commanded Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:29 y8o3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֵּ֥לֶךְ 1 This begins a new event which you may need to mark in your translation with a transitional word like the UST’s “When.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
4:30 bm2x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְעֵינֵ֥י הָעָֽם 1 Here, **before the eyes** means he did the signs so they could see them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “in their sight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:30 x1v3 הָעָֽם 1 Context suggests that **people** refers to the leaders gathered in [4:29](../04/29.md).
4:31 glp2 הָעָ֑ם 1 Context suggests that **people** refers to the leaders gathered in [4:29](../04/29.md).
4:31 q1er פָקַ֨ד & בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל 1 Alternate translation: “saw the Israelites” or “was concerned about the Israelites”
4:31 g83a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַֽיִּקְּד֖וּ וַיִּֽשְׁתַּחֲוּֽוּ 1 This action was an expression of thankful worship. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternative translations: “they bowed their heads in awe” or “they bowed down low in reverence.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
5:intro kea2 0 # Exodus 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-5: Moses gives Pharaoh Yahweh’s message\n- v. 6-21: Pharaoh makes the Israelites work harder\n- v. 22-23: Moses asks Yahweh why things went badly
5:1 q0zv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וְאַחַ֗ר בָּ֚אוּ מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְאַהֲרֹ֔ן וַיֹּאמְר֖וּ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 The time phrase, **and afterward**, marks a transition in the narrative. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternative translation: “After that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
5:1 q9kn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וְאַחַ֗ר בָּ֚אוּ מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְאַהֲרֹ֔ן וַיֹּאמְר֖וּ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 It is unclear how long Moses and Aaron waited before they went to see Pharaoh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
5:1 cudx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go בָּ֚אוּ 1 In this instance, depending on how they have to set scenes, some languages may need to use “came in.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
5:1 tsnv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 Pharaoh is reintroduced as a participant in the narrative for the first time since chapter two. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
5:1 jarm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל שַׁלַּח֙ אֶת־עַמִּ֔י וְיָחֹ֥גּוּ לִ֖י בַּמִּדְבָּֽר 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There is a second-level quotation fully contained within this portion which is addressed elsewhere. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
5:1 lu3i כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
5:1 u2vt וְיָחֹ֥גּוּ 1 This is a celebration to worship Yahweh. Alternative translation: “so they can worship me with eating and drinking”
5:2 v4c1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַיֹּ֣אמֶר 1 The result here is exactly as God has said; therefore, a contrastive transition word is reasonable but not required, given the immediate human context. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
5:2 lqwt מִ֤י יְהוָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶשְׁמַ֣ע בְּקֹל֔וֹ לְשַׁלַּ֖ח אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 This is not a rhetorical question, though Pharaoh may have spoken with contempt. Pharaoh would have considered himself a god. The Egyptians had several gods, and most people groups were assumed to have their own gods. Therefore, Pharaoh had truly not heard of Yahweh (who has just revealed his name to Moses).
5:2 wpff rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל & יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Here the nation is spoken of as an individual. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternative translation: “the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
5:2 c653 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּקֹל֔וֹ 1 Here, **his voice** represent the words God spoke. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what he says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:2 ma6b וְגַ֥ם 1 This functions to strengthen Pharaoh’s statement about his decision. Alternative translation: “and most definitely”
5:3 dt39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וַיֹּ֣אמְר֔וּ 1 It may not make sense in all languages for multiple people to speak. Since Aaron was appointed as Moses’ spokesman, consider the alternative translation: “Aaron replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
5:3 y9ip אֱלֹהֵ֥י הָעִבְרִ֖ים 1 This term, **The God of the Hebrews**, is also used for Yahweh, the Israelites’ God.
5:3 kclj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive עָלֵ֑ינוּ נֵ֣לֲכָה & וְנִזְבְּחָה֙ & יִפְגָּעֵ֔נוּ 1 Here, **us** (or “we” in UST) refers to the Hebrew people (the Israelites). It excludes Pharaoh and his people. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
5:3 gfs5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בֶחָֽרֶב 1 Here, **sword** represents war or an attack by enemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “cause our enemies to attack us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:4 kl1i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion לָ֚מָּה מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְאַהֲרֹ֔ן תַּפְרִ֥יעוּ אֶת־הָעָ֖ם מִמַּֽעֲשָׂ֑יו 1 Pharaoh uses this rhetorical question to express his anger toward Moses and Aaron for taking the Israelites away from their work. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Stop distracting the people from doing their work!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5:4 fiw9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual לְכ֖וּ לְסִבְלֹתֵיכֶֽם 1 This **your** could refer to Moses and Aaron, or it could mean “all you Israelite people.” The second meaning is more likely. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
5:5 xm4z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases וַיֹּ֣אמֶר פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 It is unusual for the same speaker to be reintroduced like this. Some translations omit the repetition, but there is another option. This statement may be more connected to the next couple of verses, so it might be appropriate to make a minor break before this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
5:5 nqbe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside וַיֹּ֣אמֶר פַּרְעֹ֔ה הֵן־רַבִּ֥ים עַתָּ֖ה עַ֣ם הָאָ֑רֶץ וְהִשְׁבַּתֶּ֥ם אֹתָ֖ם מִסִּבְלֹתָֽם 1 This statement by Pharaoh may have been him commenting to himself, or he may have only thought this statement silently; either way, it led to his next actions. If this would be confusing in your language, consider stating it in a way that clarifies that his statement or thoughts here impacted his next actions. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
5:5 todi הֵן 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say.
5:5 c53k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual וְהִשְׁבַּתֶּ֥ם 1 Here, **you** means Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form if you have one, or if not, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
5:6 ar9m וַיְצַ֥ו פַּרְעֹ֖ה & אֶת־הַנֹּגְשִׂ֣ים בָּעָ֔ם וְאֶת־שֹׁטְרָ֖יו לֵאמֹֽר 1 Pharaoh may have sent a messenger or messengers to the taskmasters and officers or spoken to one or a few representatives of them at his court rather than speaking to them directly. Alternative translation: “And … Pharaoh gave an order to the taskmasters among the people and officers. He said,”
5:6 zd4m הַנֹּגְשִׂ֣ים 1 **Taskmasters** were Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work. These are probably the same as the “overseers” of labor gangs from [Exodus 1:11](../01/11.md), but here the term is harsher. Alternative translation: “oppressors”
5:6 gsdx שֹׁטְרָ֖יו 1 **Officers** were probably Israelite slaves who were in charge of the other Israelites but who answered to the Egyptian taskmasters.
5:6 dxih לֵאמֹֽר 1 Here, **saying** is a way of introducing a direct quotation in Hebrew; most translations can omit it without harm.
5:7 k6io rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual לֹ֣א תֹאסִפ֞וּן 1 This command was given to multiple people; if your language distinguishes between singular and plural forms when giving commands, make sure this is a plural form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
5:7 p9nx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כִּתְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֑ם 1 This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternative translation: “as you used to do” or “as was done previously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:8 izkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual תָּשִׂ֣ימוּ 1 If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
5:8 ro25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַלְּבֵנִ֜ים 1 **Bricks** are blocks made of clay or mud with straw in them. They are hardened in the sun or in another manner before they are used for building. See how you translated in [1:14](../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
5:8 dlzx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom תְּמ֤וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁם֙ 1 This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” See how you translated this in [5:7](../05/07md) Alternative translation: “before” or “previously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:9 xca1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְאַל־יִשְׁע֖וּ בְּדִבְרֵי־שָֽׁקֶר 1 Here words are spoken of as if they could be looked upon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternative translation: “and not listen to words that are lies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:10 ozzn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֵּ֨צְא֜וּ 1 This begins a new scene, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
5:10 x4bi נֹגְשֵׂ֤י 1 **Taskmasters** were Egyptians whose job was to force the Israelites to do hard work. See how you translated this in [5:6](../05/06.md).
5:10 zvxx כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 This is the same quotation introduction as is used when Yahweh gives a direct command. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
5:10 c12s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיֹּאמְר֥וּ אֶל־הָעָ֖ם לֵאמֹ֑ר כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 It might be helpful in some languages to translate **thus says Pharaoh** as an indirect quote so that his conveyed command is not a quote within a quote. Alternate translation: “and told the people that Pharaoh says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
5:10 mkom rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes אֵינֶ֛נִּי 1 This is the beginning of a second-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 11. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the start of a quotation within a quotation. However, you could also translate this as an indirect quote. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
5:10 ad73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast אֵינֶ֛נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָכֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן 1 The structure of this phrase and the one that opens [the next verse](../05/11.md) create a strong contrast between what **I** (Pharaoh) and **you** (you all, the Israelites) will do. Translate this in a way that emphasizes, if possible, the contrast between **I** and **you.** Alternative translation: “It is not I who will give you straw.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
5:10 si2e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֵינֶ֛נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָכֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן 1 Pharaoh uses **I** to refer to his ownership and commands. Pharaoh does not physically give the Israelites straw. Rather, he had commanded his servants to take straw that belonged to Pharaoh and give it to the Israelites. Now he told his servants to stop providing straw. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “My servants will no longer give you my straw” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:10 gb4d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual לָכֶ֖ם 1 **You**is plural and refers to the Israelite people. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
5:11 ewg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast אַתֶּ֗ם לְכ֨וּ קְח֤וּ לָכֶם֙ תֶּ֔בֶן מֵאֲשֶׁ֖ר תִּמְצָ֑אוּ 1 The structure of this phrase serves as the opposing side of the contrast Pharaoh sets up in the last phrase. By explicitly using a pronoun with a command, he is emphasizing who will go get straw. If possible, translate this in a way that emphasizes the contrast between **I** and **you.** See the previous verse. Alternative translation: “Rather, it is you yourselves who must go get straw from wherever you might find it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
5:11 xe4i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אַתֶּ֗ם 1 Here, **you** is plural and refers to the Israelite people. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
5:11 w918 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns אַתֶּ֗ם & לָכֶם֙ 1 The repetition of **you** (as **your**) emphasizes that the Egyptians will no longer help the slaves. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
5:11 g5vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives כִּ֣י אֵ֥ין נִגְרָ֛ע מֵעֲבֹדַתְכֶ֖ם דָּבָֽר 1 If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “for you must continue to make the same number of bricks as before” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
5:12 s9dk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole בְּכָל־אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 This is a generalization used to show the extra effort Israel made to meet Pharaoh’s demands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that means many places. Alternate translation: “to many places throughout Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
5:12 q7y7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown קַ֖שׁ 1 **Stubble** is the part of a plant that is left over after harvest. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
5:13 th6x וְהַנֹּגְשִׂ֖ים 1 **Taskmasters** were Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work. See how you translated this in [Exodus 5:6](../05/06.md).
5:13 ikkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants וְהַנֹּגְשִׂ֖ים 1 The change of subject is emphasized here. If your language has a way of specifically focusing on the actor in a narrative, use it here. See the UST for how that is done in English. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
5:13 a5ja דְּבַר־י֣וֹם בְּיוֹמ֔וֹ 1 **Day by day** means “daily.” Alternative translation: “the daily task”
5:14 h4uo נֹגְשֵׂ֥י 1 **Taskmasters** are Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work. See how you translated this in [Exodus 5:6](../05/06.md).
5:14 unbc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַיֻּכּ֗וּ שֹֽׁטְרֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 The text does not specify who beat the officers. It was probably either the taskmasters or someone the taskmasters ordered to beat the officers. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And the taskmasters beat the officers of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:14 eq22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מַדּ֡וּעַ לֹא֩ כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְכֶ֤ם לִלְבֹּן֙ כִּתְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם גַּם־תְּמ֖וֹל גַּם־הַיּֽוֹם 1 The taskmasters used this question to show they were angry with the lack of bricks. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are not producing enough bricks, either yesterday or today, as you did in the past!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5:14 oh6o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְכֶ֤ם 1 Here, **you** and **your** are plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
5:14 emq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche לֹא֩ כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְכֶ֤ם 1 Here, **you** and **your** do not simply refer to the officers; they refer to the groups of Israelite workers the officers are in charge of. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have your teams not finished their required” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
5:14 liz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כִּתְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” Here it specifically refers to the time before the Egyptians stopped giving the Israelites straw. See how you translated this in [5:7](../05/07md) Alternative translation: “before” or “previously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:14 zklg גַּם־תְּמ֖וֹל גַּם־הַיּֽוֹם 1 This time expression refers to more recent days, ones since the Egyptians stopped providing the straw to the Israelites.
5:15 bk9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיָּבֹ֗אוּ 1 This begins a new scene, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. The officers have gone to where Pharaoh is. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
5:15 thlj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go וַיָּבֹ֗אוּ 1 You will need to decide if go or come is the better translation in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
5:15 m2nz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person לַעֲבָדֶֽיךָ 1 Here, the Israelite officers use the term **your servants** to refer to themselves in the third person as a way of showing humility. It is also possible that they mean to include all the Israelites. Either option is valid if your language must state who is meant by “your servants.” Alternate translation: “to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
5:16 yeql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive תֶּ֗בֶן אֵ֤ין נִתָּן֙ לַעֲבָדֶ֔יךָ 1 The text does not specify who is not giving them straw. From the context, the taskmasters and, by implication, Pharaoh himself are the ones not doing this. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternative translation: “You are not giving your servants any straw.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:16 qp5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person לַעֲבָדֶ֔יךָ & עֲבָדֶ֛יךָ 1 Here, the Israelite officers use the term **your servants** to refer to themselves in the third person as a way of showing humility. It is also possible that they mean to include all the Israelites. Either option is valid if your language must state who is meant by “your servants.” Alternate translation: “to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
5:16 hsa6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns אֹמְרִ֥ים 1 Here, **they** refers to the Egyptian taskmasters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5:16 m0go וְהִנֵּ֧ה 1 **And behold** is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows.
5:16 xrly rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive עֲבָדֶ֛יךָ מֻכִּ֖ים 1 The text does not specify who beat the officers. It was probably either the taskmasters or someone the taskmasters ordered to beat the officers. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:16 ff2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism וְחָטָ֥את עַמֶּֽךָ 1 The Israelites are indirectly accusing Pharaoh of doing wrong. To translate this, consider polite or indirect ways of making accusations in your culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
5:16 l7sn וְחָטָ֥את 1 Alternate translation: “but it is the wrongdoing of”
5:17 cw5u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אַתֶּ֖ם & אַתֶּ֣ם 1 These uses of **you** are plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
5:17 zlkc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations נִרְפִּ֥ים אַתֶּ֖ם נִרְפִּ֑ים 1 Pharaoh repeats himself for emphasis. In your translation, make sure the idea of laziness or idleness is repeated or strengthened in a way that is natural. Alternative translation: “You are extremely lazy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
5:17 a8o2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks נֵלְכָ֖ה נִזְבְּחָ֥ה לַֽיהוָֽה 1 Here the king is quoting another person’s speech. This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
5:18 x9j7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְתֶ֖בֶן לֹא־יִנָּתֵ֣ן לָכֶ֑ם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The subject could be “I” (as in Pharaoh) or “we” (as in the Egyptians or Pharaoh and his taskmasters) or “my people.” See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:18 z6wt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual לָכֶ֑ם & תִּתֵּֽנּוּ 1 Here, **you** means all the Israelites or the officers as representatives of all the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
5:19 x6pp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וַיִּרְא֞וּ שֹֽׁטְרֵ֧י בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל אֹתָ֖ם בְּרָ֣ע לֵאמֹ֑ר לֹא־תִגְרְע֥וּ מִלִּבְנֵיכֶ֖ם דְּבַר־י֥וֹם בְּיוֹמֽוֹ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
5:19 l9d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns אֹתָ֖ם 1 Here the officers are both the subject and object, because they are thinking about their own situation. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
5:19 j6f9 וַיִּרְא֞וּ & אֹתָ֖ם בְּרָ֣ע לֵאמֹ֑ר 1 Alternate translation: “knew that they were in trouble, because the king said” or “perceived themselves to be in danger, because the king said”
5:20 ve3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַֽיִּפְגְּעוּ֙ 1 A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
5:20 s9d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns וַֽיִּפְגְּעוּ֙ & לִקְרָאתָ֑ם בְּצֵאתָ֖ם 1 Here, **they** and **them** refer to the officers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5:21 kv0v יֵ֧רֶא יְהוָ֛ה עֲלֵיכֶ֖ם וְיִשְׁפֹּ֑ט 1 The Israelite officers used this form to curse Moses and Aaron.
5:21 vfit rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual עֲלֵיכֶ֖ם וְיִשְׁפֹּ֑ט 1 **You** refers to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
5:21 j3zp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor הִבְאַשְׁתֶּ֣ם אֶת־רֵיחֵ֗נוּ בְּעֵינֵ֤י פַרְעֹה֙ וּבְעֵינֵ֣י עֲבָדָ֔יו 1 The Egyptians responded to the Israelites the same way they would respond to a foul odor. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you have caused Pharaoh and his servants to hate us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:21 d592 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy חֶ֥רֶב בְּיָדָ֖ם 1 Here, **a sword into their hand** is a metonym for “a reason in their mind.” The Israelites are afraid that the Egyptians will feel that they are doing the right thing if they kill the Israelites, because Moses and Aaron are making demands to the king and because the Egyptians view the Israelites as lazy and dangerous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “them a reason to think they would be right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:22 g4d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion לָ֥מָּה זֶּ֖ה שְׁלַחְתָּֽנִי 1 This question shows how disappointed Moses was that the Egyptians were treating the Israelites even more harshly now. He is expressing that he thinks God has caused the opposite of what he promised to happen. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I thought you sent me to rescue them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5:23 v2k2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בִּשְׁמֶ֔ךָ 1 Here, **in your name** indicates that Moses delivers Yahweh’s message. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for you” or “your message for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:23 fzir rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְהַצֵּ֥ל לֹא־הִצַּ֖לְתָּ 1 In Hebrew, **rescued** is repeated for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:intro we5k 0 # Exodus 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-13, 28-30: Yahweh repeats his commissioning of Moses after the bad events recorded in chapter 5\n- v. 14-27: Genealogy of Moses and Aaron\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Repetition of events:\n\nMost of the content of this chapter is very similar to the events and dialogue in chapters 3-4. For consistency, translators should consult the decisions they made there while keeping in mind that this narrative is not exactly the same. Also, verses 10-12 and verses 28-30 are very similar to each other. These events are probably a recommissioning of Moses. After his first encounter with Pharaoh went very poorly and the Israelites seem to reject God, Yahweh reminds Moses of his promises and power.\n\n### Referring to God\n\nA name for God (**Yahweh**) and a title for God (**El Shaddai**) are mentioned in this chapter ([6:2](../06/02.md)\\-[6:3](../06/03.md)). The precise meaning of El Shaddai is not known, but most scholars think it means something like “almighty.” Translators who have worked on Genesis may find confusing the statement that Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob did not know Yahweh as the name of God.\n\n### Other possible translation difficulties:\n\nWith little explanation, a large portion of the chapter is devoted to the genealogy of Moses and Aaron. Some of the people in the genealogy lived much longer than is normal for humans today. If translators are not familiar with the lengths of people’s lives in the early days of the world (as recorded in Genesis, especially chapter 5), this may cause confusion.\n\n## Study Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Promised Land\n\nAccording to the covenant Yahweh made with Abraham, Egypt is not the home of the Hebrew people. Their home is the Promised Land in Canaan. The people are to return home to their land. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### God and his people\n\nIn verse 7, note the mention of a very important biblical theme of God being “your God” and the special relationship that his people have with him.
6:1 ip5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks עַתָּ֣ה תִרְאֶ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֖ה לְפַרְעֹ֑ה כִּ֣י בְיָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ יְשַׁלְּחֵ֔ם וּבְיָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה יְגָרְשֵׁ֖ם מֵאַרְצֽוֹ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
6:1 lu95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential עַתָּ֣ה 1 This refers to future events starting very soon. Alternative translation: “Starting soon” or “Very soon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
6:1 ece6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְיָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ & וּבְיָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 Here, **hand** is a metonym for power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by a strong power … and by a strong power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:1 utnn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְיָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ & וּבְיָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 It is not clear in the text whose **hand** is referred to here. The options include: (1) Both refer to God’s hand (forcing Pharaoh’s actions) (2) Both refer to Pharaoh’s hand (forcing the Israelites out) (3) They don’t refer to the same person’s hand; the first refers to God’s and the second to Pharaoh’s. The UST has followed (1), which is the most common interpretation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: (1) “by my strong hand … and by my strong hand” (2) “by his strong hand … and by his strong hand” (3) “by my strong hand … and by his strong hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:1 vdno rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism כִּ֣י בְיָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ יְשַׁלְּחֵ֔ם וּבְיָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה יְגָרְשֵׁ֖ם מֵאַרְצֽוֹ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. God says the same thing twice, in similar ways, for emphasis. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I will force him to let my people leave the land” However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The second phrase intensifies the first by portraying Pharaoh as not merely letting the Israelites go, but as forcing them to leave the land. Alternate translation: “I will force him to let them go, in fact, I will force him to force them to leave his land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
6:2 wse5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיְדַבֵּ֥ר אֱלֹהִ֖ים אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֑ה וַיֹּ֥אמֶר אֵלָ֖יו 1 There is a transition here. Before this verse, Yahweh was answering Moses’ question more directly. At the beginning of this verse, Yahweh is reintroduced as “God” because he begins to make a clarifying statement about himself and his relationship with the Israelites and their ancestors as well as his plans for the Israelites. Much of this section repeats what Yahweh has already told Moses. You may want to consider a section break before this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
6:3 l81y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate בְּאֵ֣ל שַׁדָּ֑י 1 **El Shaddai** is a title for God that many scholars think means “almighty.” You will need to decide if you will transliterate the term into your language or translate the meaning. Either approach has broad support. Alternative translation: “as the strongest God of all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
6:3 m27p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּשְׁמִ֣י יְהוָ֔ה לֹ֥א נוֹדַ֖עְתִּי לָהֶֽם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but they did not know me by my name Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:3 e36z וּשְׁמִ֣י יְהוָ֔ה לֹ֥א נוֹדַ֖עְתִּי לָהֶֽם 1 This statement is very difficult to understand as God’s name, Yahweh, is used throughout Genesis, including by Abraham and others. There are many theories about what it means; the view followed by the UST is that now God is revealing to the Israelites a fuller meaning of his divine name than what Abraham and others knew. Alternate translation: “but my name Yahweh was not understood by them”
6:4 zxvc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations לָתֵ֥ת לָהֶ֖ם אֶת־אֶ֣רֶץ כְּנָ֑עַן 1 This is the content of the covenant promise from God to his people. Some languages may need to make this part a direct quotation. To do so, begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “I said, ‘I will give you the land of Canaan’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
6:4 gkkc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism אֶ֥רֶץ מְגֻרֵיהֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־גָּ֥רוּ בָֽהּ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the land they lived in as temporary residents” or “the land that was not their home but where they lived as foreigners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
6:5 l3yc נַאֲקַת֙ 1 Here, **groaning** means making sad sounds because of pain and suffering.
6:5 aiey וָאֶזְכֹּ֖ר אֶת־בְּרִיתִֽי 1 **I have remembered my covenant** means God is going to take action. Alternative translation: “I will keep my promise”
6:6 rgh0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result לָכֵ֞ן 1 God is now telling Moses to deliver a message to the Israelites of what God is going to do because of everything that he said in verses 2-5. The reason-result relationship is strongly marked here, so translations should make sure to use a connector that marks verse 6-8 as a result of verses 2-5. Alternate translation: “Because of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
6:6 yv14 לָכֵ֞ן אֱמֹ֥ר לִבְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֘ל 1 This is a command from Yahweh to Moses. Alternate translation: “So Yahweh told Moses to say to the Israelites”
6:6 we3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אֶתְכֶ֗ם & אֶתְכֶ֖ם & אֶתְכֶם֙ 1 Here every occurrence of **you** refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
6:6 oqnw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche מִתַּ֨חַת֙ סִבְלֹ֣ת מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 This refers to all the hard work the Egyptians made the Israelites do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the hard work the Egyptians force you to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
6:6 xyn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בִּזְר֣וֹעַ נְטוּיָ֔ה 1 Here, **arm** is a figurative way of referring to Yahweh’s power, influence, and capacity for action. **Outstretched** means that he is using that power. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by my great strength” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:6 efx1 וּבִשְׁפָטִ֖ים 1 Here, the term **judgments** refers to the plagues that God is about to send to harm Egypt and the Egyptians. Each plague is a response to Pharaoh’s stubbornness. Alternate translation: “and by [greatly] harming the Egyptians”
6:7 o3lb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אֶתְכֶ֥ם & לָכֶ֖ם & וִֽידַעְתֶּ֗ם & אֱלֹ֣הֵיכֶ֔ם & אֶתְכֶ֔ם 1 Here every occurrence of **you** refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
6:7 xsdh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche מִתַּ֖חַת סִבְל֥וֹת מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This refers to all the hard work the Egyptians forced upon the Israelites. See what you did in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “from the hard work the Egyptians force you to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
6:8 h9ho rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אֶתְכֶם֙ & לָכֶ֛ם 1 Here every occurrence of **you** refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
6:8 g9ru rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction נָשָׂ֨אתִי֙ אֶת־יָדִ֔י 1 This is an action that signifies making an oath. Raising the hand may not have the same meaning in your culture, so you may need to use a different symbolic oath-taking action in your translation or simply translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “I promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
6:8 i3vj מוֹרָשָׁ֖ה 1 This means the Israelites will own the land. Alternate translation: “as your own land”
6:9 aalj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְלֹ֤א שָֽׁמְעוּ֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה מִקֹּ֣צֶר ר֔וּחַ וּמֵעֲבֹדָ֖ה קָשָֽׁה 1 In some languages it will be necessary to put the reason for the people not listening before the result. Alternate translation: “but because of shortness of spirit and because of hard service, they did not listen to Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
6:9 eph2 מִקֹּ֣צֶר ר֔וּחַ 1 Here, the people’s **spirit** is spoken of as something that could be measured. By calling it “short,” the author is saying they did not have very much motivation or hope. Alternate translation: “because they had no hope”
6:10 tpw4 לֵּאמֹֽר 1 This is used to mark the beginning of a direct quotation. It can be omitted if it is unnatural.
6:11 fxf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וִֽישַׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵאַרְצֽוֹ 1 This statement tells Moses what to discuss with Pharaoh. Some languages may need to covey this information as a direct quotation. Be careful to change the third-person pronouns to second-person pronouns if you do this. Alternate translation: “and say, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
6:12 h7o0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by the words **before the face of Yahweh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:12 iiui הֵ֤ן 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.”
6:12 k7hl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔י וְאֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 Moses asked this question in hopes that God would change his mind about using Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Since the Israelites did not listen to me, neither will Pharaoh!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6:12 lj51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔י וְאֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 Moses is presenting a reasoned argument: since this, then probably that. Use a natural way of expressing such arguments in your language. Alternate translation: “Since the sons of Israel have not listened to me, why would you think Pharaoh would listen to me?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
6:12 k3br rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַאֲנִ֖י עֲרַ֥ל שְׂפָתָֽיִם 1 This is a metaphor that means that Moses was not a good speaker. It is somewhat crude; your translation of this phrase could convey that Moses spoke impolitely. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And I do not speak well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:13 janr וַיְצַוֵּם֙ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְאֶל־פַּרְעֹ֖ה 1 This phrase is somewhat difficult to translate. Here, **command** could also be translated as “charge” or “commission.” Another difficulty is knowing to whom the command is directed: is it to Moses and Aaron or are they to give the command to Pharaoh and the Israelites; thus **to** could be translated as “for” or “regarding.” Alternate translations: “and he charged them regarding the sons of Israel and regarding Pharaoh” or “and he gave them a command for the sons of Israel and for Pharaoh” or “and he gave them a commission to the sons of Israel and to Pharaoh”
6:14 hh3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 Verses 14-27 are background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
6:14 h195 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy רָאשֵׁ֣י 1 Here, **heads** refers to the original leaders of the clan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the ancestors of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:14 wv89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names רְאוּבֵ֜ן & יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל & חֲנ֤וֹךְ וּפַלּוּא֙ חֶצְר֣וֹן וְכַרְמִ֔י & רְאוּבֵֽן 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:15 c1ni rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names שִׁמְע֗וֹן יְמוּאֵ֨ל וְיָמִ֤ין וְאֹ֨הַד֙ וְיָכִ֣ין וְצֹ֔חַר וְשָׁא֖וּל & שִׁמְעֽוֹן 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:16 k64h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names לֵוִי֙ & גֵּרְשׁ֕וֹן וּקְהָ֖ת וּמְרָרִ֑י & לֵוִ֔י 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:17 alm8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names גֵרְשׁ֛וֹן לִבְנִ֥י וְשִׁמְעִ֖י 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:18 gzm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names קְהָ֔ת עַמְרָ֣ם וְיִצְהָ֔ר וְחֶבְר֖וֹן וְעֻזִּיאֵ֑ל & קְהָ֔ת 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:19 p5sz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מְרָרִ֖י מַחְלִ֣י וּמוּשִׁ֑י 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:20 ni1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names עַמְרָ֜ם & אַהֲרֹ֖ן & מֹשֶׁ֑ה & עַמְרָ֔ם 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:20 o5gb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יוֹכֶ֤בֶד 1 This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:20 mh02 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship דֹּֽדָתוֹ֙ 1 Here the term **his aunt** specifically means his father’s sister. If your language uses a different term that is specific in this way, translators should use it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
6:21 f3yr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יִצְהָ֑ר קֹ֥רַח וָנֶ֖פֶג וְזִכְרִֽי׃ 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:22 n7cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names עֻזִּיאֵ֑ל מִֽישָׁאֵ֥ל וְאֶלְצָפָ֖ן וְסִתְרִֽי 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:23 n1xh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אַהֲרֹ֜ן & עַמִּינָדָ֛ב & נַחְשׁ֖וֹן & נָדָב֙ & אֲבִיה֔וּא & אֶלְעָזָ֖ר & אִֽיתָמָֽר 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:23 kww9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֱלִישֶׁ֧בַע 1 This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:24 rkz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names קֹ֔רַח אַסִּ֥יר וְאֶלְקָנָ֖ה וַאֲבִיאָסָ֑ף 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:24 i6o7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הַקָּרְחִֽי 1 This was the name of the clan of people descended from Korah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:25 zvg2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names וְאֶלְעָזָ֨ר & אַהֲרֹ֜ן & פּֽוּטִיאֵל֙ & פִּֽינְחָ֑ס 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:25 fck8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy רָאשֵׁ֛י 1 Here, **heads** represents family leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “These were the leaders of the families” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:26 ft6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown עַל־צִבְאֹתָֽם 1 The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people often organized into groups for war. Alternate translation: “by their groups” or “by their divisions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
6:27 o7xp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal לְהוֹצִ֥יא 1 This expresses their goal when they spoke to Pharaoh. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
6:28 xssl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיְהִ֗י בְּי֨וֹם 1 This marks a transition from the record of the genealogy back to the narrative. Consider placing a section break at the start of this verse. Alternate translation: “One day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
6:30 zyqs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by saying he spoke before **the face of Yahweh**. See how you translated this in [6:12](../06/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:30 nf3w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הֵ֤ן אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם וְאֵ֕יךְ יִשְׁמַ֥ע אֵלַ֖י פַּרְעֹֽה 1 Moses asks this question hoping to change God’s mind about sending him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Behold, I am not a good speaker. Pharaoh will certainly not listen to me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6:30 y4g2 הֵ֤ן 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.”
6:30 vzhq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם 1 This is a metaphor that means that Moses thought he was not a good speaker. It is somewhat crude, and your translation of this phrase could convey that Moses spoke impolitely. See how you translated this in [6:12](../06/12.md). Alternate translation: “I always fail to speak well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:intro r9we 0 # Exodus 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-9: The end of Yahweh’s re-sending of Moses and Aaron to Pharaoh\n- v. 10-13: Pharaoh’s first refusal, the sign of the snakes\n- v. 14-25: First plague: the Nile turns to blood\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Miracles\n\nWhen Yahweh had Moses perform miracles, Pharaoh’s men were able to copy these miracles. It is unknown how they were able to do this, but since it was not from Yahweh, they were probably done under some evil power. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])\n\n### Pharaoh’s hard heart\n\nPharaoh’s heart is often described as hard, strong, or heavy in this chapter. This means that he was not willing to obey Yahweh’s instructions.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Include:\n\n- Moses as God to Pharaoh\n- A number of difficult terms: prophet, signs, wonders, miracles, sorcerers, magicians, magic, judgments, canals, reservoirs\n- The use of “heart” to refer to the seat of will and emotion\n- Up to third-level quotations
7:1 r18p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of [verse 5](../07/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
7:1 gy1t רְאֵ֛ה 1 This is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternative translation: “Listen carefully”
7:1 dn1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נְתַתִּ֥יךָ אֱלֹהִ֖ים לְפַרְעֹ֑ה 1 This means Moses would represent the same authority to Pharaoh as God did to Moses. See how you translated the very similar phrase in [Exodus 4:16](../04/16.md). Alternate translation: “I will cause Pharaoh to consider you as a god” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:1 z163 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְאַהֲרֹ֥ן אָחִ֖יךָ יִהְיֶ֥ה נְבִיאֶֽךָ 1 This phrase compares Aaron to a prophet, because Aaron will actually be the one who proclaims to Pharaoh what Moses tells him. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 4:16](../04/16.md). Alternate translation: “and Aaron your brother will act like your prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:2 l44v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship אָחִ֨יךָ֙ 1 Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
7:2 hdwo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וְשִׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵאַרְצֽוֹ 1 Some languages may need to make this a direct quotation. If so, be sure to mark it as a second-level quotation, subordinate to Yahweh’s main speech. See what you did in [6:25](../06/25.md). Alternative translation: “saying, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
7:3 adsq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אַקְשֶׁ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 This means God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **hard**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 4:21](../04/21.md), but note the slightly different metaphor there: the heart being strong vs. **hard** here. Alternate translation: “will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:3 vtt1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet אֶת־אֹתֹתַ֛י וְאֶת־מוֹפְתַ֖י 1 The words **signs** and **wonders** mean basically the same thing. God uses them to emphasize the greatness of what he will do in Egypt. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine them.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
7:4 ar0l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אֲלֵכֶם֙ 1 Here, **you** means Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) or plural form (if not) here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
7:4 e2kv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יָדִ֖י 1 The words **my hand** represent God’s great power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:4 b6h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּמִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Here, **on Egypt** refers to the land and everything in it, including people, animals, and plants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:4 nilu אֶת־צִבְאֹתַ֜י אֶת־עַמִּ֤י בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ 1 These phrases refer to the Israelites in three different ways; they do not refer to three different groups of people. Here, **armies** is the same word translated “hosts” in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “the armies of my Israelite people”
7:5 cg3n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְיָדְע֤וּ מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ כִּֽי־אֲנִ֣י יְהוָ֔ה 1 This is the result of God rescuing the Israelites. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
7:5 npd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בִּנְטֹתִ֥י אֶת־יָדִ֖י עַל 1 This phrase represents God’s great power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “when I show my powerful acts against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:5 dguc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal וְהוֹצֵאתִ֥י אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִתּוֹכָֽם 1 The goal of God’s powerful acts was to rescue the Israelites. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternate translation: “so that I bring the sons of Israel out from their midst” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
7:6 iii5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וַיַּ֥עַשׂ & עָשֽׂוּ 1 This repetition emphasizes the statement. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
7:7 liir rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 This verse contains background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
7:7 zoou rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בֶּן־שְׁמֹנִ֣ים שָׁנָ֔ה & בֶּן־שָׁלֹ֥שׁ וּשְׁמֹנִ֖ים שָׁנָ֑ה 1 The phrase **a son of**, followed by a number and then **years**, is an idiom that refers to their age. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:8 pwph rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This verse marks the beginning of new sections, both major and minor. The major story of the plagues and Exodus itself unfolds from here until after Pharaoh’s army is defeated at the Red Sea. The next minor event is the miracle of the rods becoming snakes. Either by using particular forms that your language uses to mark transitions or by making a section break and heading, this transition should be marked for readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
7:8 p2kf לֵאמֹֽר 1 Here, **saying** marks the beginning of a direct quote and is often omitted in translation when such a construction is unnatural in the target language. See UST.
7:9 jt9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations כִּי֩ יְדַבֵּ֨ר אֲלֵכֶ֤ם פַּרְעֹה֙ לֵאמֹ֔ר תְּנ֥וּ לָכֶ֖ם מוֹפֵ֑ת וְאָמַרְתָּ֣ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֗ן קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּךָ֛ וְהַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִפְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְתַנִּֽין 1 The two quotations in this verse could be stated as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “When Pharaoh tells you to do a miracle, then you will tell Aaron to take his staff and throw it down before Pharaoh so that it may become a snake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
7:9 r0tp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּךָ֛ וְהַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִפְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְתַנִּֽין 1 This is a second-level direct quotation. The second level may either end after **Pharaoh** or at the end of the verse. If you did not decide to make it an indirect quotation, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
7:9 p3xh לֵאמֹ֔ר 1 Here, **saying** marks the beginning of a direct quote and is often omitted in translation when such a construction is unnatural in the target language. See UST.
7:9 ms5o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אֲלֵכֶ֤ם & לָכֶ֖ם 1 These pronouns are plural, referring to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) or plural form (if not) here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
7:9 ogk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה 1 Although **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Moses and Aaron are to actually do the miracles in front of Pharaoh so that Pharaoh can see them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “so Pharaoh can see it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:10 ehm9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֛ה וְלִפְנֵ֥י עֲבָדָ֖יו 1 This time, while **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Aaron actually does this right in front of Pharaoh and his servants so they could watch what happens. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “where Pharaoh and his servants could see it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:10 kv93 עֲבָדָ֖יו 1 Here, **his servants** does not refer common servants but probably refers to important advisors that would be in the king’s court.
7:11 mqde לַֽחֲכָמִ֖ים וְלַֽמְכַשְּׁפִ֑ים & חַרְטֻמֵּ֥י 1 Here, **magicians** probably describes both **wise men and sorcerers** rather than being a third group. See translationWords articles for each term.
7:12 u6np וַיִּבְלַ֥ע 1 Alternate translation: “ate up” or “devoured”
7:12 m0kw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַיִּבְלַ֥ע מַטֵּֽה־אַהֲרֹ֖ן אֶת־מַטֹּתָֽם 1 This is a surprising and amusing twist which was not what the magicians expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
7:12 prnp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification מַטֵּֽה & מַטֹּתָֽם 1 It may be necessary in some languages to translate the word **staff** as “snake,” since it had turned into one. This may be true if it would not make sense in the target language to say (because it is not living) that a staff swallowed or ate something. It may also may not make sense in some languages to speak of the snakes as staffs once they have been transformed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
7:13 g42f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיֶּחֱזַק֙ לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 4:21](../04/21.md), but note that this is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn, as many others in this part of the narrative do). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:13 wekf כַּאֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה 1 Because Yahweh’s prediction precedes this event, some languages may need to place the reference to that prediction before the statement that it was fulfilled. See UST.
7:14 d27r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כָּבֵ֖ד לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 Now Yahweh speaks of Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude as if Pharaoh’s **heart** were **heavy**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:13](../07/13.md), but note the slightly different metaphor there: the heart being strong vs **heavy** here. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh is defiant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:14 qiyx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֹּ֤אמֶר 1 A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
7:15 ecby הִנֵּה֙ 1 **Behold** is used to draw attention to information that follows.
7:15 c5np יֹצֵ֣א הַמַּ֔יְמָה 1 There are various theories as to what Pharaoh would go down to the Nile to do, but there is no need to speculate or specify in the translation.
7:16 yqp7 וְאָמַרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗יו 1 Alternate translation: “Say to Pharaoh”
7:16 uvxe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession אֱלֹהֵ֤י הָעִבְרִים֙ 1 Yahweh claimed the Hebrews (Israelites) as his own. They worshiped him. This is a possessive of social relationship. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
7:16 d16q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes שַׁלַּח֙ אֶת־עַמִּ֔י וְיַֽעַבְדֻ֖נִי בַּמִּדְבָּ֑ר וְהִנֵּ֥ה לֹא־שָׁמַ֖עְתָּ עַד־כֹּֽה 1 This is a third-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. Alternatively, you could translate it as an indirect quotation as in the UST. If you do this, take care to adjust the pronoun person (second/third) as appropriate. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:16 cwox וְהִנֵּ֥ה 1 Here, **behold** is used to draw attention to the information that follows. In some languages, it will not be translated.
7:17 j1ev כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
7:17 mywj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes בְּזֹ֣את 1 This begins a third-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 18. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. It is possible that the third-level quotation actually ends before or after **Behold,** in which case, in the rest of the quote **I** refers to Moses, not Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:17 jjm3 הִנֵּ֨ה 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Alternate translation: “Look at this”
7:18 bsjn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וּבָאַ֣שׁ הַיְאֹ֑ר 1 His warning,**the river will stink**, will happen because the fish die. Alternate translation: “and because of that the river will stink” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
7:18 nx0q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal לִשְׁתּ֥וֹת מַ֖יִם 1 This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternative translation: “in order to find water to drink” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
7:18 rgl0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns וְנִלְא֣וּ מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 Here, **themselves** refers back to the subject (**the Egyptians**) to indicated that the Egyptians are the object of the verb as well. Use a natural form in your language to show that the Egyptians are both subject and object. Alternate translation: “And the Egyptians will exhaust the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
7:18 grwh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks מִן־הַיְאֹֽר 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s commands ends. Depending on your decisions about the embedded quotation levels, you may have up to three levels of quotations that need to be closed here. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation and quotations within quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
7:19 ysi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism עַֽל־נַהֲרֹתָ֣ם ׀ עַל־יְאֹרֵיהֶ֣ם וְעַל־אַגְמֵיהֶ֗ם וְעַ֛ל כָּל־מִקְוֵ֥ה מֵימֵיהֶ֖ם 1 This list is meant to expand on and reinforce the idea of all of the water in Egypt. You should translate the list in such a way that the locations of the blood are not limited to these specific places, but to imply universality. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
7:19 wxp2 בְּכָל־אֶ֣רֶץ 1 Alternate translation: “in every part of”
7:19 msxp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession וּבָעֵצִ֖ים וּבָאֲבָנִֽים 1 This possessive show composition. Alternate translation: “and in containers made from wood and in containers made from stone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
7:20 zy18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בַּיְאֹ֔ר 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, the name of the river may be made explicit. Alternate translation: “in the Nile River” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:20 mj8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְעֵינֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה וּלְעֵינֵ֖י עֲבָדָ֑יו 1 This means in their sight. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh and his servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:22 n7kr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown חַרְטֻמֵּ֥י 1 See how you translated this term in [7:11](../07/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
7:22 qdc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיֶּחֱזַ֤ק לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:22 sbic כַּאֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה 1 Because Yahweh’s prediction precedes this event, some languages may need to place the reference to that prediction before the statement that it was fulfilled. See UST and how you translated this in [7:13](../07/13.md), where the same sentence appears.
7:23 atdk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְלֹא־שָׁ֥ת לִבּ֖וֹ גַּם־לָזֹֽאת 1 This is an idiom meaning Pharaoh did not think about the meaning of the miracle he had just seen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And he did not consider what even this meant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:24 m6zn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole כָל־מִצְרַ֛יִם 1 The word **all** here is a generalization that means “many.” At the least, the upper class would have sent their slaves to dig for them. However, it does indicate that all the Egyptians who wished to drink water had to dig or had to have dug for them. Alternate translation: “many of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
7:25 bn5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיִּמָּלֵ֖א 1 A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
7:25 gjyb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַיִּמָּלֵ֖א שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֑ים 1 This means seven days later. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:intro ww1y 0 # Exodus 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-15: Second plague: frogs\n- v. 16-19: Third plague (first that magicians cannot imitate): gnats\n- v. 20-32: Fourth plague: flies\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n- the exact insects in plagues 3-4 are not certain; translation teams will need to decide what insects they can use for each\n- Pharaoh makes his own heart heavy, that is, he determines to be proud and resist Yahweh twice in this chapter\n- the Israelites’ sacrifices are spoken of as an abomination to the Egyptians, but it is not specified how or why that is\n\n### Lifting up the hand and staff:\n\nIn the next few chapters, God will instruct Moses or Aaron or both to raise his hand or staff or both hand and staff. The narrative will then record who will raise his hand or staff or both. The instruction and the action do not always match exactly. God may say raise your hand, and the narrative may say that Moses raised his staff. These are not conflicting reports. Translators should understand that the hand and the staff are always understood together. They are one unit, and they can both be mentioned, or they can be mentioned separately. In each case, Moses or Aaron raises his hand with the staff in it. This fact is merely expressed differently.
8:1 tf7b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations בֹּ֖א 1 This begins a direct quote that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
8:1 v6ll כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
8:1 lndc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes כֹּ֚ה 1 Here, **Thus** begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer level. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
8:1 kure rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes שַׁלַּ֥ח 1 This begins a third-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
8:2 s7y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis לְשַׁלֵּ֑חַ 1 What Pharaoh is to **let go** is not specified, but “my people” or “the Israelites” are the understood object. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to let the Israelites go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
8:2 aei8 הִנֵּ֣ה 1 Here, **behold** is an interjection meant to focus the attention of the listener on what comes next, in this case a dire warning. Alternate translation: “look out”
8:3 vgby rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism בְּבֵיתֶ֔ךָ וּבַחֲדַ֥ר מִשְׁכָּבְךָ֖ וְעַל־מִטָּתֶ֑ךָ וּבְבֵ֤ית עֲבָדֶ֨יךָ֙ וּבְעַמֶּ֔ךָ וּבְתַנּוּרֶ֖יךָ וּבְמִשְׁאֲרוֹתֶֽיךָ 1 This long list means “everywhere in Egypt.” It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that the frogs’ location is not limited to these specific places. The list should imply universality. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
8:4 okok rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks 0 Up to three levels of quotes end at the end of this verse. Depending on how many levels you chose to mark as direct quotations, you should indicate them ending here with closing second-level (and third-level) quotation mark(s) or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations and quotations within a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
8:5 ley6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮ אֶל־מֹשֶׁה֒ אֱמֹ֣ר אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֗ן 1 It may be helpful to translate this first quotation indirectly to avoid having two levels of quotations in this verse. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh told Moses to say to Aaron” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
8:5 dqsb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks נְטֵ֤ה אֶת־יָדְךָ֙ בְּמַטֶּ֔ךָ עַל־הַ֨נְּהָרֹ֔ת עַל־הַיְאֹרִ֖ים וְעַל־הָאֲגַמִּ֑ים וְהַ֥עַל אֶת־הַֽצְפַרְדְּעִ֖ים עַל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This is a second-level direct quotation if you chose to make **Say to Aaron** a direct quotation. In that case, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level opening and closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation inside a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
8:5 ejcx יָדְךָ֙ בְּמַטֶּ֔ךָ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
8:5 z19q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism עַל־הַ֨נְּהָרֹ֔ת עַל־הַיְאֹרִ֖ים וְעַל־הָאֲגַמִּ֑ים 1 This list is meant to convey the idea of all the water in Egypt where frogs might live. You should translate the list in such a way that the locations are not limited to these specific places. The list should imply universality. This is made clear in [8:6](../08/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
8:6 wf3a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַיֵּ֤ט אַהֲרֹן֙ 1 It is implied that Moses told Yahweh’s instructions to Aaron. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:6 nrbq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יָד֔וֹ 1 It is implied that Aaron was holding his staff as instructed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. Alternate translation: “his hand holding his staff” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:6 j1w7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche וַיֵּ֤ט אַהֲרֹן֙ אֶת־יָד֔וֹ עַ֖ל מֵימֵ֣י 1 Aaron would not have been able to reach his hand over all the water in Egypt. He likely stretched his hand over some nearby portion of the Nile, symbolizing all the water of Egypt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
8:6 drmg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַתַּ֨עַל֙ 1 [Verse 3](../08/03.md) has specified from where the frogs will come. Here it is implied, but if it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:6 rxze rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns הַצְּפַרְדֵּ֔עַ 1 There were so many frogs that the text uses the collective singular. If that would be misunderstood in your language, you may simply use the plural, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
8:6 j83d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַתַּ֨עַל֙ הַצְּפַרְדֵּ֔עַ וַתְּכַ֖ס אֶת־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This means that there were frogs everywhere in Egypt. The image is like that of a blanket smothering the entire country. (Or more directly, like one giant, nation-sized frog sitting on top of the entire land). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:7 n02y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַֽחֲרְטֻמִּ֖ים בְּלָטֵיהֶ֑ם 1 See how you translated these in [7:11](../07/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:8 mhn3 וַיִּקְרָ֨א פַרְעֹ֜ה לְמֹשֶׁ֣ה וּֽלְאַהֲרֹ֗ן 1 Alternate translation: “Then Pharaoh sent for Moses and Aaron” or “And the king summoned Moses and Aaron”
8:8 nfe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַיִּקְרָ֨א פַרְעֹ֜ה לְמֹשֶׁ֣ה וּֽלְאַהֲרֹ֗ן וַיֹּ֨אמֶר֙ 1 It is implied that Moses and Aaron came to Pharaoh between the time when he called them and when he spoke to them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And Pharaoh called for Moses and for Aaron, and after they came, he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:8 tx3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה וְיָסֵר֙ הַֽצְפַרְדְּעִ֔ים מִמֶּ֖נִּי וּמֵֽעַמִּ֑י 1 In some languages you may have to make the content of Pharaoh’s prayer to Yahweh a direct quote. Note that this will make it a second-level quotation and you will need to mark it with second-level quotation markings if your language uses them. Alternate translation: “to Yahweh saying, ‘Please take away the frogs from Pharaoh and from his people.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
8:8 qku4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo וַאֲשַׁלְּחָה֙ אֶת־הָעָ֔ם וְיִזְבְּח֖וּ לַיהוָֽה 1 This promise is conditional on the frogs going away. Use a natural form in your language for hypothetical situations. Alternate translation: “Once the frogs are gone, I will let the people go, and they may sacrifice to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
8:9 khfd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony הִתְפָּאֵ֣ר עָלַי֒ 1 Moses speaks with false humility here. He is ironically pointing out Pharaoh’s powerlessness before Yahweh. Alternate translation: “You can choose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
8:9 g0lu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism לְךָ֗ וְלַעֲבָדֶ֨יךָ֙ וּֽלְעַמְּךָ֔ & מִמְּךָ֖ וּמִבָּתֶּ֑יךָ 1 These lists mean “for everyone” and “from everywhere” (in Egypt). This makes clear that Moses will ask for a complete end of the plague. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
8:10 ofw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal לְמַ֣עַן תֵּדַ֔ע כִּי־אֵ֖ין כַּיהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֵֽינוּ 1 This knowledge is the goal of Yahweh’s granting a respite from the frogs. In some languages you may need to place this at the end of [verse 11](../08/11.md), after Moses says the frogs will leave. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
8:10 d1wp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive אֱלֹהֵֽינוּ 1 Here, **our** refers to the Israelites’ God, excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
8:11 zwqo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism מִמְּךָ֙ וּמִבָּ֣תֶּ֔יךָ וּמֵעֲבָדֶ֖יךָ וּמֵעַמֶּ֑ךָ 1 This list means “from everywhere and everyone” (in Egypt). This shows that the end of the plague will be as complete as was its extent. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
8:12 jjv2 שָׂ֥ם 1 Alternate translation: “Yahweh had set”
8:12 nxyi rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֵּצֵ֥א מֹשֶׁ֛ה וְאַהֲרֹ֖ן 1 A minor scene shift occurs here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8:13 rwe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism מִן־הַבָּתִּ֥ים מִן־הַחֲצֵרֹ֖ת וּמִן־הַשָּׂדֹֽת 1 This list means “from everywhere” (in Egypt). This makes clear that there was a complete end of the plague. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
8:14 a03n חֳמָרִ֣ם חֳמָרִ֑ם 1 Literally, the Hebrew says “piles piles.” Repetition is used in Hebrew to emphasize how many or how big the piles of frogs were.
8:15 lv2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְהַכְבֵּד֙ אֶת־לִבּ֔וֹ 1 Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he made his own **heart heavy**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:14](../07/14.md), but note there that the state of Pharaoh’s heart is reported, whereas here Pharaoh makes his own heart heavy. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh determined to be defiant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:15 b47h כַּאֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “just as Yahweh had said Pharaoh would do”
8:16 cikq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮ 1 A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the start of the third plague sequence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8:16 s5gh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮ אֶל־מֹשֶׁה֒ אֱמֹר֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 **Say to Aaron** starts a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. However, it may be helpful to translate one of the parts as an indirect quotation so that you do not have to have two levels of quotations here. See the UST. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh told Moses to tell Aaron” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
8:16 joxz נְטֵ֣ה אֶֽת־מַטְּךָ֔ וְהַ֖ךְ 1 This is one action or motion, but it is described with the two verbs that occur throughout this section of plague judgment.
8:16 kpr5 מַטְּךָ֔ 1 This refers to Aaron’s staff. See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
8:16 w5el rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown לְכִנִּ֖ם 1 We do not know exactly what this word means. It is probably a tiny (as in dust-particle size), biting insect. You should choose a different insect here than the one in the next plague ([8:21](../08/21.md)-8:31). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:17 l9wj וַיֵּט֩ אַהֲרֹ֨ן אֶת־יָד֤וֹ בְמַטֵּ֨הוּ֙ וַיַּךְ֙ אֶת־עֲפַ֣ר הָאָ֔רֶץ 1 Again, this is one action or motion, but it is described with the two verbs, **stretched** and **struck**, that occur throughout this section of plague judgment. See how you translated it in the [previous verse](../08/16.md).
8:17 l784 יָד֤וֹ בְמַטֵּ֨הוּ֙ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
8:17 nhgt rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַכִּנָּ֔ם & כִנִּ֖ים 1 Again, we do not know what this term refers to for certain, so see how you translated it in [8:16](../08/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:17 grs3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations בָּאָדָ֖ם 1 Here **man** includes women and children. Alternate translation: “people” or “mankind” or “humans” See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
8:17 grg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole כָּל־עֲפַ֥ר הָאָ֛רֶץ & בְּכָל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This extraordinary statement with the repeated **all** is used to emphasize the extent and severity of the plague. If this would be unnatural in your language use a natural way to communicate that. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
8:18 wga0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַחַרְטֻמִּ֧ים בְּלָטֵיהֶ֛ם 1 See how you translated these in [7:11](../07/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:18 ii85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַכִּנִּ֖ים & הַכִּנָּ֔ם 1 See how you translated this term in [8:16](../08/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:18 mnj5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations בָּאָדָ֖ם 1 Here **man** includes women and children. Alternate translation: “people” or “mankind” or “humans” See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
8:19 kcs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַֽחַרְטֻמִּים֙ 1 See how you translated this term in [7:11](../07/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:19 lk2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche אֶצְבַּ֥ע אֱלֹהִ֖ים הִ֑וא 1 The words “finger of God” represent the power of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This is the powerful work of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
8:19 z1w2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיֶּחֱזַ֤ק לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:13](../07/13.md). This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:19 rp3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns אֲלֵהֶ֔ם 1 Here, **them** may refer to the magicians or to Aaron and Moses. Alternate translation: “to the magicians’ warning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
8:19 gjgg כַּאֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה 1 Some languages will need to place this before the thing that Yahweh predicted, as in the UST.
8:20 frfn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the beginning of the fourth plague sequence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8:20 syv2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 Here, **face** means the presence of a person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:20 vnym הִנֵּ֖ה 1 **Behold** is used to draw attention to important information that is next. In some languages and translation styles, it will make the most sense to omit this, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully”
8:20 uypa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This phrase opens a direct quote that continues until the end of [verse 23](../08/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. However, you may also consider making the opening portion an indirect quote so that you do not have a quote inside of a quote for the next verses. Alternate translation: “that Yahweh says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
8:20 eqd2 כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
8:20 a7l7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks שַׁלַּ֥ח 1 This phrase opens a second-level direct quotation which continues until the end of [verse 23](../08/23.md), unless you made **thus says Yahweh** an indirect quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
8:20 fgl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal וְיַֽעַבְדֻֽנִי 1 This is the purpose of the people being let go. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternate translation: “so they can serve me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
8:21 hitq הִנְנִי֩ 1 The expression **behold me!** is used to draw attention to important information that is next. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully”
8:21 hwcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns הֶעָרֹ֑ב & הֶ֣עָרֹ֔ב 1 Here, **the swarm** is a collective singular noun that refers to a great number of flying, biting insects traveling in a group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “swarms of flies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
8:21 l5z7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הֶעָרֹ֑ב & הֶ֣עָרֹ֔ב 1 Here, **the swarm** probably refers to the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:21 foli rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism בְּךָ֜ וּבַעֲבָדֶ֧יךָ וּֽבְעַמְּךָ֛ וּבְבָתֶּ֖יךָ & בָּתֵּ֤י מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ & וְגַ֥ם הָאֲדָמָ֖ה 1 This long list means “everywhere in Egypt.” It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that the flies’ location is not limited to these specific places but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
8:22 mv8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal לְבִלְתִּ֥י הֱיֽוֹת־שָׁ֖ם עָרֹ֑ב 1 # General Information:\n\nThis is the goal of Yahweh treating the land of Goshen differently. Alternate translation: “by keeping the swarm from there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
8:22 apum rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns עָרֹ֑ב 1 This is a collective singular noun that refers to a great number of swarming, biting insects. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md). Alternate translation: “swarms of flies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
8:22 qb9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown עָרֹ֑ב 1 These are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:22 refq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal לְמַ֣עַן תֵּדַ֔ע כִּ֛י אֲנִ֥י יְהוָ֖ה בְּקֶ֥רֶב הָאָֽרֶץ 1 This is the goal of treating the Israelites differently. In some languages you may need to put this phrase the beginning of the verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
8:22 a28h אֲנִ֥י יְהוָ֖ה בְּקֶ֥רֶב הָאָֽרֶץ 1 Here, **am** could be connecting **I** and **Yahweh** or it could be connecting **I, Yahweh** and **in the middle of the land**. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am in the middle of the land”
8:23 oxr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns פְדֻ֔ת 1 This is a noun derived from a verb meaning “to buy back.” Very broadly, it can mean “to save or rescue.” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **redemption**, you can express the same idea in another way. See the next note regarding textual variants for more information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8:23 tf4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants פְדֻ֔ת 1 Many translations follow the Septuagint here, which uses the word “division.” A minor change to the Hebrew would also produce the word translated “treat differently” in the [previous verse](../08/22.md). Alternate translation: “a division” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
8:23 u4gs עַמִּ֖י 1 Yahweh’s people, that is, the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelites”
8:23 rg2c עַמֶּ֑ךָ 1 Pharaoh’s people, that is, the Egyptians. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians”
8:23 tb24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks לְמָחָ֥ר יִהְיֶ֖ה הָאֹ֥ת הַזֶּֽה׃ 1 After this phrase, the three levels of direct quotations of Yahweh that started in [8:20](../08/20.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with closing first-level, second-level, and third-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations. You may not have three levels if you made any level an indirect quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
8:24 gw3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַיַּ֤עַשׂ יְהוָה֙ כֵּ֔ן 1 The UST supplies a brief sentence filling in the gap between Yahweh’s command to Moses and the onset of the plague. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly to make the progression of events clear. Alternate translation: “Moses obeyed the instructions Yahweh gave him, and Pharaoh responded as Yahweh had said he would. And Yahweh did so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:24 lk5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיַּ֤עַשׂ יְהוָה֙ כֵּ֔ן 1 There is a minor scene change here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8:24 ut0f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown עָרֹ֣ב 1 There are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:24 dg0k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go וַיָּבֹא֙ 1 Some languages may need to translate this as “going” rather than “coming.” Alternate translation: “and … went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
8:24 tmcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism בֵּ֥יתָה פַרְעֹ֖ה וּבֵ֣ית עֲבָדָ֑יו 1 This means “to everyone everywhere” (in Egypt), as made explicit in the next statement. This makes clear that the insects were throughout the land. You should translate this in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
8:24 nd6e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive תִּשָּׁחֵ֥ת הָאָ֖רֶץ מִפְּנֵ֥י הֶעָרֹֽב 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The swarms of flies devastated the land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:24 ngue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִפְּנֵ֥י הֶעָרֹֽב 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of the insects. Alternate translation: “because the insects were everywhere” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:25 e7l0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וַיִּקְרָ֣א 1 This happened during the plague. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
8:25 gj2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual לֵֽאלֹהֵיכֶ֖ם 1 Here, **your** is plural. It could refer either to Moses and Aaron or to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) if your team decides it means Moses and Aaron; otherwise use a plural form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
8:26 e9wk תּוֹעֲבַ֣ת מִצְרַ֔יִם & תּוֹעֲבַ֥ת מִצְרַ֛יִם 1 We do not know what about their sacrificing was an **abomination** to the Egyptians. The same term is used in Genesis 43:32 and 46:34 to describe the Egyptians’ feelings about eating with Hebrews and about the Hebrew profession of shepherding, respectively. Translators should attempt to convey the strong negative feelings that would be provoked in the Egyptians without speculating as to the cause.
8:26 idkt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive נִזְבַּ֖ח & אֱלֹהֵ֑ינוּ & נִזְבַּ֞ח & יִסְקְלֻֽנוּ 1 Here, **we**, **our,** and **us** should all be translated as exclusive (if your language makes that distinction). Pharaoh and the Egyptians are not included. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
8:26 i7dy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion וְלֹ֥א יִסְקְלֻֽנוּ 1 Moses asks this question to show Pharaoh that the Egyptians would not allow the Israelites to worship Yahweh by making a sacrifice repugnant to them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “they will certainly stone us!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8:26 gy7d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְעֵינֵיהֶ֖ם 1 The express **before their eyes** is a figurative way of saying “where they can see.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in their sight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:27 ju3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive נֵלֵ֖ךְ & וְזָבַ֨חְנוּ֙ & אֱלֹהֵ֔ינוּ & אֵלֵֽינוּ 1 Here, **we**, **our,** and **us** should all be translated as exclusive (if your language makes that distinction). Pharaoh and his people are not included. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
8:28 qxes rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אֶתְכֶם֙ & אֱלֹֽהֵיכֶם֙ & תַרְחִ֖יקוּ 1 If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
8:28 mla2 אֶתְכֶם֙ 1 Alternate translation: “the Israelites”
8:28 hnud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הַרְחֵ֥ק & תַרְחִ֖יקוּ 1 In Hebrew, **far** is repeated to emphasize (with **not**) that they are absolutely not to go too far. If your language does not use repeating words like this, express the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:29 h94t הִנֵּ֨ה 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation. Alternate translation: “Know this”
8:29 jirm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הֶעָרֹ֗ב 1 These are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:29 yvcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person מִפַּרְעֹ֛ה & פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 Moses may be using the third person to refer to Pharaoh to show respect, because the king appears to be relenting. If use of the third person is not a way of showing respect in your culture or is not a valid way of addressing an individual at all, you may need to change the form. Alternate translation: “from you … you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
8:29 la3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism מִפַּרְעֹ֛ה מֵעֲבָדָ֥יו וּמֵעַמּ֖וֹ 1 This list means “from everywhere and everyone” (in Egypt). This shows that the end of the plague will be as complete as its extent. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
8:29 bf85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives אַל־יֹסֵ֤ף פַּרְעֹה֙ הָתֵ֔ל לְבִלְתִּי֙ שַׁלַּ֣ח אֶת־הָעָ֔ם 1 If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “you must begin to deal truthfully with us and let our people go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
8:29 hh4q רַ֗ק אַל־יֹסֵ֤ף פַּרְעֹה֙ הָתֵ֔ל 1 Alternate translation: “But you must not deceive us” or “But you must not lie to us”
8:30 tull rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֵּצֵ֥א מֹשֶׁ֖ה 1 There is a minor scene shift here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8:31 rj50 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הֶעָרֹ֔ב 1 These are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:31 iyhn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism מִפַּרְעֹ֖ה מֵעֲבָדָ֣יו וּמֵעַמּ֑וֹ 1 This list means “from everyone and everywhere” (in Egypt). This makes clear that there was a complete end of the plague. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
8:31 mb4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole לֹ֥א נִשְׁאַ֖ר אֶחָֽד 1 This extreme statement emphasizes how thoroughly Yahweh removed the insects from the land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that emphasizes thoroughness or complete lack of the swarm. Alternate translation: “There was not a single one of these insects left in the whole land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
8:32 sb5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיַּכְבֵּ֤ד פַּרְעֹה֙ אֶת־לִבּ֔וֹ 1 Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he made his own **heart heavy**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [8:15](../08/15.md). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh determined to be defiant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:intro hqw8 0 # Exodus 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-7: Fifth plague (first that does not affect Israelites): disease kills livestock\n- v. 8-12: Sixth plague: boils\n- v. 13-35: Seventh plague: hail\n- v. 27-35: Pharaoh seems to repent, but it does not last\n\n## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n- animals are affected in both the fifth and seventh plagues, in the fifth, the word is specifically related to domestic animals (livestock) while the word used in the seventh is more general
9:1 se3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ 1 # General Information:\n\nA new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the beginning of the fifth plague sequence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
9:1 p1oj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of [9:4](../09/04.md) and contains two additional levels of quotes. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
9:1 fo4o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes וְדִבַּרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗יו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽעִבְרִ֔ים 1 You may want to translate the second-level quotation beginning with **Thus says Yahweh** as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “and say to him that Yahweh, the God of the Hebrews, says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
9:1 w0lg כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
9:1 x4bd עַמִּ֖י 1 Alternate translation: “the Israelites”
9:2 l7ld rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism כִּ֛י אִם־מָאֵ֥ן אַתָּ֖ה לְשַׁלֵּ֑חַ וְעוֹדְךָ֖ מַחֲזִ֥יק בָּֽם 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “If you continue refusing to let them go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
9:3 fltr הִנֵּ֨ה 1 The word **behold** is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternate translation: “look out”
9:3 ume2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יַד־יְהוָ֜ה הוֹיָ֗ה בְּמִקְנְךָ֙ 1 Here, **hand** represents Yahweh’s power to afflict their animals with disease. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Then the power of Yahweh will afflict your livestock” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:3 cjt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person יַד־יְהוָ֜ה 1 This is part of the reported speech that Yahweh wants Moses to say to Pharaoh. Therefore, you could change the third person **the hand of Yahweh** to first person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “My hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
9:3 tn3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual בְּמִקְנְךָ֙ 1 While the word **your** here is not plural, the next verse shows that it refers to all the people of Egypt who owned cattle. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, you may want to use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
9:3 v8ur rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism בַּסּוּסִ֤ים בַּֽחֲמֹרִים֙ בַּגְּמַלִּ֔ים בַּבָּקָ֖ר וּבַצֹּ֑אן 1 This long list is meant to reinforce the universal effects of the coming plague. It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that it is not limiting but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
9:3 m1fk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns בַּבָּקָ֖ר & וּבַצֹּ֑אן 1 These (**cattle** and **flock**) are collective singular nouns which refer to groups of animals. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “on your bulls and cows and on your sheep and goats” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
9:3 f5sr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כָּבֵ֥ד 1 Here the plague is spoken of as if it weighed a lot. This means it would be very bad. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “severe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:4 x12r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person יְהוָ֔ה 1 This is part of the reported speech that Yahweh wants Moses to say to Pharaoh. Therefore, you could change the third person **Yahweh** to first person if it would be clearer in your language. You should do the same as you did in the [previous verse](../09/04.md). Alternate translation: “I” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
9:4 lp3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Here, **Israel** refers to the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:4 u60c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Here, **Israel** is used as a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
9:4 fs25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִקְנֵ֣ה מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the livestock of the Egyptian people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:4 xk5d מִכָּל־לִבְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Alternate translation: “which belongs to any of the sons of Israel”
9:5 vqz2 וַיָּ֥שֶׂם יְהוָ֖ה מוֹעֵ֣ד 1 Alternate translation: “And Yahweh made an appointed time”
9:5 w8gk לֵאמֹ֑ר 1 This marks the beginning of a direct quotation. It can be omitted in translation if your language does not use a similar form. However, in this sentence it is the only verb related to speech, so you may need to translate it similarly to the way the UST does.
9:5 pxb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person יְהוָ֛ה 1 Yahweh is speaking here. Therefore, you could change the third person **Yahweh** to first person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
9:6 gt3n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַיַּ֨עַשׂ יְהוָ֜ה 1 It is implied that Moses went and spoke to Pharaoh as directed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses did as Yahweh had commanded. And Yahweh did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:6 cx5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole כֹּ֖ל מִקְנֵ֣ה 1 This is exaggerated to emphasize the seriousness of the event. There were still some animals alive that were afflicted by later plagues. However, it may be best to translate this with the word “all.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
9:6 gy7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptian peoples’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:6 i0bl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes וּמִמִּקְנֵ֥ה בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֹא־מֵ֥ת אֶחָֽד 1 Here the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “But every single one of the Israelites’ livestock lived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
9:7 md84 וְהִנֵּ֗ה 1 Again, **behold** is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternate translation: “and listen”
9:7 rtny rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes לֹא־מֵ֛ת מִמִּקְנֵ֥ה יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל עַד־אֶחָ֑ד 1 Here the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “every single one of the Israelites’ livestock was alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
9:7 kkuc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Here, **Israel** refers to the Israelites. Alternate translation: “of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:7 sfor rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Here, **Israel** is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
9:7 j51j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיִּכְבַּד֙ לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **heavy**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “But Pharaoh was defiant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:8 brm6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮ 1 A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the start of the sixth plague scene. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
9:8 luhg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual לָכֶם֙ & חָפְנֵיכֶ֔ם 1 **You** and **your** refer to both Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use dual form (if you have one) or plural forms (if not) here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
9:8 ydar קְח֤וּ לָכֶם֙ מְלֹ֣א חָפְנֵיכֶ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “Each of you fill both your hands with”
9:8 u5wn פִּ֖יחַ כִּבְשָׁ֑ן 1 Alternate translation: “ash from a furnace” or “ash produced by a furnace”
9:8 gk7f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns פִּ֖יחַ 1 Here, **ash** is singular. For some languages you may need to make it plural as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
9:8 gu1v הַשָּׁמַ֖יְמָה 1 Alternate translation: “toward the sky”
9:8 p795 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְעֵינֵ֥י פַרְעֹֽה 1 The phrase **before the eyes of Pharaoh** means in his sight. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh” or “so Pharaoh sees it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:9 d2v3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown לִשְׁחִ֥ין פֹּרֵ֛חַ אֲבַעְבֻּעֹ֖ת 1 To have **boils** means to have a condition where the skin is red, hot, and painful, the skin breaks open, and puss and blood come out. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
9:9 jlh0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations הָאָדָ֜ם 1 Here, **man** includes women and children. Alternate translation: “people” or “mankind” or “humans” See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
9:10 wdcn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns פִּ֣יחַ 1 Here, **ash** is singular. For some languages you may need to make it plural as in the UST. See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
9:10 dp3l פִּ֣יחַ הַכִּבְשָׁ֗ן 1 Alternate translation: “ash from a furnace” or “ash produced by a furnace” See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md).
9:10 ufpn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַיַּֽעַמְדוּ֙ לִפְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 Here, **before the face of Pharaoh** means in Pharaoh’s presence. Alternate translation: “and stood in Pharaoh’s presence” or “and stood in the presence of Pharaoh” See how you translated a similar statement in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:10 xmbw הַשָּׁמָ֑יְמָה 1 Alternate translation: “toward the sky” See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md).
9:10 jhzb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שְׁחִין֙ אֲבַעְבֻּעֹ֔ת פֹּרֵ֕חַ 1 To have **boils** means to have a condition where the skin is red, hot, and painful, the skin breaks open, and puss and blood come out. See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
9:10 rdo3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations בָּאָדָ֖ם 1 Here, **man** includes women and children. See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
9:11 jrc3 הַֽחַרְטֻמִּ֗ים & בַּֽחֲרְטֻמִּ֖ם 1 See how you translated **magicians** in [7:11](../07/11.md).
9:11 dxsx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לַעֲמֹ֛ד לִפְנֵ֥י מֹשֶׁ֖ה 1 Here, **before the face of** means in Moses’ presence. Alternate translation: “to stand in Moses’ presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:11 k9uu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִפְּנֵ֣י הַשְּׁחִ֑ין 1 Here, **the face of** means the presence of or perhaps pain from the boils. Alternate translation: “because of the boils” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:11 lpmq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַשְּׁחִ֑ין & הַשְּׁחִ֔ין 1 To have **boils** means to have a condition where the skin is red, hot, and painful, the skin breaks open, and puss and blood come out. See how you translated this in [9:9](../09/09.md). However, this time only **boils** is used, without the description (“bursting blisters”) that is in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
9:12 p5m5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 This phrase means that it was God who made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:13 ifs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the beginning of the seventh plague sequence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
9:13 zmrt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְהִתְיַצֵּ֖ב לִפְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֑ה 1 Here, **before the face of** means in Pharaoh’s presence. Alternate translation: “and stand in Pharaoh’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:13 dxww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וְאָמַרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗יו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽעִבְרִ֔ים 1 After **and say to him**, a second-level quote begins which continues until the end of [9:19](../09/19.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. However, it may be useful to translate this short quote frame as an indirect quotation, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
9:13 hsl6 כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
9:14 z68b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י 1 Here it is implied that Pharaoh will again not let God’s people go. **For** is expressing the result, that is, God’s response to Pharaoh’s disobedience to the command immediately preceding. You may need to insert this as in the UST or choose a contrastive conjunction. Alternate translation: “Otherwise,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
9:14 n6wq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche אֲנִ֨י שֹׁלֵ֜חַ אֶת־כָּל־מַגֵּפֹתַי֙ אֶֽל־לִבְּךָ֔ 1 Here, **to your heart** is a synecdoche that means that even Pharaoh will be hurt by the plagues. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am about to send all my plagues against you personally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
9:15 f056 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo כִּ֤י עַתָּה֙ שָׁלַ֣חְתִּי אֶת־יָדִ֔י וָאַ֥ךְ אוֹתְךָ֛ וְאֶֽת־עַמְּךָ֖ בַּדָּ֑בֶר וַתִּכָּחֵ֖ד מִן־הָאָֽרֶץ 1 This verse presents two things that God could have done but did not do to the Egyptians. This is to set up the reason he gives in the [next verse](../09/16.md). Be sure that it is clear in your translation that these are hypothetical past events. See the note regarding Yahweh’s stated goals in the next verse. Some languages may need to reverse the order of these verses to put Yahweh’s goals before his non-action. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
9:15 a3l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy שָׁלַ֣חְתִּי אֶת־יָדִ֔י וָאַ֥ךְ אוֹתְךָ֛ 1 Here, **my hand** refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “I could have used my power to attack you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:15 hgfx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וָאַ֥ךְ אוֹתְךָ֛ וְאֶֽת־עַמְּךָ֖ בַּדָּ֑בֶר 1 Here, **a plague** is spoken about as if it were something that could be used to hit someone. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and caused you and your people to suffer from a plague” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:16 kwks rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal וְאוּלָ֗ם בַּעֲב֥וּר זֹאת֙ הֶעֱמַדְתִּ֔יךָ בַּעֲב֖וּר הַרְאֹתְךָ֣ אֶת־כֹּחִ֑י וּלְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖י בְּכָל־הָאָֽרֶץ׃ 1 The statements from **to show** to the end of the verse are Yahweh’s stated goals, and thus, his reasons for not yet destroying Egypt and Pharaoh. You will need to translate, **However, for this reason I appointed you: in order** in a way that connects with the [previous verse](../09/15.md) in an action-goal manner. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
9:16 nec7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וּלְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖י בְּכָל־הָאָֽרֶץ 1 Here, **my name** represents Yahweh’s reputation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and so that people everywhere will know who I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:17 h3ed rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor עוֹדְךָ֖ מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל בְּעַמִּ֑י 1 Pharaoh’s opposition to letting the Israelites go to worship Yahweh is spoken of as if he were raising himself up as a barrier to them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are still blocking my people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:17 sdav rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל 1 Here, Pharaoh is both the subject and object of the sentence. Translate this in a way that conveys that (1) Pharaoh is making Pharaoh (himself) proud and (2) this is metaphorically expressed as Pharaoh making Pharaoh (himself) the obstacle in the Israelites’ way to freedom (as discussed in the previous note.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
9:17 r1wv מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל 1 Here, **you** is Pharaoh.
9:17 zfhb בְּעַמִּ֑י 1 Here, **my people** are the Israelites.
9:18 fnd2 הִנְנִ֤י 1 Alternate translation: “Pay attention to the important thing I am about to tell you”
9:18 pmy0 כָּעֵ֣ת & אֲשֶׁ֨ר לֹא־הָיָ֤ה כָמֹ֨הוּ֙ 1 Alternate translation: “at this time. There has never been anything like this”
9:19 fduj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy שְׁלַ֤ח הָעֵז֙ אֶֽת־מִקְנְךָ֔ וְאֵ֛ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֥ר לְךָ֖ בַּשָּׂדֶ֑ה 1 The form of address here is singular; Moses is speaking directly to Pharaoh. However, the next two verses make it clear that Pharaoh’s servants heard and understood this warning to be for them as well. In this sense Pharaoh represents the Egyptians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:19 eo52 וְיָרַ֧ד עֲלֵהֶ֛ם הַבָּרָ֖ד 1 Alternate translation: “and the balls of ice will drop on”
9:19 x4ja rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations כָּל־הָאָדָ֨ם 1 Here, **man** means humans and includes men, women, and children. Alternate translation: “everyone” or “anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
9:19 itlv וְהַבְּהֵמָ֜ה 1 Here, **and beast** includes domestic and wild animals.
9:19 f80e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וָמֵֽתוּ 1 The people and animals **will die** because they will be fatally injured by the hail. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the hail will kill them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:19 g90p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks וָמֵֽתוּ 1 Up to three levels of direct quotation (depending on your earlier decision about converting a level to an indirect quotation) end at the end of this verse. You should indicate that ending here with closing first-level, second-level, and third-level (if required) quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations within quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
9:20 dp8j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הַיָּרֵא֙ 1 As in some other occasions, Moses’ conversation with Pharaoh is not recorded. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the fact that he did as Yahweh instructed explicitly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:20 p3nz הַיָּרֵא֙ אֶת־דְּבַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה מֵֽעַבְדֵ֖י פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 Here, **the word of Yahweh** refers to Yahweh’s warning, more broadly it means they believed that Yahweh would do what he threatened. Alternate translation: “Those of Pharaoh’s servants who feared Yahweh’s warning”
9:21 dvwv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַאֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־שָׂ֛ם לִבּ֖וֹ אֶל 1 Here, **set his heart** means he believed or thought something was true. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternate translation: “but whoever did not respect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:21 bzqy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy דְּבַ֣ר יְהוָ֑ה 1 Here, **the word of Yahweh** refers to Yahweh’s warning, more broadly it means they did not believe that Yahweh would do what he threatened. Alternate translation: “Yahweh’s warning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:22 vtfl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 A minor scene shift occurs here and may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
9:22 zwvk יָֽדְךָ֙ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
9:22 h9cr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations הָאָדָ֣ם 1 Here, **man** includes women and children. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
9:22 r0g4 הַבְּהֵמָ֗ה 1 Here, **beast** includes domestic and wild animals.
9:23 o8zy מַטֵּהוּ֮ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
9:25 vnpj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism מֵאָדָ֖ם וְעַד־בְּהֵמָ֑ה 1 Here, **from man to beast** is a figure of speech used to emphasize the extent and severity of the hail. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “every living thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
9:25 ft0o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations מֵאָדָ֖ם 1 Here, **man** includes women and children. Alternate translation: “from people” or “from mankind” or “from humans” See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
9:25 apbl בְּהֵמָ֑ה 1 Here, **beast** includes domestic and wild animals.
9:27 fu9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיִּשְׁלַ֣ח פַּרְעֹ֗ה 1 A minor scene shift occurs here and may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
9:27 sh1x חָטָ֣אתִי 1 Some commentators suggest translating **sinned** more literally, that is “missed the mark,” because Pharaoh is probably not admitting a moral failure, but instead, admitting that he misjudged.
9:27 joxy הַצַּדִּ֔יק & הָרְשָׁעִֽים 1 Many commentators suggest that Pharaoh is using these terms in a narrow, legal sense and only referring to this instance. That is, he is saying something like “I’ve lost this round in court.” See UST.
9:27 wag1 וְעַמִּ֖י 1 Here, **my people** refers to the Egyptians.
9:28 r0cs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes וְלֹ֥א תֹסִפ֖וּן לַעֲמֹֽד 1 Here Pharaoh uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “really, I will let you go”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
9:29 ajz3 וַיֹּ֤אמֶר אֵלָיו֙ מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “And Moses said to Pharaoh”
9:29 b787 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction אֶפְרֹ֥שׂ אֶת־כַּפַּ֖י אֶל־יְהוָ֑ה 1 This symbolic gesture accompanies prayer. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will pray to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
9:30 tn94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary וְאַתָּ֖ה וַעֲבָדֶ֑יךָ 1 This phrase is shifted to the beginning of the sentence to mark focus on Pharaoh and his servants because, despite Yahweh demonstrating his power, they are not yet afraid of him. If your language has a form or discourse feature that draws contrastive focus to participants, use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
9:30 srx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִפְּנֵ֖י יְהוָ֥ה 1 Here, **face** means presence or power. Alternate translation: “of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:31 pcwg rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 This and the next verse give background information so that the destruction caused by the later plagues can be understood by the reader. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
9:31 p1v8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְהַפִּשְׁתָּ֥ה & וְהַפִּשְׁתָּ֖ה 1 **Flax** is a plant that produces fibers that can be made into linen cloth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
9:31 lzar rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown אָבִ֔יב 1 This means the seeds at the top of the barley stalk were developing but still green. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
9:32 jmq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְהַכֻּסֶּ֖מֶת 1 **Spelt** is a kind of wheat. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
9:33 fa2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַיִּפְרֹ֥שׂ כַּפָּ֖יו אֶל־יְהוָ֑ה 1 This symbolic gesture accompanies prayer. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 9:29](../09/29.md). Alternate translation: “lifted up his hands toward Yahweh and prayed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
9:34 ke5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיַּכְבֵּ֥ד לִבּ֖וֹ 1 Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he made his own **heart heavy**. This time his servants do the same. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [8:15](../08/15.md). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh determined to be defiant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:34 nz0e וַיֹּ֣סֶף לַחֲטֹ֑א 1 This statement is from the author’s perspective. Therefore, unlike in [9:27](../09/27.md), **sin** should be translated with the word your language uses for “sin.”
9:34 ooed וַיַּכְבֵּ֥ד לִבּ֖וֹ ה֥וּא וַעֲבָדָֽיו 1 Alternate translation: “and he caused his heart to be heavy. His servants did also” or “and he caused his heart to be heavy. His servants did the same”
9:35 yxt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַֽיֶּחֱזַק֙ לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:13](../07/13.md). This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:35 x0kn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כַּאֲשֶׁ֛ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָ֖ה בְּיַד־מֹשֶֽׁה 1 This is similar to [9:12](../09/12.md). In this case, what Yahweh said is spoken of as if it were something that could be held in someone’s hand. This means that Moses delivered a message from Yahweh that Pharaoh would be stubborn. It is not clear if this message was given to the Israelites or if this refers to Moses’ statement to Pharaoh in [9:30](../09/30.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “just as Yahweh had told Moses to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:intro s5g1 0 # Exodus 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe text does not specify, but some time seems to have passed between chapters nine and ten (see 9:31-32 and 10:5).\n- v. 1-20: Eighth plague: locusts\n - v. 16-20: Pharaoh seems to repent, but it does not last\n- v. 21-29: Ninth plague: darkness
10:1 w4pw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּֽי־אֲנִ֞י הִכְבַּ֤דְתִּי אֶת־לִבּוֹ֙ וְאֶת־לֵ֣ב עֲבָדָ֔יו 1 This means God made Pharaoh and his servants stubborn. Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their **hearts** were **heavy.** If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md), but note that the metaphor is slightly different here. Alternate translation: “for I have caused Pharaoh and his servants to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:3 pm8p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks וַיֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗יו 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until near the end of [10:6](../10/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
10:3 u3mq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗יו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽעִבְרִ֔ים 1 It may be helpful to turn the introductory quotation into an indirect quotation so that you do not have to use quotes within quotes. Alternate translation: “and told him that Yahweh, the God of the Hebrews, said thus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
10:3 vze4 כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
10:3 cicf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עַד־מָתַ֣י מֵאַ֔נְתָּ לֵעָנֹ֖ת מִפָּנָ֑י 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of Yahweh. Particularly, it means the presence of his judgment (the plagues). Alternate translation: “Until when will you refuse to be humble when I judge you” or “Until when will you refuse to be humble before me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:4 ge67 הִנְנִ֨י 1 Here, **behold me** adds emphasis to what is said next. Alternate translation: “beware”
10:4 uwtp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns אַרְבֶּ֖ה 1 Here, **locust** is a singular noun referring to the group as one. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
10:5 zu5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וְכִסָּה֙ אֶת־עֵ֣ין הָאָ֔רֶץ וְלֹ֥א יוּכַ֖ל לִרְאֹ֣ת אֶת־הָאָ֑רֶץ 1 These parallel statements have a similar meaning. They are used to emphasize the great number of locusts that are coming. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
10:5 rdav וְכִסָּה֙ אֶת־עֵ֣ין הָאָ֔רֶץ 1 Alternate translation: “And it will cover the land from sight”
10:5 oj3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns וְכִסָּה֙ & וְאָכַ֣ל & וְאָכַל֙ 1 Here the pronoun **it** agrees in number with the collective singular “locust” in the previous verse. Insects are often referred to without gender in English, but you will need to use whatever number, gender, or noun class is required in your language to agree with the word for “locust” that you used in the [previous verse](../10/04.md). See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
10:6 ir5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole מִיּ֗וֹם הֱיוֹתָם֙ עַל־הָ֣אֲדָמָ֔ה עַ֖ד הַיּ֣וֹם הַזֶּ֑ה 1 Here, **on the earth** could either mean “on the planet” or “on the land” (Egypt). Either way, the entire phrase is meant to emphasize an extremely long time, with the intended meaning being “never.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
10:6 ma0o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַיִּ֥פֶן 1 [Verse 3](../10/03.md) says that Aaron came in to see the king with Moses. It is implied that he left with him as well. You may make this explicit if it would help your readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:7 xn8j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion עַד־מָתַי֙ יִהְיֶ֨ה זֶ֥ה לָ֨נוּ֙ לְמוֹקֵ֔שׁ 1 Pharaoh’s servants ask this question to show Pharaoh that he is stubbornly causing the destruction of Egypt. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We must not let this man continue to cause trouble for us!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10:7 jqbh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations הָ֣אֲנָשִׁ֔ים 1 Here, **men** may be literal or it may refer to the Israelites, including the women and children. In [verse 10](../10/10.md) the king rejects the idea of letting the women and children go, and in [verse 11](../10/11.md) he specifically says that the men can go. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
10:7 xdm5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הֲטֶ֣רֶם תֵּדַ֔ע כִּ֥י אָבְדָ֖ה מִצְרָֽיִם 1 Pharaoh’s servants ask this question to bring Pharaoh to recognize what he refuses to see. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should realize that Egypt is destroyed!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10:7 c6pr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כִּ֥י אָבְדָ֖ה מִצְרָֽיִם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that these plagues have destroyed Egypt” or “that their God has destroyed Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:8 bu1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַיּוּשַׁ֞ב אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֤ה וְאֶֽת־אַהֲרֹן֙ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And a servant brought Moses and Aaron back to Pharaoh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:9 fnnl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive נֵלֵ֑ךְ & נֵלֵ֔ךְ 1 **We** means the Israelites and does not include Pharaoh or the Egyptians. Use an exclusive form here if your language has this distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
10:10 hjc9 יְהִ֨י כֵ֤ן יְהוָה֙ עִמָּכֶ֔ם כַּאֲשֶׁ֛ר אֲשַׁלַּ֥ח אֶתְכֶ֖ם וְאֶֽת־טַפְּכֶ֑ם 1 **May Yahweh be with you** is usually a blessing but is almost certainly not a blessing here. It likely means something like “It will take Yahweh’s power to make me let you and your children go,” or “May Yahweh be as favorable to you as I am to the idea of letting your children go.” Pharaoh is saying that it will take Yahweh to make him do what Moses wants, but he does not think that will happen. Alternate translation: “It will be clear that Yahweh is with you if I let you and your children go”
10:10 w8x4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy רְא֕וּ כִּ֥י רָעָ֖ה נֶ֥גֶד פְּנֵיכֶֽם 1 The phrase **for evil is before your faces** could either be a warning from Pharaoh that Moses’ actions will lead to evil for the Israelites, or it could mean that Pharaoh thinks the Israelites plan something that he considers evil. **Faces** is a metonym for the whole person. Alternate translations: “I see that you plan evil” or “Be careful! Your actions will have bad consequences” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:11 pkm4 הַגְּבָרִים֙ 1 This interjection clarifies who may go. Alternate translation: “the leaders”
10:11 vdjk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מֵאֵ֖ת פְּנֵ֥י פַרְעֹֽה 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of Pharaoh. Alternate translation: “from his presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:12 kchn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 There is a minor scene change here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
10:12 gjfx יָדְךָ֜ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
10:12 qikq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns בָּֽאַרְבֶּ֔ה 1 **Locust** is a collective singular noun referring to the group as one. See how you translated this in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
10:12 gzwa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns וְיַ֖עַל & וְיֹאכַל֙ 1 Here, the pronoun **it** agrees in number with the collective singular “locust.” See how you translated this in [10:5](../10/05.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
10:13 xqsz מַטֵּהוּ֮ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
10:13 vee8 ר֥וּחַ קָדִים֙ 1 The wind blew from east to west.
10:13 syz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns הָאַרְבֶּֽה 1 See how you translated this in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
10:14 kuuu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns הָֽאַרְבֶּ֗ה & אַרְבֶּה֙ 1 See how you translated this in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
10:15 b3h5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns וַיְכַ֞ס & וַיֹּ֜אכַל 1 Here the pronoun **it** agrees in number with the collective singular “locust.” See how you translated this in [10:5](../10/05.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
10:15 xszc וַיְכַ֞ס אֶת־עֵ֣ין כָּל־הָאָרֶץ֮ 1 See how you translated this in [10:5](../10/05.md).
10:15 ill1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וַיֹּ֜אכַל אֶת־כָּל־עֵ֣שֶׂב הָאָ֗רֶץ וְאֵת֙ כָּל־פְּרִ֣י הָעֵ֔ץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוֹתִ֖יר הַבָּרָ֑ד וְלֹא־נוֹתַ֨ר כָּל־יֶ֧רֶק בָּעֵ֛ץ וּבְעֵ֥שֶׂב הַשָּׂדֶ֖ה בְּכָל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 These parallel statements reinforce one another. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
10:16 ty9f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אֱלֹֽהֵיכֶ֖ם וְלָכֶֽם 1 Here, **you** and **your** are plural. These could refer either to Moses and Aaron or to all the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
10:17 ttog אַ֣ךְ הַפַּ֔עַם & רַ֖ק 1 Pharaoh could either be desperate and using **just this once … only** to attempt to make his request as small as possible to increase the chances of it being granted, or he could be still too proud to admit guilt beyond this single incident (which is probably his bold statement about Yahweh being with the Israelites in [10:10](../10/10.md)). The former seems more likely given that he terms this plague “this death.” If your culture has a way of making a request seem as small as possible, you may want to use it to translate Pharaoh’s request.
10:17 kd6d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אֱלֹהֵיכֶ֑ם 1 Here, **your** is plural. This could refer either to Moses and Aaron or to all the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
10:17 doeg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy הַמָּ֥וֶת הַזֶּֽה 1 The word **death** here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people, because there would be no crops. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:17 nn2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הַמָּ֥וֶת הַזֶּֽה 1 The word **death** here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people because there would be no crops. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this destruction that will lead to our deaths” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:18 p9hz וַיֵּצֵ֖א 1 Moses and Aaron were summoned to the king in [10:16](../10/16.md), so some translations will need to say that they both left.
10:19 xhsv רֽוּחַ־יָם֙ חָזָ֣ק מְאֹ֔ד 1 Alternate translation: “a very strong west wind” or “a very strong wind from the west”
10:19 mdp5 וַיִּשָּׂא֙ אֶת־הָ֣אַרְבֶּ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “and it moved the locust upward”
10:19 zhcu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns הָ֣אַרְבֶּ֔ה & אַרְבֶּ֣ה 1 See how you translated this in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “the locusts … of the locusts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
10:19 q8aj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns וַיִּתְקָעֵ֖הוּ 1 Here, the first **it** refers to the wind; the second **it** agrees in number with the collective singular “locust.” See how you translated this in [10:5](../10/05.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
10:20 dw1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיְחַזֵּ֥ק יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:21 x6xk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. This is the start of the third plague sequence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
10:21 utyz יָֽדְךָ֙ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
10:21 m38s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִצְרָ֑יִם וְיָמֵ֖שׁ חֹֽשֶׁךְ 1 This is a somewhat puzzling construction which describes the darkness. Most English translations take it as a passive, which restated actively means, “people will feel the darkness,” meaning metaphorically what is expressed in different ways in the UST and the alternate translation here. Another option is to view the Hebrew verb form as causative and translate as such: “and the darkness will cause people to feel,” meaning people will have to feel where they are going because they will not be able to see. A final option would be a personification of darkness such that the darkness gropes around, filling in every place in the land. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Egypt, an extremely oppressive darkness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:22 z4ge יָד֖וֹ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
10:23 jmd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לֹֽא־רָא֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ אֶת־אָחִ֗יו 1 This phrase means that people could not see the people who lived closest to them, whether or not that person was literally their **brother**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “No one could see the people who lived with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:23 o572 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations אִ֣ישׁ & אִ֥ישׁ 1 Here, **man** refers to any human in general. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
10:24 vp7b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual לְכוּ֙ עִבְד֣וּ & צֹאנְכֶ֥ם וּבְקַרְכֶ֖ם & טַפְּכֶ֖ם & עִמָּכֶֽם 1 Every instance of **you** and **your**, as well as the imperative verb forms in this verse, are plural. They refer to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
10:25 rsr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy גַּם־אַתָּ֛ה תִּתֵּ֥ן בְּיָדֵ֖נוּ זְבָחִ֣ים וְעֹל֑וֹת 1 The construction here is difficult. Based on context, Moses is probably not saying that Pharaoh needs to provide his own animals to the Israelites. He is asking Pharaoh to let the Israelites take their own animals with them. **Give in our hands** means to take with them, by whatever means, which may include holding a rope in the hand to lead the animals or any other means of herding the animals. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:25 cj78 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy זְבָחִ֣ים וְעֹל֑וֹת 1 Here, **sacrifices and burnt offerings** refers to the animals of their flocks and herds that they must take. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “animals for sacrifices and burnt offerings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:25 bjy0 וְעָשִׂ֖ינוּ לַיהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֵֽינוּ 1 Here, **do** means “do the sacrifices and burnt offerings.” Alternate translation: “and we will make those sacrifices and burnt offerings to Yahweh our God”
10:25 ixo7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive בְּיָדֵ֖נוּ & וְעָשִׂ֖ינוּ & אֱלֹהֵֽינוּ 1 Here, **we** and **us** refers to the Israelites (same group as the speaker’s) while excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians (listeners’ group). If your language distinguishes between forms of we and us based on who is included, be sure to use the one appropriate to the described group. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
10:26 k0pi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive מִקְנֵ֜נוּ & עִמָּ֗נוּ & נִקַּ֔ח & אֱלֹהֵ֑ינוּ וַאֲנַ֣חְנוּ & נֵדַ֗ע & נַּעֲבֹד֙ & בֹּאֵ֖נוּ 1 Here, **we, our,** and **us** each refers to the Israelites (same group as the speaker’s) while excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians (listeners’ group). If your language distinguishes between forms of we, our, and us based on who is included, be sure to use the one appropriate to the described group. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
10:26 ys4v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive לֹ֤א תִשָּׁאֵר֙ פַּרְסָ֔ה 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We cannot leave behind a single animal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:26 v9uc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche פַּרְסָ֔ה 1 Here the word **hoof** refers to the entire animal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a single animal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
10:26 uiom שָֽׁמָּה 1 The destination is unspecified. Previous context suggests it would be at the mountain of God (see [3:1](../03/01.md), especially [3:12](../03/12.md), and [4:27](../04/27.md)), which would take three days of travel to reach (see [3:18](../03/18.md) and [5:3](../05/03.md)).
10:27 n588 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיְחַזֵּ֥ק יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:27 mv8t וְלֹ֥א אָבָ֖ה לְשַׁלְּחָֽם 1 Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh would not consent to let them go”
10:28 di6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns הִשָּׁ֣מֶר לְךָ֗ 1 Here, the listener, Moses, is both the subject and object of the sentence. He is the person told to look (subject) and he himself is what he is told to look at (object). Different languages have different methods of marking this. Alternate translation: “You watch yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
10:28 eza9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הִשָּׁ֣מֶר לְךָ֗ 1 This is an idiom. Pharaoh is not telling Moses literally to keep looking at himself. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:28 lcz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit תָּמֽוּת 1 Pharaoh means he will have Moses killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:28 te45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche פָּנַ֔י & פָנַ֖י 1 Here, **face** refers to the whole person. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
10:29 h1jf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כֵּ֣ן דִּבַּ֑רְתָּ 1 With these words, Moses emphasizes that Pharaoh has spoken the truth. Alternate translation: “What you have said is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:29 rg18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche פָּנֶֽיךָ 1 Here, **face** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
11:intro pu3u 0 # Exodus 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\r\n\nChapter 11 is a transition point in the book. The previous nine plagues (in their three sequences of three) have come to an end and the last plague, the death of the firstborn, is about to occur, along with the Passover and the Exodus itself. It is difficult to know if the events in chapter 11 all are recorded in the order in which they happened. For translation, you should follow the order of the text if it will not confuse your readers.\n\nIt may be helpful to think that after the end of chapter 10, Yahweh spoke to Moses immediately, before he actually left Pharaoh’s presence (v. [1](../11/01.md)-[2](../11/02.md)). [Verse 3](../11/03.md) is a comment suggesting that the Egyptians will be willing to do as the Israelites are told to ask them to do in [v. 2](../11/02.md). In verses [4](../11/04.md)-[7](../11/07.md) Moses gives Pharaoh and his officials a message from Yahweh that Yahweh is giving to Moses right at that moment. At the end of [v. 8](../11/08.md) Moses leaves Pharaoh’s presence (completing the interaction from the [end of ch. 10](../10/28.md)). [Verse 9](../11/09.md) may either be Yahweh telling Moses what is going to happen, or it could be part of the summary that occurs in [v. 10](../11/10.md). Verse 10 summarizes what has happened in chs. 5-10 (especially the plagues in chs. 7-10) in preparation for the great last plague.
11:1 hrom rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֗ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [11:2](../11/02.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
11:1 eqeb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential כְּשַׁ֨לְּח֔וֹ & יְגָרֵ֥שׁ 1 These verbs (**lets go** and **drive away**) are meant to immediately follow one another. When you translate, make sure they are almost simultaneous in time; the letting go happens and then immediately the driving away happens. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
11:1 iocd כָּלָ֕ה גָּרֵ֛שׁ יְגָרֵ֥שׁ 1 The wording here is very forceful. Use strong words, forms, or phrasing when you are translating.
11:1 i87h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אֶתְכֶ֖ם & אֶתְכֶ֖ם 1 Each occurrence of the word **you** in this verse is plural and refers to Moses and the rest of the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
11:2 t14c נָ֖א 1 Here, **now** conveys urgency, indicating that Moses should speak soon, without delaying for other things. If you have a way of giving a command that shows that it is important for someone to do it quickly, it would be better to translate in that way than in a way that means “now” in a time sense (versus earlier or later).
11:2 nlsk בְּאָזְנֵ֣י הָעָ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “so the people hear you” or “when all the people are listening”
11:2 jl6w כְּלֵי־כֶ֖סֶף וּכְלֵ֥י זָהָֽב 1 These could be any sort of thing made from silver or gold (for instance: utensils, cups, pitchers, plates, candleholders), not just jewelry.
11:2 ddej וְיִשְׁאֲל֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ׀ מֵאֵ֣ת רֵעֵ֗הוּ וְאִשָּׁה֙ מֵאֵ֣ת רְעוּתָ֔הּ כְּלֵי־כֶ֖סֶף וּכְלֵ֥י זָהָֽב 1 [Exodus 3:22](../03/22.md) contains similar instructions; see how you translated there.
11:3 x83s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside וַיִּתֵּ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־חֵ֥ן הָעָ֖ם בְּעֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם גַּ֣ם׀ הָאִ֣ישׁ מֹשֶׁ֗ה גָּד֤וֹל מְאֹד֙ בְּאֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם בְּעֵינֵ֥י עַבְדֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה וּבְעֵינֵ֥י הָעָֽם 1 In this verse the author interjects a comment about the situation. Some translations choose to put the verse in parenthesis to indicate this. You may mark it in a way that is natural to your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
11:3 hng9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom חֵ֥ן הָעָ֖ם בְּעֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Here, **in the eyes of the Egyptians** is an idiom for the Egyptian’s feelings or opinion. **Favor** means those feelings are positive. Taken together, this means that when the Egyptians see the Israelites leaving Egypt, they will gladly help them. (Because the Egyptians have suffered under God’s judgment, the Egyptians want so badly to see them leave). If your language has the same or a similar idiom, you can translate or use it. Otherwise, you can translate the meaning. See how you translated this in [3:21](../03/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11:3 orq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּעֵינֵ֥י עַבְדֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה וּבְעֵינֵ֥י הָעָֽם 1 Here, **in the eyes of the servants of Pharaoh and in the eyes of the people** is an idiom for their feelings or opinions. If your language has the same or a similar idiom, you can translate or use it. Otherwise, you can translate the meaning. See how you translated a similar idiom in [3:21](../03/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11:3 s5zy וַיִּתֵּ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־חֵ֥ן הָעָ֖ם בְּעֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 [Exodus 3:21](../03/21.md) contains a related phrase; see how you translated it there.
11:4 kpb5 כֹּ֖ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֑ה 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
11:5 hv8k בְּכוֹר֮ & מִבְּכ֤וֹר & בְּכ֣וֹר & בְּכ֥וֹר 1 The “firstborn” always refers to the oldest male offspring.
11:5 k42h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism מִבְּכ֤וֹר פַּרְעֹה֙ הַיֹּשֵׁ֣ב עַל־כִּסְא֔וֹ עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַשִּׁפְחָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַחַ֣ר הָרֵחָ֑יִם וְכֹ֖ל בְּכ֥וֹר בְּהֵמָֽה 1 This is a merism. First, two extremes are mentioned: the highest of society (**Pharaoh, who sits on his throne**) and the lowest (**the slave girl who is behind the mill**). Then the animals (**beasts**) are added making it a three-item list of parts of society and even the economy to show the totality of the coming judgment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
11:5 hr1x אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַחַ֣ר הָרֵחָ֑יִם 1 Alternate translation: “who is grinding at the handmill” or “who is behind the handmill grinding grain”
11:6 hui7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism אֲשֶׁ֤ר כָּמֹ֨הוּ֙ לֹ֣א נִהְיָ֔תָה וְכָמֹ֖הוּ לֹ֥א תֹסִֽף 1 This phrase uses the extremes of past and future to emphasize the concept of “never.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “such as has never been and never will be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
11:7 b60a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לֹ֤א יֶֽחֱרַץ & לְשֹׁנ֔וֹ 1 This means to make an unfriendly noise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will not growl” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11:7 t61i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual תֵּֽדְע֔וּן 1 Here, **you** is plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
11:7 fl78 אֲשֶׁר֙ יַפְלֶ֣ה יְהוָ֔ה בֵּ֥ין מִצְרַ֖יִם וּבֵ֥ין יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 9:4](../09/04.md).
11:8 hoft rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וְהִשְׁתַּֽחֲוּוּ־לִ֣י 1 This does not mean to bow for worshiping. **They will bow to** Moses to beg him to leave. They will do this to show how desperate they will be for Moses and the Israelites to go. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
11:8 l678 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְהִשְׁתַּֽחֲוּוּ־לִ֣י 1 **They will bow to** Moses to beg him to leave. They will do this to show how desperate they will be for Moses and the Israelites to go. If this action would not mean the same thing in your culture, you may need to make the reason they are bowing explicit. Alternate translation: “and they will bow down to me to beg” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:8 njx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְכָל־הָעָ֣ם אֲשֶׁר־בְּרַגְלֶ֔יךָ 1 Here, the people are pictured as below Moses, which means they are his followers. The reference to **feet** also can mean they go the same place he goes, again, meaning “follower.” If your language uses a similar image to mean follower, you can translate the image; if not, you may use another image from your culture or translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “and all the people who are following you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:8 ria5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְאַחֲרֵי־כֵ֖ן אֵצֵ֑א 1 This means that Moses and the Israelites will leave Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “After that I will leave here” or “After that I will go out from Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:8 milu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בָּחֳרִי־אָֽף 1 This is an idiom meaning that Moses is angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “enraged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11:10 h5g7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory וּמֹשֶׁ֣ה וְאַהֲרֹ֗ן עָשׂ֛וּ אֶת־כָּל־הַמֹּפְתִ֥ים הָאֵ֖לֶּה לִפְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֑ה וַיְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה וְלֹֽא־שִׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵאַרְצֽוֹ 1 This verse is summarizing and wrapping up the story of the plagues. If your language has a way of summarizing information at the end of a story, try to translate this verse (and possibly verse 9—see the introductory notes to this chapter) in this way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
11:10 um4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:intro fd2f 0 # Exodus 12 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe events of this chapter are known as the Passover. They are remembered in the celebration of Passover. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])\n1. Instruction v. 1-28\n * v. 1-20: Yahweh gives instructions\n * v. 1-11: how to eat this Passover\n * v. 12-13: description of the plague\n * v. 14-20: directions for future celebration of Passover\n * v. 21-28: Moses repeats Yahweh’s instructions to Israelites\n2. Narrative v. 29-42: Passover and Exodus\n3. Instruction v. 43-49: which foreigners may eat Passover\n4. Summary Narrative v. 50-51\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Unleavened bread\n\nThe concept of unleavened bread is introduced in this chapter. Its significance stems from its connection to the events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]])\n\n### Ethnic segregation\n\nThe Hebrew people were to be separate from the rest of the world. Because of this, they separated themselves from other people groups. At this time, these foreigners were looked upon as unholy. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n## Potential Translation Issues:\n\n### Passover\n\n### Pronoun usage\n\nIn the long quotation (verses 3-20) that Yahweh tells Moses and Aaron to convey to the Israelites, he speaks of them in the third person (“they must”) in [verses 3](../12/03.md)–4 and [verses 7](../12/07.md)–8 and to them in the second person (“you must”) for all the rest of the instruction. Some languages may need to keep the pronoun person consistent throughout the quotation.\n\n### You plural\n\nIn this chapter, almost every occurrence of “you” or “your” is plural. Each one refers to all the Israelites. Those that are not will be marked. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form throughout unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
12:2 z785 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks הַחֹ֧דֶשׁ הַזֶּ֛ה לָכֶ֖ם רֹ֣אשׁ חֳדָשִׁ֑ים 1 The start of this verse is the beginning of a direct quote which continues until the end of [verse 20](../12/20.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
12:2 gtgb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism הַחֹ֧דֶשׁ הַזֶּ֛ה לָכֶ֖ם רֹ֣אשׁ חֳדָשִׁ֑ים רִאשׁ֥וֹן הוּא֙ לָכֶ֔ם לְחָדְשֵׁ֖י הַשָּׁנָֽה 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that the month in which the events of this chapter take place will be the beginning of their calendar year. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
12:2 uy4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths רִאשׁ֥וֹן הוּא֙ לָכֶ֔ם לְחָדְשֵׁ֖י הַשָּׁנָֽה 1 The first month of the Hebrew calendar includes the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. It marks when Yahweh rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
12:3 lv6s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual דַּבְּר֗וּ 1 The command here is to both Moses and Aaron. If your language uses a different form if two are people addressed, use a dual form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
12:3 jjw0 וְיִקְח֣וּ לָהֶ֗ם אִ֛ישׁ שֶׂ֥ה לְבֵית־אָבֹ֖ת שֶׂ֥ה לַבָּֽיִת 1 This seems to be indicating that if multiple families live in one house, the man who is the leader of the family group that lives there should take one lamb for that whole household. Alternate translation: “the father of each household must take a lamb for his household, one per household”
12:3 qzct שֶׂ֥ה & שֶׂ֥ה 1 The word **lamb** literally means “of the flock,” and it could also be translated as a sheep or a goat. Here, the ULT uses **lamb** (a young sheep), because [verse 5](../12/05.md) specifies that it must be one year old. “Kid” (a young goat) would be equally valid as verse 5 also says that it could be either a sheep or a goat. You may translate it as either sheep or goat, whichever would be most familiar.
12:4 xzn3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְאִם־יִמְעַ֣ט הַבַּיִת֮ מִהְיֹ֣ת מִשֶּׂה֒ 1 This means that there are not enough people in the family to eat an entire lamb. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If there are not enough people in the household to eat an entire lamb” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:4 o258 וּשְׁכֵנ֛וֹ הַקָּרֹ֥ב אֶל־בֵּית֖וֹ בְּמִכְסַ֣ת נְפָשֹׁ֑ת 1 The phrase **by the number of people** helps to clarify which sort of **neighbor near to his house** the Israelite should choose. They should count their own household and another household and try to have a group that is the right number to eat an entire lamb. Alternate translation: “and his neighbor who lives near him and whose family is the right size to share a lamb with”
12:4 fu2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations אִ֚ישׁ 1 Here **man** refers to each person, whether man, woman, or child. Alternate translation: “each family member” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
12:6 lz76 בֵּ֥ין הָעַרְבָּֽיִם 1 This refers to the time of evening after the sun has set but while there is still some light.
12:7 cjt7 עַל־שְׁתֵּ֥י הַמְּזוּזֹ֖ת וְעַל־הַמַּשְׁק֑וֹף עַ֚ל הַבָּ֣תִּ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house” or “on the top and sides of the frame around the door into the house”
12:8 uxn6 מְרֹרִ֖ים 1 These are edible but strong-tasting leaves, seeds, and other parts of plants.
12:9 ny3a אַל־תֹּאכְל֤וּ מִמֶּ֨נּוּ֙ נָ֔א 1 Alternate translation: “Do not eat the lamb or goat uncooked”
12:11 ks7d חֲגֻרִ֔ים 1 Here, **belts** are strips of leather or fabric for tying around the waist.
12:11 nzw2 וַאֲכַלְתֶּ֤ם אֹתוֹ֙ בְּחִפָּז֔וֹן 1 Alternate translation: “And you must eat it quickly”
12:11 r789 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit פֶּ֥סַח ה֖וּא לַיהוָֽה 1 **It** refers to eating the animal on the tenth day of the month. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “This observance is Yahweh’s Passover” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:12 sa5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּבְכָל־אֱלֹהֵ֥י מִצְרַ֛יִם אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֥ה שְׁפָטִ֖ים 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you can express the same idea in another way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12:13 tywz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns לְמַשְׁחִ֔ית 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **destruction**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to destroy you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12:13 bnoe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְלֹֽא־יִֽהְיֶ֨ה בָכֶ֥ם נֶ֨גֶף֙ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and I will not put the plague on you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:13 ox3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּאֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 Yahweh is going to strike the people and animals who live in **the land of Egypt**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “on everything living in the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12:14 fa9q וְהָיָה֩ הַיּ֨וֹם הַזֶּ֤ה 1 Verses 14-[20](../12/20.md) are instructions for the Israelites’ future celebration of the Passover. If your language makes a distinction between near and far future events or between near and general commands, you may need to make clear that these verses primarily have a later application.
12:14 usns rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הַיּ֨וֹם הַזֶּ֤ה 1 Here, **this day** means the tenth day of the first month of every year. On this day every year, they must celebrate the Passover. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
12:15 xsb9 אַ֚ךְ 1 Alternate translation: “Surely” or “Indeed”
12:15 i9n3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְנִכְרְתָ֞ה הַנֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַהִוא֙ מִיִּשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 The metaphor **cut off** could mean: (1) the person must leave. Alternate translation: “he must be sent away” (2) the person is no longer an Israelite. Alternate translation: “he will no longer be considered to be one of the people of Israel” (3) the person must die. Alternate translation: “he must be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:15 enw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְנִכְרְתָ֞ה הַנֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַהִוא֙ מִיִּשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 As noted in the previous note, the metaphor **cut off** has at least three possible meanings. By whom that person will be cut off is not specified; it could be the Israelites or Yahweh. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The following alternate translations express those: (1) “the people of Israel must send him away” or (2) “I will no longer consider him to be one of the people of Israel” or (3) “the people of Israel must kill him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:15 eqzu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns מִיִּשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 **Israel** is a collective noun referring to the nation or people group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
12:16 bzj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּבַיּ֤וֹם הָרִאשׁוֹן֙ מִקְרָא־קֹ֔דֶשׁ וּבַיּוֹם֙ הַשְּׁבִיעִ֔י מִקְרָא־קֹ֖דֶשׁ יִהְיֶ֣ה לָכֶ֑ם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And on the first day and on the seventh day, you shall have an assembly of holiness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:16 cb1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns מִקְרָא־קֹ֔דֶשׁ & מִקְרָא־קֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a holy assembly … a holy assembly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12:16 o3oh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּבַיּ֤וֹם הָרִאשׁוֹן֙ & וּבַיּוֹם֙ הַשְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And on day one of the month … and on day seven of the month” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
12:16 l7pj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָּל־מְלָאכָה֙ לֹא־יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה בָהֶ֔ם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You will do no work on these days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:16 qr65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ה֥וּא לְבַדּ֖וֹ יֵעָשֶׂ֥ה לָכֶֽם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which must be the only work that you do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:17 r3qj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown צִבְאוֹתֵיכֶ֖ם 1 The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people, often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
12:18 v7g9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בָּרִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּאַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַחֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ & עַ֠ד י֣וֹם הָאֶחָ֧ד וְעֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַחֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “In month one, on day fourteen … until day twenty-one of the month” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
12:18 l57q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בָּרִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּאַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַחֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ & עַ֠ד י֣וֹם הָאֶחָ֧ד וְעֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַחֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
12:18 m475 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths בָּרִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּאַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַחֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ 1 This is the first month of the Hebrew calendar. The fourteenth day is near the beginning of April on Western calendars. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
12:18 uss3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths י֣וֹם הָאֶחָ֧ד וְעֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַחֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 This is near the middle of April on Western calendars. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
12:19 aej1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive שְׂאֹ֕ר לֹ֥א יִמָּצֵ֖א בְּבָתֵּיכֶ֑ם 1 This means there should not be any yeast in their houses. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Note that the UST more accurately conveys the meaning here, as the alternate translation in this note could be understood to mean that you must simply hide the yeast very well. Alternate translation: “Yahweh must not find any yeast in your houses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:19 vy72 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְנִכְרְתָ֞ה הַנֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַהִוא֙ מֵעֲדַ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:19 cwvs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְנִכְרְתָ֞ה הַנֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַהִוא֙ מֵעֲדַ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:21 y9qt rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent summoned 0 A new scene begins at this verse, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
12:22 qwv1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown אֲגֻדַּ֣ת אֵז֗וֹב 1 **Hyssop** is a woody plant with small leaves that can be used for sprinkling liquids by dipping the leaves in the liquid and then shaking them or brushing them over the target. If this plant is unknown, you can use a descriptor phrase. Alternate translation: “part of a plant with small branches and many leaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
12:22 c1cf אֶל־הַמַּשְׁקוֹף֙ וְאֶל־שְׁתֵּ֣י הַמְּזוּזֹ֔ת 1 Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house.” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:7](../12/07.md).
12:22 vdlj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations לֹ֥א & אִ֥ישׁ 1 Here, **man** includes women and children. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
12:23 uu61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche וּפָסַ֤ח יְהוָה֙ עַל־הַפֶּ֔תַח 1 Here the word **door** implies the entire house. This means that God will spare the Israelites in houses with blood on the door frames. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh will pass over the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
12:23 onpu עַל־הַמַּשְׁק֔וֹף וְעַ֖ל שְׁתֵּ֣י הַמְּזוּזֹ֑ת 1 Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:7](../12/07.md).
12:24 v7z5 הַדָּבָ֣ר הַזֶּ֑ה 1 These words refer to the Passover or Festival of Unleavened Bread. Observing the Passover was an act of worshiping Yahweh.
12:24 bzm0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd לְךָ֥ וּלְבָנֶ֖יךָ 1 Here, **you** and **your** are singular but they refer to the whole nation. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
12:25 l8ls הָעֲבֹדָ֥ה הַזֹּֽאת 1 Here, **this service** refers to the Passover or Festival of Unleavened Bread. Observing the Passover was an act of worshiping Yahweh.
12:26 hbh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations בְּנֵיכֶ֑ם 1 Here, **your sons** refers to all children, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
12:26 odj0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes אֲלֵיכֶ֖ם & מָ֛ה הָעֲבֹדָ֥ה הַזֹּ֖את לָכֶֽם 1 After **you**, a second-level quotation begins. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “to you what this ritual means to you,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
12:27 t779 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְאֶת־בָּתֵּ֣ינוּ הִצִּ֑יל 1 This means that Yahweh spared the Israelites’ firstborn sons. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “He did not kill the firstborn sons in our houses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:28 r5cj כַּאֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֥ה וְאַהֲרֹ֖ן כֵּ֥ן עָשֽׂוּ 1 Alternate translation: “everything that Yahweh told Moses and Aaron to do”
12:29 rvg9 0 The next few verses are the climax of this part of Exodus. A number of literary features mark it out. First, it is specially introduced with **and so it happened,** which is used to mark major breaks in the narrative. Second, it uses repetition: **firstborn** is repeated four times in verse 29 so that the reader cannot possibly miss what is happening. **Night** is repeated in verse 29, 30, and 31. **Got up/get up** is repeated in verse 30 and 31. In verses 31 and 32 “also” occurs five times (it is translated as “both” once in the ULT). Third, the places of both **Pharaoh** and **the captive** are elaborated on to slow the pace and create a vivid mental image for the reader. In verse 30 there is the listing of sorts of people who got up; note the use of the double negative for emphasis. Your translation should attempt to use the same or similar literary features of your own language that slow down the pace, create vivid imagery, and emphasize that this is a climax point.
12:29 zm1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism מִבְּכֹ֤ר פַּרְעֹה֙ הַיֹּשֵׁ֣ב עַל־כִּסְא֔וֹ עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַשְּׁבִ֔י אֲשֶׁ֖ר בְּבֵ֣ית הַבּ֑וֹר וְכֹ֖ל בְּכ֥וֹר בְּהֵמָֽה 1 This phrase indicates that there was no person or household excluded from Yahweh’s judgment. It both speaks of extreme parts of society and then makes this into a list by including the animals. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the firstborn of Pharaoh who sits on the throne and the firstborn of the captive who was in the house of the pit and the firstborn of everyone in between was struck; even all the firstborn of the beasts were struck” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
12:29 uj6u בְּכוֹר֮ & מִבְּכֹ֤ר & בְּכ֣וֹר & בְּכ֥וֹר 1 In these usages, **firstborn** always refers to the oldest male offspring. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 11:5](../11/05.md).
12:29 g9z1 עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַשְּׁבִ֔י אֲשֶׁ֖ר בְּבֵ֣ית הַבּ֑וֹר 1 Alternate translation: “to the firstborn of people in the house of the pit” This refers to prisoners in general and not to a specific person in prison.
12:30 gt4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives כִּֽי־אֵ֣ין בַּ֔יִת אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֵֽין־שָׁ֖ם מֵֽת׃ 1 If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “because someone was dead in every house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
12:31 j8k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אַתֶּ֖ם & כְּדַבֶּרְכֶֽם 1 Here, Pharaoh speaking is to both Moses and Aaron. If your language uses a different form if two are people addressed, use a dual form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
12:33 j5u4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כֻּלָּ֥נוּ מֵתִֽים 1 The Egyptians were afraid that they would die if the Israelites did not leave Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “We will all die if you do not leave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:34 diw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive מִשְׁאֲרֹתָ֛ם צְרֻרֹ֥ת בְּשִׂמְלֹתָ֖ם עַל־שִׁכְמָֽם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “They tied up their bread-making bowls in their clothes and placed them on their shoulders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:36 nvmo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אֶת־חֵ֥ן הָעָ֛ם בְּעֵינֵ֥י מִצְרַ֖יִם 1 Here, **in the eyes of the Egyptians** is an idiom for the Egyptian’s feelings or opinion. **Favor** means that those feelings are positive. Taken together, this means that when the Egyptians saw the Israelites leaving Egypt, they gladly helped them (because they wanted them to leave so badly due to the Egyptians suffering under God’s judgment). If your language has the same or a similar idiom, you can translate or use it. Otherwise, you can translate the meaning. See how you translated this in [3:21](../03/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
12:37 n1ha rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מֵרַעְמְסֵ֖ס 1 **Rameses** was a major Egyptian city where grain was stored. See how you translated this in [Exodus 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
12:39 pva6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כִּֽי־גֹרְשׁ֣וּ מִמִּצְרַ֗יִם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Egyptians had driven them out of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:41 xlf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown צִבְא֥וֹת 1 The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people, often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
12:42 w6mj לַֽיהוָ֔ה שִׁמֻּרִ֛ים לְכָל־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לְדֹרֹתָֽם 1 Alternate translation: “for all the sons of Israel throughout their generations to observe for Yahweh”
12:44 n9wn וְכָל־עֶ֥בֶד אִ֖ישׁ 1 Alternate translation: “But any slave of an Israelite”
12:44 qabi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical וּמַלְתָּ֣ה אֹת֔וֹ אָ֖ז 1 This is a hypothetical situation. You will need to use whatever form your language uses to mark something as potentially true. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
12:44 jqs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular וּמַלְתָּ֣ה 1 Here **you** is singular. It refers to a specific man and his slave. It might make more sense to use the third person here. Alternate translation: “if he circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
12:46 j242 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive בְּבַ֤יִת אֶחָד֙ יֵאָכֵ֔ל 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must eat it in one house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:46 iovj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd לֹא־תוֹצִ֧יא 1 Here, **you** is singular, however it is used to address a crowd. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
12:48 j7ob rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical וְכִֽי־יָג֨וּר אִתְּךָ֜ גֵּ֗ר וְעָ֣שָׂה פֶסַח֮ לַיהוָה֒ 1 This is a two-part hypothetical situation. It describes the circumstance and desire of the sojourner; the next portion says what he must do. You will need to use whatever form your language uses to mark something as potentially true. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
12:48 va2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd אִתְּךָ֜ 1 Here, **you** is singular, however it is used to address a crowd. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
12:48 h7k9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הִמּ֧וֹל ל֣וֹ כָל־זָכָ֗ר 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone must circumcise all males in his household” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:48 n3fz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal הִמּ֧וֹל ל֣וֹ כָל־זָכָ֗ר וְאָז֙ יִקְרַ֣ב לַעֲשֹׂת֔וֹ 1 The sojourner will be circumcised in order to **draw near to keep** the Passover. Some languages may need to place the purpose clause first. Alternate translation: “in order draw near to keep it all his males must be circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
12:48 hi4z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כְּאֶזְרַ֣ח הָאָ֑רֶץ 1 Here, **land** refers to Canaan—which is the land that the Israelites will soon live in. The expression **a native of the land** means a person who is a native Israelite. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “those who are Israelites by birth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12:48 f9ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives וְכָל־עָרֵ֖ל לֹֽא־יֹ֥אכַל בּֽוֹ 1 If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “And only a circumcised person may eat it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
12:51 e3z3 וַיְהִ֕י בְּעֶ֖צֶם הַיּ֣וֹם הַזֶּ֑ה 1 This phrase is used here to mark an important event in the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
12:51 tyj3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown צִבְאֹתָֽם 1 The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
13:intro g9qi 0 # Exodus 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Instruction\n - v. 1-2: First mention of setting apart the firstborn \n - v. 3-10: Reiteration of the Passover instructions from [12:14-20](../12/14.md) and [24-27](../12/24.md), with a focus on telling to Yahweh’s deeds to the future generations of Israelites \n - v. 11-13: More details on setting apart the firstborn \n - v. 14-16: Reiteration of purpose: telling to future generations\n2. Narrative \n - v. 17-22: Some details of the exodus\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n* There are several concepts that will be important to understand and translate with care (some have already been encountered in Exodus). They are: set apart, sign, symbol, redemption, and sacrifice.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n* There are a number of names of people groups and places in this chapter. However, many have been translated in earlier passages.\n* Transporting the bones of Joseph may be an unknown concept in some places.\n* It may take some time to decide on a good translation for the pillars of fire and cloud that lead the Israelites.
13:2 de3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks קַדֶּשׁ־לִ֨י כָל־בְּכ֜וֹר פֶּ֤טֶר כָּל־רֶ֨חֶם֙ בִּבְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל בָּאָדָ֖ם וּבַבְּהֵמָ֑ה לִ֖י הֽוּא 1 This entire verse is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
13:3 en1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבֵּ֣ית עֲבָדִ֔ים 1 Moses speaks of Egypt as if it were a house where people keep slaves. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the place where you were slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:3 yjy5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּחֹ֣זֶק יָ֔ד 1 Here, **hand** refers to power. See how you translated “strong hand” in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:3 c6ee rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְלֹ֥א יֵאָכֵ֖ל חָמֵֽץ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:4 y1f3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הָאָבִֽיב 1 This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. Aviv is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
13:5 x89s וְהָיָ֣ה כִֽי־יְבִֽיאֲךָ֣ יְהוָ֡ה אֶל־אֶ֣רֶץ & וְעָבַדְתָּ֛ אֶת־הָעֲבֹדָ֥ה הַזֹּ֖את בַּחֹ֥דֶשׁ הַזֶּֽה 1 When the Israelites live in Canaan, they must celebrate the Passover on this day each year. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:25](../12/25.md).
13:5 u37l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לַאֲבֹתֶ֨יךָ֙ 1 Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “to your ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:5 ueej אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּדְבָ֑שׁ 1 The same description occurs in [Exodus 3:8](../03/08.md). See how you translated it there and in the several notes for it.
13:6 mde6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּבַיּוֹם֙ הַשְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “and on day 7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
13:7 n41m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive מַצּוֹת֙ יֵֽאָכֵ֔ל 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must eat unleavened bread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:7 le33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְלֹֽא־יֵרָאֶ֨ה לְךָ֜ חָמֵ֗ץ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you may not have any bread with yeast among you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:7 c9kr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְלֹֽא־יֵרָאֶ֥ה לְךָ֛ שְׂאֹ֖ר 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You may not have any yeast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:7 dmv1 בְּכָל־גְּבֻלֶֽךָ 1 Alternate translation: “inside any of the borders of your land”
13:8 qum9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes בַּיּ֥וֹם הַה֖וּא לֵאמֹ֑ר בַּעֲב֣וּר זֶ֗ה עָשָׂ֤ה יְהוָה֙ לִ֔י בְּצֵאתִ֖י מִמִּצְרָֽיִם 1 The quotation can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “on that day that this is because of what Yahweh did for you when you came out of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
13:9 p21h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וְהָיָה֩ לְךָ֨ לְא֜וֹת עַל־יָדְךָ֗ וּלְזִכָּרוֹן֙ בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֔יךָ 1 This phrase compares the Festival of Unleavened bread to two different types of physical reminders that help people not forget something important. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
13:9 s7zg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לְךָ֨ לְא֜וֹת עַל־יָדְךָ֗ 1 Moses speaks of celebrating the festival as if it were an object one could tie around their hands to remind them of what Yahweh had done. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “like something you tie around your hand as a reminder” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:9 mru4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּלְזִכָּרוֹן֙ בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֔יךָ 1 Moses speaks of celebrating the festival as if it were an object one could tie on their foreheads to remind them of what Yahweh had done. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and like something you tie around your head as a reminder” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:9 b6ny rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְמַ֗עַן תִּהְיֶ֛ה תּוֹרַ֥ת יְהוָ֖ה בְּפִ֑יךָ 1 Here, **in your mouth** refers to the words that they speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “so you may always be speaking of the law of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:9 w5rm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּיָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 Here, **hand** refers to power. See how you translated “strong hand” in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:11 e886 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְלַֽאֲבֹתֶ֑יךָ 1 Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “to your ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:11 iqh5 וּנְתָנָ֖הּ לָֽךְ 1 Alternate translation: “when he gives the land of the Canaanites to you”
13:12 mqgs וְהַעֲבַרְתָּ֥ 1 This is a deliberate word-play with [Exodus 12:12](../12/12.md) and [Exodus 12:23](../12/23.md) because these memorial sacrifices are to be reminders of what happened at the first Passover. It would be good to make a similar word-play in your translation, if possible, but following the meaning as in the UST is fine.
13:13 lwv5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְשֶׂ֔ה & וַעֲרַפְתּ֑וֹ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make explicit that either the **lamb** or **donkey** must be killed, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:13 ew26 לֹ֥א תִפְדֶּ֖ה 1 Alternate translation: “you do not ransom the donkey”
13:14 s8cm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes כִּֽי־יִשְׁאָלְךָ֥ בִנְךָ֛ מָחָ֖ר לֵאמֹ֣ר מַה־זֹּ֑את וְאָמַרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֔יו 1 The first quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “when your son asks you later what this means, then you are to tell him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
13:14 qr7q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּחֹ֣זֶק יָ֗ד 1 Here, **hand** represents God’s actions or works. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “With his powerful works” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:14 rcz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבֵּ֥ית עֲבָדִֽים 1 Moses speaks of Egypt as if it were a house where people keep slaves. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:3](../13/03.md). Alternate translation: “from the place where you were slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:15 fgvg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּֽי־הִקְשָׁ֣ה פַרְעֹה֮ לְשַׁלְּחֵנוּ֒ 1 If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. This means he was stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he were **hard.** Alternate translation: “that when Pharaoh resisted letting us go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:15 atxz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism מִבְּכֹ֥ר אָדָ֖ם וְעַד־בְּכ֣וֹר בְּהֵמָ֑ה 1 This is a figure of speech used to emphasize the extent of the plague, nothing was exempt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “whether he was a person or an animal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
13:16 bse4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וְהָיָ֤ה לְאוֹת֙ עַל־יָ֣דְכָ֔ה וּלְטוֹטָפֹ֖ת בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֑יךָ 1 This expresses two ways to remember the importance of the Passover event. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 13:9](../13/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
13:16 xfag rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּחֹ֣זֶק יָ֔ד 1 Here, **hand** represents God’s actions or works. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “with his powerful works” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:17 uxjh rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 Verses 17-19 provide background information about the Israelites process of leaving Egypt. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
13:17 cv8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיְהִ֗י 1 This marks the transition from instruction to narrative. You should mark the resumption of the narrative in a natural way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
13:17 pum6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְלֹא־נָחָ֣ם אֱלֹהִ֗ים דֶּ֚רֶךְ אֶ֣רֶץ פְּלִשְׁתִּ֔ים כִּ֥י קָר֖וֹב ה֑וּא 1 The route on which God took the Israelites was not the expected route. In some languages you may need to put the portion that describes the expectation first. Alternate translation: “although it was nearby, God did not lead them by way of the land of the Philistines.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
13:17 upop rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo פֶּֽן־יִנָּחֵ֥ם הָעָ֛ם בִּרְאֹתָ֥ם מִלְחָמָ֖ה וְשָׁ֥בוּ מִצְרָֽיְמָה 1 In some languages you may need to put the reason before the hypothetical result. Alternate translation: “When they see war, they may repent and return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
13:18 c4tw וַחֲמֻשִׁ֛ים 1 The meaning of this term (**by fives**) is uncertain. Many English translations opt for something like “prepared for battle,” because this seems to be the meaning in Numbers 32:17 and the related verses in Joshua 1:14 and 4:12. Because of what the previous verse said about war, it may mean that they went out in formation—like an army would march—but perhaps not armed. Alternate translation: “And … in formation like an army”
13:19 cxyk וַיִּקַּ֥ח מֹשֶׁ֛ה אֶת־עַצְמ֥וֹת יוֹסֵ֖ף עִמּ֑וֹ 1 See Joshua 24:32 regarding the burial of Joseph’s bones.
13:19 dnlp פָּקֹ֨ד יִפְקֹ֤ד אֱלֹהִים֙ אֶתְכֶ֔ם וְהַעֲלִיתֶ֧ם אֶת־עַצְמֹתַ֛י מִזֶּ֖ה אִתְּכֶֽם 1 This is an almost exact quote of what Joseph said in Genesis 50:25; reference your translation there when translating this.
13:20 qob9 מִסֻּכֹּ֑ת וַיַּחֲנ֣וּ בְאֵתָ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “from a place named Succoth, and they camped at a place named Etham”
13:20 xq5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בְאֵתָ֔ם 1 **Etham** was possibly located south of the route heading toward the Philistines, at the border of the wilderness. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
13:21 yi2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַֽיהוָ֡ה הֹלֵךְ֩ לִפְנֵיהֶ֨ם 1 Here, **before their faces** means “in front of the people.” Alternate translation: “And Yahweh led them by going in front of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:21 jnv8 בְּעַמּ֤וּד עָנָן֙ & בְּעַמּ֥וּד אֵ֖שׁ 1 The possessive here indicates characteristic. The **cloud** and **fire** looked like a **pillar**. Alternate translation: “in a cloud that looked like a pillar … in a fire that looked like a pillar” or “in a pillar-shaped cloud … in a pillar-shaped fire”
13:21 nr02 לְהָאִ֣יר לָהֶ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “to be light for them”
13:21 i7yl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result אֵ֖שׁ לְהָאִ֣יר לָהֶ֑ם לָלֶ֖כֶת יוֹמָ֥ם וָלָֽיְלָה 1 They could travel either by day or night because God provided light at night. You could reorder the cause and effect if that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fire. They could go by day or by night because he was light to them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
13:22 iiuj עַמּ֤וּד הֶֽעָנָן֙ יוֹמָ֔ם וְעַמּ֥וּד הָאֵ֖שׁ לָ֑יְלָה 1 See how you translated this in [13:21](../13/21.md).
13:22 qxks rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֖י הָעָֽם 1 Here, **from the face of the people** means “from in front of the people” where they could see it. Alternate translation: “from where they could see it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:intro jq4u 0 # Exodus 14 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis whole chapter is the record of an important event in the history of Israel known as the “parting of the sea of reeds (Red Sea).”\nThroughout this chapter and chapter 15, the word “sea” is used. Exodus 13:18 and 15:22 show that this is the sea of reeds (Red Sea). Since the text does not explicitly say that though, the ULT will only say “sea.” In your translation, it may help people to be more specific than the text if just using “sea” is confusing.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Pharaoh’s chariots\n\nThese chariots were a fighting force. Pharaoh took an army to kill the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nThe Israelites asked a few rhetorical questions of Moses. These questions were not really directed at Moses, but at Yahweh. This showed their lack of faith in Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
14:2 b5qq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks דַּבֵּר֮ 1 This verse begins a direct quote which continues into [verse 4](../13/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
14:2 mb4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פִּ֣י הַחִירֹ֔ת & מִגְדֹּ֖ל & בַּ֣עַל צְפֹ֔ן 1 These are locations on Egypt’s eastern border. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
14:2 ue2o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵל֒ וְיָשֻׁ֗בוּ וְיַחֲנוּ֙ לִפְנֵי֙ פִּ֣י הַחִירֹ֔ת בֵּ֥ין מִגְדֹּ֖ל וּבֵ֣ין הַיָּ֑ם לִפְנֵי֙ בַּ֣עַל צְפֹ֔ן 1 The portion after **that** could be translated as a direct quotation. That would make a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the sons of Israel, ‘Turn and camp before the face of Pi Hahiroth, between Migdol and the sea, before the face of Baal Zephon.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
14:2 c9r8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual תַחֲנ֖וּ 1 Here, **you** is plural and refers to Moses and the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
14:3 c81b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וְאָמַ֤ר פַּרְעֹה֙ לִבְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל נְבֻכִ֥ים הֵ֖ם בָּאָ֑רֶץ סָגַ֥ר עֲלֵיהֶ֖ם הַמִּדְבָּֽר 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh will say that the Israelites are confused in the land, and the wilderness has closed in on them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
14:3 tz6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification סָגַ֥ר עֲלֵיהֶ֖ם הַמִּדְבָּֽר 1 Pharaoh speaks of **the wilderness** as a person who has trapped the Israelites. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “It is as if the wilderness is closing in on them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
14:4 dv62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְחִזַּקְתִּ֣י אֶת־לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֮ 1 This means God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong.** If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But I will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
14:4 tw2m וְרָדַ֣ף אַחֲרֵיהֶם֒ 1 Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh will pursue the Israelites”
14:4 d5x1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְאִכָּבְדָ֤ה 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And people will glorify me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:4 a7m2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis וְאִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּפַרְעֹה֙ וּבְכָל־חֵיל֔וֹ 1 Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh and to all his army” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
14:4 dms1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַיַּֽעֲשׂוּ־כֵֽן 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what **they did** explicitly. Alternate translation: “So the Israelites turned and camped as Yahweh had instructed them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14:5 t4cn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַיֻּגַּד֙ לְמֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then someone told the king of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:5 it5s בָרַ֖ח 1 Alternate translation: “had run away”
14:5 k67b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַ֠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַעֲבָדָיו֙ אֶל־הָעָ֔ם 1 Here, **heart** refers to their attitudes toward the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants changed their attitude about the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:5 go8u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ֠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַעֲבָדָיו֙ אֶל־הָעָ֔ם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants turned their hearts to the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:5 wljw אֶל־הָעָ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “against the Israelites”
14:5 v236 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מַה־זֹּ֣את עָשִׂ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־שִׁלַּ֥חְנוּ אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵעָבְדֵֽנוּ 1 They asked this question to show they thought they had done a foolish thing. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We should not have let the Israelites go free from working for us!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
14:5 dnj3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
14:7 g2d9 וְשָׁלִשִׁ֖ם 1 The precise meaning of this term is not known. Alternate translations: “and officers” or “and shield-bearers” or “and three men”
14:8 a1r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיְחַזֵּ֣ק יְהֹוָ֗ה אֶת־לֵ֤ב פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were “strong.” If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “And Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
14:8 doa5 בְּיָ֥ד רָמָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “boldly” or “defiantly”
14:9 x9x0 כָּל־סוּס֙ רֶ֣כֶב פַּרְעֹ֔ה וּפָרָשָׁ֖יו וְחֵיל֑וֹ 1 It is unclear exactly what the groupings are here. **Horses of the chariots** (probably meaning “horse-drawn chariots”) and **horsemen** could be two groups or two references to the same group. **Army** could mean another group, perhaps on foot (see [15:19](../15/19.md)), or it could be a summary grouping. Furthermore, most translations render **horses of the chariots** as “horses and chariots,” suggesting four total groups (possibly because of [v. 23](../14/23.md)). Alternate translation: “all the horse-drawn chariots of Pharaoh and his horsemen and his foot soldiers”
14:9 q0jo rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns אוֹתָם֙ 1 Here, **them** refers to the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
14:9 sb7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פִּי֙ הַֽחִירֹ֔ת & בַּ֥עַל צְפֹֽן 1 These are places on Egypt’s eastern border. See how you translated them in [Exodus 14:2](../14/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
14:10 s1xa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche וּפַרְעֹ֖ה הִקְרִ֑יב 1 Here, **Pharaoh** represents the entire Egyptian army. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Then Pharaoh and his army approached” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
14:10 vyp9 וַיִּשְׂאוּ֩ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֨ל אֶת־עֵינֵיהֶ֜ם 1 Alternate translation: “and the sons of Israel looked up” or “and the sons of Israel looked back”
14:10 qcy1 וְהִנֵּ֥ה 1 Here, **behold** is used to draw attention to alarming information that follows. Use a word, phrase, or structure in your language that indicates that the next information is very alarming.
14:11 vzw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הַֽמִבְּלִ֤י אֵין־קְבָרִים֙ בְּמִצְרַ֔יִם לְקַחְתָּ֖נוּ לָמ֣וּת בַּמִּדְבָּ֑ר 1 The Israelites ask this question to express their frustration and fear of dying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There were plenty of graveyards in Egypt for us to be buried in. You did not have to take us into the wilderness to die!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
14:11 x4n2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מַה־זֹּאת֙ עָשִׂ֣יתָ לָּ֔נוּ לְהוֹצִיאָ֖נוּ מִמִּצְרָֽיִם 1 The Israelites ask this question to rebuke Moses for bringing them to the desert to die. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not have endangered us like this by bringing us out of Egypt!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
14:12 itb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הֲלֹא־זֶ֣ה הַדָּבָ֗ר אֲשֶׁר֩ דִּבַּ֨רְנוּ אֵלֶ֤יךָ בְמִצְרַ֨יִם֙ 1 The Israelites ask this question to emphasize that this is what they had told Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is exactly what we told you while we were in Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
14:12 ix25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations בְמִצְרַ֨יִם֙ לֵאמֹ֔ר חֲדַ֥ל מִמֶּ֖נּוּ וְנַֽעַבְדָ֣ה אֶת־מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the portion following **saying** as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “in Egypt? We told you to leave us alone so we could serve the Egyptians.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
14:13 phy1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּרְאוּ֙ אֶת־יְשׁוּעַ֣ת יְהוָ֔ה אֲשֶׁר־יַעֲשֶׂ֥ה לָכֶ֖ם הַיּ֑וֹם 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and see what Yahweh will do for you today, he will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
14:13 rrd4 לֹ֥א תֹסִ֛יפוּ לִרְאֹתָ֥ם ע֖וֹד עַד־עוֹלָֽם 1 This statement is very extended for emphasis on its certainty. Alternate translation: “you will not see them again forever”
14:14 vcdc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns יְהוָ֖ה יִלָּחֵ֣ם 1 The form **Yahweh himself** emphasizes what Yahweh will do in contrast to what the Israelites will do. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “As for Yahweh, he will fight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
14:14 hx1f תַּחֲרִישֽׁוּן 1 Here, **silent** could mean “still.” The Israelites’ lack of action is in contrast to Yahweh’s fighting. It is not a total lack of motion or sound. Alternate translation: “you will not fight”
14:15 a727 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מַה־תִּצְעַ֖ק אֵלָ֑י 1 Moses apparently had been praying to God for help, so God uses this question to compel Moses to act. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not call out to me any longer, Moses.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
14:16 stla הָרֵ֣ם אֶֽת־מַטְּךָ֗ וּנְטֵ֧ה אֶת־יָדְךָ֛ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding **hand** and **staff**.
14:16 t3e4 וּבְקָעֵ֑הוּ 1 Alternate translation: “and divide the sea into two parts”
14:17 z5ub וַאֲנִ֗י הִנְנִ֤י 1 Here, **behold me** is an expression meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. In this case, Yahweh is drawing attention to his next actions. Alternate translation: “Look at what I will do”
14:17 qd3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מְחַזֵּק֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 This means that God will make them stubborn. Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their **hearts** were “strong.” If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “I will cause the Egyptians to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
14:17 asz9 וְיָבֹ֖אוּ אַחֲרֵיהֶ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “so that the Egyptians will go into the sea after the Israelites”
14:17 hjyh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis וְאִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּפַרְעֹה֙ וּבְכָל־חֵיל֔וֹ בְּרִכְבּ֖וֹ וּבְפָרָשָֽׁיו 1 Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 4](../14/04.md) Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh, all his army, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
14:17 asfq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְאִכָּבְדָ֤ה 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And people will glorify me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:18 ytnm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive בְּהִכָּבְדִ֣י 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when I cause people to glorify me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:18 cji1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis בְּהִכָּבְדִ֣י בְּפַרְעֹ֔ה בְּרִכְבּ֖וֹ וּבְפָרָשָֽׁיו 1 Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 4](../14/04.md) Alternate translation: “when I get glory because of what I do to Pharaoh, his chariots, and his horsemen” or “when I show my glory by what I do to Pharaoh, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
14:19 hsih rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵי֙ מַחֲנֵ֣ה & מִפְּנֵיהֶ֔ם 1 Here, **face** means “front.” Alternate translation: “in front of the camp of … from in front of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:19 m1do עַמּ֤וּד הֶֽעָנָן֙ 1 See how you translated this in [13:21](../13/21.md).
14:19 ysv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
14:20 jyz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
14:20 c4u5 וַיְהִ֤י הֶֽעָנָן֙ וְהַחֹ֔שֶׁךְ וַיָּ֖אֶר אֶת־הַלָּ֑יְלָה 1 Alternate translation: “And the cloud became dark on one side and light on the other side all night”
14:21 qbzp וַיֵּ֨ט מֹשֶׁ֣ה אֶת־יָדוֹ֮ עַל־הַיָּם֒ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
14:21 dfx5 בְּר֨וּחַ קָדִ֤ים 1 An **east wind** originates in the east and blows towards the west.
14:21 f9zh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַיִּבָּקְע֖וּ הַמָּֽיִם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh divided the waters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:24 iz9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּאַשְׁמֹ֣רֶת הַבֹּ֔קֶר 1 This is the last third of the night. It is approximately the three hours before sunrise. Alternate translation: “very early in the morning” or “in the time before the sun rises” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
14:24 kjg9 בְּעַמּ֥וּד אֵ֖שׁ וְעָנָ֑ן 1 See how you translated this in [13:21](../13/21.md).
14:24 zyp4 מַחֲנֵ֣ה מִצְרַ֔יִם & מַחֲנֵ֥ה מִצְרָֽיִם 1 Alternate translation: “the army of the Egyptians … the army of the Egyptians”
14:25 qzkw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִפְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Here, **the face of Israel** means the presence of Israel. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:26 p5ds rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה נְטֵ֥ה אֶת־יָדְךָ֖ עַל־הַיָּ֑ם וְיָשֻׁ֤בוּ הַמַּ֨יִם֙ עַל־מִצְרַ֔יִם עַל־רִכְבּ֖וֹ וְעַל־פָּרָשָֽׁיו׃ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Yahweh told Moses to reach out with his hand over the sea so that the waters would come back onto the Egyptians, their chariots, and their horsemen.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
14:26 pw8g נְטֵ֥ה אֶת־יָדְךָ֖ עַל־הַיָּ֑ם 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
14:26 d46y rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns עַל־רִכְבּ֖וֹ וְעַל־פָּרָשָֽׁיו 1 Here, **his** refers to Pharaoh, king of Egypt. Alternate translation: “on Pharaoh’s chariots and on Pharaoh’s horsemen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
14:27 wn3q וַיֵּט֩ מֹשֶׁ֨ה אֶת־יָד֜וֹ עַל־הַיָּ֗ם 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff.
14:27 cosa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנ֥וֹת בֹּ֨קֶר֙ 1 Here, **before the face of** means “before the occurrence of.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “before it was morning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:27 h64r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיְנַעֵ֧ר יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מִצְרַ֖יִם בְּת֥וֹךְ הַיָּֽם 1 Here, Yahweh is pictured as acting toward the Egyptians as if they were dirt or dust on his clothing that he shakes to be rid of them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh threw the Egyptians back into the middle of the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
14:28 o9qo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes לֹֽא־נִשְׁאַ֥ר בָּהֶ֖ם עַד־אֶחָֽד 1 This negative statement is meant to strongly convey the idea that all the Egyptians were gone. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Every one of them was gone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
14:30 zvbe rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
14:30 e2lf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִיַּ֣ד מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Here, **hand** refers to power. Alternate translation: “from the Egyptians’ power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:30 p5zw עַל־שְׂפַ֥ת הַיָּֽם 1 Alternate translation: “on the land along the edge of the sea”
14:31 o1oc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
14:31 np6s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶת־הַיָּ֣ד הַגְּדֹלָ֗ה 1 Here, **hand** refers to power. Alternate translation: “the great power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:intro ni4b 0 # Exodus 15 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nVerses 1b-18 and 21b of chapter 15 are poetry. They are a song of praise to Yahweh because he defeated and destroyed the Egyptian army ([Exodus 14:26-28](../14/26.md)). Translating poetry should be done by someone who is a skilled poet in the target language. Because the forms of poetry are so different in different languages, a translation that is good poetry in the target language may seem very different from the original poem. The structure may look quite different. The poet will be well served by looking at the entire poem from multiple perspectives. He will need to know the meaning of the poem, the themes and discourse structure of the poem, and the feelings that the poem is supposed to create in the reader at each point (UST, tNotes). He will need to understand how that was accomplished by the original form and structure (ULT). Then he will need to compose the translated poem using forms and structures that have the same or similar meaning, themes, discourse elements, and feelings in his own language. Unlike in many other places, most notes in this chapter will not advise towards expressing meaning in plain ways or combining parallel phrases as that advice would be too simplistic for handling poetry.\n\n### Structure\n\nThis song follows a basic AB structure which is given to us in verse 1b-c and 21b-c:\n\n* A - praise to Yahweh - he is magnificent (expressed in various words)\n* B - because he defeats our enemies\n\nThe song can be divided into three major sections, each of which is patterned as: AB(a)b. Each section starts with an AB portion which is characterized by fewer verbal forms (especially the A portion). The section then elaborates on each. Note that there are other possible analyses of the structure of the poem.\n\nHere is an outline of the structure according to this model:\n\n* Section 1 (see alternate breakdown below):\n* 1b: A “Let me sing to Yahweh, for he has triumphantly triumphed;”\n* 1c: B “the horse and the one riding it he threw into the sea.”\n* 2-3: a\n* 4-5: b\n* Section 2:\n* 6a: A\n* 6b: B\n* 7a: a “And in the abundance of your majesty”\n* 7a-10: b “you overthrow those who rise up against you … ”\n* Section 3:\n* 11: A\n* 12: B\n* 13a: a (possibly) “In your covenant loyalty”\n* 13a-17: b\n* 18: finale\n\nAlternate breakdown of section 1: it is possible to view 1b-c as the introduction and divide verse 2 such that:\n\n* 2a: A “Yah is my strength and my song”\n* 2b: B “and he has become my salvation”\n* 2c-3: a\n* 4-5: b\n\n### Themes:\n\nThere are several images and themes that are throughout the song as well as some that are throughout an individual section.\n\n* “High” versus “low”: Yahweh is high, while his enemies are low.\n* The following words are all related to the idea of being high or rising up: **triumph** ([v1](../15/01.md)), **exalt** ([v2](../15/02.md)), **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v11](../15/11.md)), **majesty** ([v7](../15/07.md)), and **the mountain of** \\[Yahweh’s\\] **possession** ([v17](../15/17.md)). In the last case, Yahweh’s people are brought to a high place with him.\n* In contrast, his enemies are low. Note in [verse 7](../15/07.md), Yahweh overthrows those who **rise up against** \\[him\\]. Ideas of being low are as follows: **sank** ([v4](../15/04.md), [v10](../15/19.md)), **deeps** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **descended into the depths** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **melted away** ([v15](../15/15.md)), and **fall on them** ([v16](../15/16.md)).\n* The strength of Yahweh in [verses 2](../15/02.md), [6](../15/06.md), and [13](../15/13.md).\n* The effectiveness of Yahweh’s hand versus the enemy’s hand. Yahweh’s hand (and arm) is effective in [verses 6](../15/06.md), [12](../15/12.md), [16](../15/16.md), and [17](../15/17.md) but the enemy’s hand is ineffective despite his boasting in [verse 9](../15/09.md).\n* There is parallel imagery near the end of each section. The enemy is compared three times by simile to a heavy, inert object. In [vers
15:1 kw29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly over whom Yahweh triumphed. Alternate translation: “he has achieved a glorious victory over the army of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:1 bpyj גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “he is highly exalted” or “he is extremely high” or “he is exaltedly exalted”
15:1 f6ue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ס֥וּס וְרֹכְב֖וֹ רָמָ֥ה בַיָּֽם 1 Moses sang about God causing the sea to cover and drown the horse and rider as if God had thrown them **into the sea**. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he has made the horse and rider drown in the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:1 cr5u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ס֥וּס וְרֹכְב֖וֹ 1 This refers to many or all of the Egyptian horses and riders that were chasing the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the horses and their riders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
15:1 ex3p וְרֹכְב֖וֹ 1 Here, **rider** could either refer to a person who sits on a horse or who travels in a chariot that a horse is pulling.
15:2 pb23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor עָזִּ֤י & יָ֔הּ 1 Moses is expressing the help that he gets from Yahweh by equating Yahweh with **strength**. Use a form or metaphor from your language that would express Yahweh’s strengthening help. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yah is the one who gives me strength” or “Yah is the strong one who protects me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:2 vk6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְזִמְרָת֙ יָ֔הּ 1 Moses calls Yahweh his **song** because Yahweh is the one he sings about or because Yahweh causes him to sing. Use a form or metaphor from your language that would express Yahweh being a song of joy. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yah is … the one I sing about” or “Yah … makes me sing joyfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:2 kbv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַֽיְהִי־לִ֖י לִֽישׁוּעָ֑ה 1 Moses calls Yahweh his salvation because Yahweh saved him. Use a form or metaphor from your language that would express Yahweh’s saving power. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and he has saved me” or “and he is the one who saves me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:2 rgtu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism זֶ֤ה אֵלִי֙ וְאַנְוֵ֔הוּ אֱלֹהֵ֥י אָבִ֖י וַאֲרֹמְמֶֽנְהוּ 1 These lines are expressing very similar ideas for emphasis. If that is a normal way to make an emphatic (poetic) statement or if it would be understood in your language, you could translate in a similar way. If, however, repetition like this would create a different meaning, find a structure in your language that would fit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
15:3 p1d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor יְהוָ֖ה אִ֣ישׁ מִלְחָמָ֑ה 1 Moses calls Yahweh a **man of war** because he powerfully fought against the Egyptians and won. Alternate translation: “Yahweh is like a warrior” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:4 pc8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism מַרְכְּבֹ֥ת פַּרְעֹ֛ה וְחֵיל֖וֹ יָרָ֣ה בַיָּ֑ם וּמִבְחַ֥ר שָֽׁלִשָׁ֖יו טֻבְּע֥וּ בְיַם־סֽוּף 1 These lines are synonymous parallels where the second strengthens what is said in the first. Alternate translation: “He threw all of Pharaoh’s army into the sea, including the chariots; even his chosen officers sank in the sea of reeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
15:4 p8w6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מַרְכְּבֹ֥ת פַּרְעֹ֛ה וְחֵיל֖וֹ יָרָ֣ה בַיָּ֑ם 1 Moses sings about Yahweh causing the sea to cover Pharaoh’s chariots and army as if Yahweh had thrown them **into the sea.** If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He has made Pharaoh’s chariot riders and army drown in the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:5 yefe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism תְּהֹמֹ֖ת יְכַסְיֻ֑מוּ יָרְד֥וּ בִמְצוֹלֹ֖ת כְּמוֹ־אָֽבֶן׃ 1 These lines are synonymous parallels where the second clarifies what is said in the first. Alternate translation: “The deeps covered them because they had descended into the depths like a stone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
15:5 nqe4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile יָרְד֥וּ בִמְצוֹלֹ֖ת כְּמוֹ־אָֽבֶן 1 This comparison is that just ***like a stone*** does not float but sinks to the bottom of the sea, the enemy soldiers sank to the bottom of the sea. Alternate translation: “they went down into the deep water like a stone sinking to the bottom of the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
15:6 jx52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism יְמִֽינְךָ֣ יְהוָ֔ה נֶאְדָּרִ֖י בַּכֹּ֑חַ יְמִֽינְךָ֥ יְהוָ֖ה תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב׃ 1 These lines are synonymous parallels where the second takes the abstract idea in the first and makes it concrete (though still with poetic imagery). Alternate translation: “Yahweh, you show how majestic in power your right hand is by shattering the enemy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
15:6 x1fz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יְמִֽינְךָ֣ יְהוָ֔ה נֶאְדָּרִ֖י בַּכֹּ֑חַ יְמִֽינְךָ֥ יְהוָ֖ה תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב 1 Moses speaks of Yahweh as if Yahweh had hands. The **right hand** refers to Yahweh’s power or the things Yahweh does powerfully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, your power is glorious; Yahweh, your power has shattered the enemy” or “Yahweh, what you do is gloriously powerful; Yahweh, by your power you have shattered the enemy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:6 rmd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב 1 Moses speaks of the enemy as if it were fragile and could be **shattered** like glass or pottery. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “completely destroys the enemy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:7 i2x4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism תַּהֲרֹ֣ס קָמֶ֑יךָ תְּשַׁלַּח֙ חֲרֹ֣נְךָ֔ יֹאכְלֵ֖מוֹ כַּקַּֽשׁ 1 These lines are synonymous parallels where the second takes the abstract idea in the first portion (**you overthrow those who rise up against you**) and makes it concrete (though still with poetic imagery). Alternate translation: “you overthrow those who rise up against you by sending out your heat to devour them like stubble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
15:7 kmv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּבְרֹ֥ב גְּאוֹנְךָ֖ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **abundance** and **majesty**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “You are abundantly majestic and” or “Because you are abundantly majestic,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
15:7 nd3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor קָמֶ֑יךָ 1 Rebelling against Yahweh is spoken of as **rising up against** him. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who rebel against you” or “your enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:7 glq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification תְּשַׁלַּח֙ חֲרֹ֣נְךָ֔ 1 Moses speaks of Yahweh’s wrath (literally **heat**) as if it were a servant that Yahweh sent out to do something. Alternate translation: “You show your wrath” or “You act according to your wrath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
15:7 a5x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor יֹאכְלֵ֖מוֹ כַּקַּֽשׁ׃ 1 Moses speaks of God’s wrath as if it were fire that could completely burn up things. His enemies were completely destroyed like **stubble** in a fire. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it completely destroys your enemies like a fire that burns up straw” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:7 guap rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile יֹאכְלֵ֖מוֹ כַּקַּֽשׁ 1 Here the enemies (or **those who rise up against** Yahweh) are pictured as if they were a highly flammable piece of dried grass. Alternate translation: “it devours the enemy as if they were stubble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
15:8 ic8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification וּבְר֤וּחַ אַפֶּ֨יךָ֙ 1 Moses speaks of God as if God had a nose, and he speaks of the wind as if God blew the wind from his nose. Alternate translation: “You blew on the sea and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
15:8 qg9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּבְר֤וּחַ אַפֶּ֨יךָ֙ נֶ֣עֶרְמוּ מַ֔יִם נִצְּב֥וּ כְמוֹ־נֵ֖ד נֹזְלִ֑ים 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The blast from your nostrils piled the waters up and made the flowing waters stand upright in a heap” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:8 tguh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism נֶ֣עֶרְמוּ מַ֔יִם נִצְּב֥וּ כְמוֹ־נֵ֖ד נֹזְלִ֑ים קָֽפְא֥וּ תְהֹמֹ֖ת בְּלֶב־יָֽם 1 These lines are synonymous parallels where each line means basically the same thing, but each gives the reader a different poetic image. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
15:8 uevt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּלֶב־יָֽם 1 The center or deepest part of the sea is spoken of as if the sea had a **heart**. Alternate translation: “in the center of the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:9 d8nk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive תִּמְלָאֵ֣מוֹ נַפְשִׁ֔י 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will satisfy my desire on them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:9 lu0e תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖מוֹ יָדִֽי 1 The meaning of this phrase is unclear. The word translated **dispossess** could also mean “possess” or “inherit.” What seems clear is that the Egyptians plan to use their power to prevent the Israelites from possessing good things. Whether this is a reference back to **plunder** earlier in the verse or to recapturing them as slaves or to taking over the Israelites’ place in the land of Goshen or to keeping them from reaching the promised land (of Yahweh’s possession, see [verse 17](../15/17.md) regarding where Yahweh will bring his people) or something else is not so clear. It could also refer to taking away their life and breath. **Dispossess** was chosen rather than another term because the verb is in a causative form here. Alternate translation: “my hand will possess them” or “my hand will inherit them” or “my hand will kill them”
15:9 sm77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖מוֹ יָדִֽי 1 Here **hand** is used of the Egyptians’ power (that is, their military strength). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will dispossess them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:10 yrj5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָשַׁ֥פְתָּ בְרוּחֲךָ֖ 1 Moses spoke about God making the **wind** blow as if God **blew** the wind through his nose or mouth. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “But you made the wind blow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:10 f7d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile צָֽלֲלוּ֙ כַּֽעוֹפֶ֔רֶת בְּמַ֖יִם אַדִּירִֽים 1 **Lead** is a heavy metal that is commonly used to make things sink in water. It is used here to show how quickly God’s enemies were destroyed. Alternate translation: “sank as fast as a heavy piece of metal in the deep turbulent waters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
15:11 wq2s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מִֽי־כָמֹ֤כָה בָּֽאֵלִם֙ יְהוָ֔ה 1 Moses uses this question to show how great God is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “O Yahweh, no one is like you among the gods!” or “Yahweh, none of the gods is like you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
15:11 pp57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מִ֥י כָּמֹ֖כָה נֶאְדָּ֣ר בַּקֹּ֑דֶשׁ נוֹרָ֥א תְהִלֹּ֖ת עֹ֥שֵׂה פֶֽלֶא 1 Moses uses this question to show how great God is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one is like you. No one is majestic in holiness as you are, no one is honored in praises as you are, and no one does miracles as you do!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
15:11 uhfj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns נֶאְדָּ֣ר בַּקֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “majestic and holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
15:12 cid8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יְמִ֣ינְךָ֔ 1 The phrase **right hand** represents the strong power of God. Alternate translation: “with your strong power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:12 bkg2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָטִ֨יתָ֙ יְמִ֣ינְךָ֔ 1 Moses speaks about God causing something to happen as if God **reached out** with his** hand**. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “With your strong power you made it happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:12 g7bv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification תִּבְלָעֵ֖מוֹ אָֽרֶץ 1 Moses personifies the earth as if it could swallow or devour with its mouth. Alternate translation: “the earth devours them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
15:13 cvea rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism נָחִ֥יתָ בְחַסְדְּךָ֖ עַם־ז֣וּ גָּאָ֑לְתָּ נֵהַ֥לְתָּ בְעָזְּךָ֖ 1 These lines are structural parallels where the lines are saying similar things, but the parallelism is more in the construction of the lines. **In your** is repeated and the concepts of **led** and **guided** are very similar to one another. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
15:13 znbr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns קָדְשֶֽׁךָ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
15:14 qlpy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism tremble 0 Verses 14-16a form a complex parallel structure where things are repeated in reverse. (See the [introduction to chapter 15](../15/intro.md) and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
15:14 zi1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יִרְגָּז֑וּן 1 This means to shake with fear. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:14 uqf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification חִ֣יל אָחַ֔ז יֹשְׁבֵ֖י פְּלָֽשֶׁת 1 Moses speaks of **anguish** as if it were a person that could forcefully grab hold of someone and make them extremely afraid. Alternate translation: “the inhabitants of Philistia will be afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
15:15 qyix rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification אֵילֵ֣י מוֹאָ֔ב יֹֽאחֲזֵ֖מוֹ רָ֑עַד 1 Moses speaks of **trembling** as if it were a person that could forcefully grab hold of someone and make them extremely afraid. Alternate translation: “the leaders of Moab will be afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
15:15 ya48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָמֹ֕גוּ 1 Moses uses the phrase, **melted away,** to speak of people becoming weak because of their fear. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “became weak from fear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:16 nk67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet תִּפֹּ֨ל עֲלֵיהֶ֤ם אֵימָ֨תָה֙ וָפַ֔חַד 1 **Terror and dread** form a doublet meaning “extremely fearful.” If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “They will become extremely fearful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
15:16 kbt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor תִּפֹּ֨ל עֲלֵיהֶ֤ם אֵימָ֨תָה֙ וָפַ֔חַד 1 **Terror and dread** are pictured as physical objects that could **fall on** people. The image might be of them crushing people or being a heavy weight that people struggle under (however, the image is not specified). It means that the people will feel the emotions of terror and dread very strongly. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They will be overwhelmed with feelings of terror and dread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:16 t2yp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בִּגְדֹ֥ל זְרוֹעֲךָ֖ 1 Yahweh’s **arm** represents his great strength. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Because of your great strength” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:16 umm7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile יִדְּמ֣וּ כָּאָ֑בֶן 1 This could mean: (1) “they will be silent like stone” or (2) “they will be motionless as stone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
15:17 n5i5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit תְּבִאֵ֗מוֹ וְתִטָּעֵ֨מוֹ֙ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express where God would bring them explicitly. Alternate translation: “You will take your people to Canaan and plant them there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:17 u26j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go תְּבִאֵ֗מוֹ 1 Since Moses was not already in Canaan, some languages would use “take” rather than **bring.** Alternate translation: “You will take them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
15:17 t6wg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְתִטָּעֵ֨מוֹ֙ בְּהַ֣ר 1 Moses speaks about God giving his people the land to live in as if they were a plant that God was planting. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and you will settle them on the mountain of” or “and you will let them live on the mountain of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:17 p7kb בְּהַ֣ר נַחֲלָֽתְךָ֔ 1 This refers to Mount Zion in the land of Canaan.
15:17 ie26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּהַ֣ר נַחֲלָֽתְךָ֔ 1 Moses speaks about God promising to give his people **the mountain** forever as if he were giving it to them as an inheritance. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the mountain that you have given them as an inheritance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:17 ytz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כּוֹנְנ֥וּ יָדֶֽיךָ׃ 1 The phrase **your hands** refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “that you have built by your power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:20 gam2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַתֹּ֖ף & בְּתֻפִּ֖ים 1 A **tambourine** is a hand-held musical instrument like a small drum that also has pieces of metal around the side that make a metallic rattling sound when shaken. Alternate translation: “timbrel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
15:20 hut1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole וַתֵּצֶ֤אןָ כָֽל־הַנָּשִׁים֙ אַחֲרֶ֔יהָ בְּתֻפִּ֖ים וּבִמְחֹלֹֽת 1 Here, **all** may be a generalization; it may not have been every woman. It could be better to translate as a restrictive clause as in the UST. Alternate translation: “and every woman who went out after her had a tambourine and danced” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
15:21 f6m3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly over whom Yahweh triumphed. See how you translated this in [Exodus 15:1](../15/01.md). Alternate translation: “he has achieved a glorious victory over the army of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:21 hvu1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ס֥וּס וְרֹכְב֖וֹ רָמָ֥ה בַיָּֽם 1 Miriam sang about God causing the **sea** to cover and drown the **horse and the one riding it** as if God had thrown them **into the sea**. See how you translated this in [Exodus 15:1](../15/01.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he has made the horse and rider drown in the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:22 iw9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ 1 The word **Israel** represents the people of Israel. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Moses led the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
15:22 c7pe rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מִדְבַּר־שׁ֑וּר 1 We do not know the exact location of this place. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
15:23 a9pv rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מָרָ֔תָה 1 We do not know the exact location of **Marah**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
15:24 n64m וַיִּלֹּ֧נוּ הָעָ֛ם עַל־מֹשֶׁ֥ה 1 Murmur is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers. Alternate translation: “And the people complained against Moses” or “And the people grumbled at Moses”
15:26 l2hx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person לְק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗יךָ 1 Yahweh is speaking about his own voice. Alternate translation: “to my voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
15:26 oh8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗יךָ 1 Yahweh’s voice represents what he says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what I say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:26 sq5x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְהַיָּשָׁ֤ר בְּעֵינָיו֙ תַּעֲשֶׂ֔ה 1 The **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing represents thoughts or judgment. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and do what Yahweh considers to be right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:26 bgcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְהַֽאֲזַנְתָּ֙ לְמִצְוֺתָ֔יו 1 The **ear** represents listening, and listening represents obeying. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and you carefully obey his commands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:26 m4cn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כָּֽל־הַמַּֽחֲלָ֞ה אֲשֶׁר־שַׂ֤מְתִּי בְמִצְרַ֨יִם֙ לֹא־אָשִׂ֣ים עָלֶ֔יךָ 1 God speaks of causing people to have diseases as putting diseases on them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will not cause any of you to have the diseases that I cause the Egyptians to have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:27 did8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֵילִ֔מָה 1 **Elim** is an oasis in the desert, a place with water and shade trees. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
16:intro nkd7 0 # Exodus 16 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis entire chapter is the story of the Israelites complaining about food and Yahweh providing food. Verses 22-30 introduce the Sabbath.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Complaints\n\nAfter complaining about the water, the Israelites complained that they had less food than in Egypt. This is intended to show their ungratefulness and their sinful view of Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Prohibition against storing food\n\nThe people were not allowed to store the food, called manna, that Yahweh provided to them. This is because they were to trust in Yahweh to provide for their needs every day. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])\n\n### Sabbath\n\nThis is the first recorded celebration of the Sabbath rest. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])\n\n## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Bread as food\n\nYahweh speaks of the food that he will send as if it were bread. The manna he gave them was perhaps not literally bread. The Israelites would eat this food every day, just as they had eaten bread every day before this. Alternate translations: “food” or “food like bread” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/bread]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Chronology\n\n[Verses 34-36](../exo/16/34.md) are written from a much later perspective. Translators will need to find a way to show that this portion gives background information from a much later point (at least 40 years).\n\n### Box of the Covenant\n\nRelated to the chronology issue, although the covenant has not yet been made, it is referenced in [Exodus 16:34](../exo/16/34.md). This is probably an editorial comment made after these events. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n### Wilderness of Sin\n\nSin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with sinning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
16:1 gw67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names סִ֔ין 1 The word **Sin** here is the Hebrew name of the wilderness. It is not the English word “sin.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
16:1 h44x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths בַּחֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַחֹ֣דֶשׁ הַשֵּׁנִ֔י 1 This time coincides with the end of April and the beginning of May on Western calendars. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
16:1 u2aq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּחֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַחֹ֣דֶשׁ הַשֵּׁנִ֔י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 15 of month 2” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
16:2 h938 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole וַיִּלּ֜וֹנוּ כָּל־עֲדַ֧ת בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל 1 Here, **all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “And many of the community of the sons of Israel murmured” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
16:3 nwy6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo מִֽי־יִתֵּ֨ן מוּתֵ֤נוּ 1 This is a way of saying that they wished that they had died. It is a hypothetical past statement. Translate it in a way that makes it clear that this did not actually happen. Alternate translation: “We wish that we had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
16:3 g1n1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְיַד־יְהוָה֙ 1 The phrase **the hand of Yahweh** represents Yahweh’s action. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by Yahweh’s action” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:4 kls5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מַמְטִ֥יר לָכֶ֛ם לֶ֖חֶם מִן־הַשָּׁמָ֑יִם 1 God speaks of food coming **down from heaven** as if it were rain. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “make bread come down from heaven like rain” or “make bread fall to you from the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:4 yew5 בְּתוֹרָתִ֖י 1 Alternate translation: “in my instruction”
16:5 p1f6 וְהָיָה֙ בַּיּ֣וֹם הַשִּׁשִּׁ֔י וְהֵכִ֖ינוּ 1 Alternate translation: “It will happen on the sixth day that they will prepare” or “On the sixth day they will prepare”
16:5 cl74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּיּ֣וֹם הַשִּׁשִּׁ֔י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 6” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
16:5 t5il מִשְׁנֶ֔ה 1 two times
16:7 zb21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion וְנַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה כִּ֥י תלונו עָלֵֽינוּ 1 Moses and Aaron used this question to show the people that it was foolish to complain against them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We are not powerful enough for you to complain against us.” or “It is foolish to complain against us, because we cannot do what you want.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
16:8 pn4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion וְנַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה 1 Moses used this question to show the people that he and Aaron did not have the power to give them what they wanted. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Aaron and I cannot give you what you want.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
16:8 vdr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְנַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה לֹא־עָלֵ֥ינוּ תְלֻנֹּתֵיכֶ֖ם כִּ֥י עַל־יְהוָֽה 1 The people were complaining against Moses and Aaron, who were Yahweh’s servants. So by complaining against them, the people were really complaining against Yahweh. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Your complaints are not really against us; they are against Yahweh, because we are his servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:9 pqgo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes וַיֹּ֤אמֶר מֹשֶׁה֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן אֱמֹ֗ר אֶֽל־כָּל־עֲדַת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל קִרְב֖וּ 1 There are two layers of quotations here. You may want to translate one or the other as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “And Moses told Aaron to tell all of the congregation of the sons of Israel, ‘Approach’” or “And Moses told Aaron, ‘Tell all of the congregation of the sons of Israel to approach’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
16:10 q4ax וַיְהִ֗י 1 This phrase is used here to mark an important event in the story. The important event here is the people seeing Yahweh’s glory. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
16:10 b6rp וְהִנֵּה֙ 1 The word **behold** here shows that the people saw something extraordinary.
16:13 aas8 וַיְהִ֣י 1 This phrase is used here to mark an important part of the events. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
16:13 eu1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַשְּׂלָ֔ו 1 The word **quail** means a type of small, plump game bird. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
16:14 k5lb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown כַּכְּפֹ֖ר 1 **Frost** is frozen dew that forms on the ground. It is very fine. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
16:14 jern rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile כַּכְּפֹ֖ר 1 The original readers knew what frost is like, so this phrase would help them understand what the flakes were like. Alternate translation: “flakes that looked like frost” or “flakes that were fine like frost” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
16:16 gotf אִ֖ישׁ לְפִ֣י אָכְל֑וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “according to how much each will eat”
16:16 mnwy עֹ֣מֶר לַגֻּלְגֹּ֗לֶת מִסְפַּר֙ נַפְשֹׁ֣תֵיכֶ֔ם אִ֛ישׁ לַאֲשֶׁ֥ר בְּאָהֳל֖וֹ תִּקָּֽחוּ 1 Alternate translation: “take an omer per person according to how many people are in the gatherer’s tent”
16:19 v499 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun אִ֕ישׁ אַל 1 **A man** refers to people in general, not to one particular man. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “No one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
16:20 itjo וַיָּ֥רֻם תּוֹלָעִ֖ים 1 Alternate translation: “and it decayed with worms”
16:21 jd5t אִ֖ישׁ כְּפִ֣י אָכְל֑וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “everyone according to how much they would eat” or “everyone according to how many people they had to feed”
16:22 nrx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיְהִ֣י 1 This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. Verses 16:22-30 tell about what the people did concerning the manna on the sixth and seventh days of the week. If your language has a way for marking this as a new part of the story, you could consider using it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
16:22 xk6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּיּ֣וֹם הַשִּׁשִּׁ֗י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 6” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
16:22 zj1u מִשְׁנֶ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “two times as much”
16:22 f4j9 לֶ֨חֶם֙ 1 This refers to the **bread** that appeared as thin flakes on the ground each morning.
16:23 wc4a שַׁבָּת֧וֹן שַׁבַּת־קֹ֛דֶשׁ לַֽיהוָ֖ה 1 Alternate translation: “is a day to stop working completely and dedicate to Yahweh”
16:23 cqjd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns שַׁבַּת־קֹ֛דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a holy Sabbath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
16:24 y4d9 וְלֹ֣א הִבְאִ֔ישׁ 1 Alternate translation: “And it did not smell rotten”
16:25 pr1p כִּֽי־שַׁבָּ֥ת הַיּ֖וֹם לַיהוָ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “today is a Sabbath, a day to honor Yahweh by not working”
16:26 jv77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּבַיּ֧וֹם הַשְּׁבִיעִ֛י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day seven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
16:27 qf14 וְלֹ֖א מָצָֽאוּ 1 Alternate translation: “but they did not find any manna”
16:28 e1vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion עַד־אָ֨נָה֙ מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם לִשְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖י וְתוֹרֹתָֽי 1 God used this question to scold the people because they did not obey his laws. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You people still do not keep my commandments and laws!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
16:28 q41d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם 1 # General Information:\n\nYahweh speaks to Moses, but the word **you** refers to the people of Israel in general. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
16:28 vnq7 לִשְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖י וְתוֹרֹתָֽי 1 Alternate translation: “to obey my commandments and my laws”
16:29 p22l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּֽי־יְהוָה֮ נָתַ֣ן לָכֶ֣ם הַשַּׁבָּת֒ 1 Yahweh speaks about teaching people to rest on the Sabbath as if the **Sabbath** were a gift. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, have taught you to rest on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:29 dt58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּיּ֥וֹם הַשִּׁשִּׁ֖י & בַּיּ֥וֹם הַשְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 6 … on day 7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
16:29 y8wf לֶ֣חֶם 1 This refers to the bread that appeared as thin flakes on the ground each morning.
16:31 r1a5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown כְּזֶ֤רַע גַּד֙ לָבָ֔ן 1 **Coriander** is an herb also known as cilantro. People eat both the leaves and seeds. People dry the seeds, grind them into a powder, and put it in food to add flavor. Alternate translation: “like a small white seed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
16:31 vrl4 כְּצַפִּיחִ֥ת 1 **Wafers** are very thin biscuits or crackers.
16:33 ggba rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:34 x9vr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background wafers 0 Verses 34-36 provide a later commentary on the chapter. If your language has a way of marking background information you may want to use it starting from verse 34 or verse 35. You may want to leave verse 34 more connected to verse 33 even though it references the **Covenant**, which has not been given yet. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
16:34 jzcz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֥י הָעֵדֻ֖ת 1 Here, **face** represents being near the **Covenant.** Alternate translation: “near the Covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:36 g8ns rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume וְהָעֹ֕מֶר עֲשִׂרִ֥ית הָאֵיפָ֖ה הֽוּא 1 An **omer** and an **ephah** are both units of dry measurement. An ephah is approximately equal to a bushel, and an omer is one-tenth of an ephah. The original readers would have known how much an ephah was. This sentence would help them know how much an omer was. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
16:36 a9uh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction וְהָעֹ֕מֶר עֲשִׂרִ֥ית הָאֵיפָ֖ה הֽוּא 1 For languages that do not use fractions, this can be reworded. Alternate translation: “Now ten omers equal one ephah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
17:intro f12q 0 # Exodus 17 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-7: the Israelites complain and Yahweh gives them water\n- v. 8-16: Israel defeats Amalek in battle\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nMoses uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. The purpose of these questions is to convince people of their sin. Likewise, the people’s rhetorical question shows their ignorance. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Wilderness of Sin\n\nSin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is not the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with the act of sinning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Naming\n\nAs in the last couple of chapters, places and things are named for what happens in that location. In this chapter is Massah (which means “test”), Meribah (“arguing”), and an altar named “Yahweh is my Banner,” because Yahweh will be at war with the Amalekites forever.
17:1 jzz5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַ֠יִּסְעוּ כָּל־עֲדַ֨ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל 1 A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
17:1 h1li rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names סִ֛ין 1 The word **Sin** here is the Hebrew name of the wilderness. It is not the English word “sin.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 16:1](../16/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
17:1 e7jv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עַל־פִּ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 Here, **mouth** refers to Yahweh’s commands (that is, what he says to do). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “at the command of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:1 j1fm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בִּרְפִידִ֔ים 1 **Rephidim** means “the resting place,” a place to rest on long journeys through the wilderness. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
17:2 hr9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מַה־תְּרִיבוּן֙ עִמָּדִ֔י מַה־תְּנַסּ֖וּן אֶת־יְהוָֽה 1 Moses uses these questions to scold the people. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Why are you speaking against me? And why are you trying to test whether Yahweh is able to give you what you need?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
17:3 cz24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion לָ֤מָּה זֶּה֙ הֶעֱלִיתָ֣נוּ מִמִּצְרַ֔יִם לְהָמִ֥ית אֹתִ֛י וְאֶת־בָּנַ֥י וְאֶת־מִקְנַ֖י בַּצָּמָֽא 1 The people use this question to accuse Moses of wanting to kill them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Why did you bring us up out of Egypt? Did you bring us here to cause us and our children and animals to die because we have no water to drink?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
17:6 nspc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְפָנֶ֨יךָ 1 Here, **before your face** means “in front of you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:7 x5an rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מַסָּ֖ה 1 **Massah** is a place in the desert whose name means “testing” in Hebrew. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
17:7 hw7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names וּמְרִיבָ֑ה 1 **Meribah** is a place in the desert whose name means “complaining” in Hebrew. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
17:7 m55e אִם־אָֽיִן 1 In some languages it may be unnatural to explicitly have the negative option included in this question or to have it at the end. It may be omitted or relocated in the question if that is the case.
17:8 nyt1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיָּבֹ֖א עֲמָלֵ֑ק 1 A new scene begins here which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
17:8 pu7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עֲמָלֵ֑ק & יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 **Amalek** and **Israel** both refer to the nations (people groups) descended from that individual by simply using the name of the ancestor. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Amalekites … the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:8 hi3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns עֲמָלֵ֑ק & יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 **Amalek** and **Israel** are both collective nouns that refer to the nations (people groups) descended from that individual. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Amalekites … the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
17:8 srdq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants עֲמָלֵ֑ק 1 **Amalek** or the Amalekites are a completely new participant in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
17:8 rv14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בִּרְפִידִֽם 1 **Rephidim** was the name of a place in the desert. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
17:9 dscc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants יְהוֹשֻׁ֨עַ֙ 1 **Joshua** is a completely new participant in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Later he becomes a major character, but not really in the book of Exodus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
17:10 ca3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche וַיַּ֣עַשׂ יְהוֹשֻׁ֗עַ כַּאֲשֶׁ֤ר אָֽמַר־לוֹ֙ מֹשֶׁ֔ה לְהִלָּחֵ֖ם בַּעֲמָלֵ֑ק 1 **Joshua** represents himself and the Israelites that he led into battle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And, as Moses instructed, Joshua and the men he chose fought against the Amalekites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
17:10 wy51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names וְח֔וּר 1 **Hur** was the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
17:10 itcx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants וְח֔וּר 1 **Hur** is a new participant in the story, which you may need to point out in your translation. However, he is a very minor character. He only appears in this passage and once much later in the book, so you may not need to highlight him at all. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
17:11 x5ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche וְגָבַ֣ר יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל & וְגָבַ֥ר עֲמָלֵֽק 1 The words **Israel** and **Amalek** represent the fighters from those groups. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Israelite fighters were winning … the Amalekite fighters would begin to win” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
17:12 hxt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וִידֵ֤י מֹשֶׁה֙ כְּבֵדִ֔ים 1 The author writes of Moses’ arms becoming tired as if his **hands became heavy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And Moses’ arms became tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
17:12 js2p מִזֶּ֤ה אֶחָד֙ וּמִזֶּ֣ה אֶחָ֔ד 1 Alternate translation: “one on one side, and one on the other”
17:13 plp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְפִי־חָֽרֶב 1 The **sword** represents battle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in combat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:14 c5rl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מָחֹ֤ה אֶמְחֶה֙ אֶת־זֵ֣כֶר עֲמָלֵ֔ק 1 God speaks of destroying Amalek as if he were removing people’s memory of Amalek. When a group of people is completely destroyed, there is nothing to remind people about them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will completely destroy Amalek” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:14 jm77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עֲמָלֵ֔ק 1 The Amalekites are referred to by naming their ancestor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Amalekites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:14 n42j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole מִתַּ֖חַת הַשָּׁמָֽיִם 1 This phrase makes an intentionally broad image and represents all people everywhere. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from all people everywhere” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
17:15 fneg נִסִּֽי 1 A **banner** is something lifted up high, perhaps like a flag, that people can see from a distance and follow. Alternate translation: “is my military standard” or “is my guidon”
17:16 lr14 כִּֽי־יָד֙ עַל־כֵּ֣ס יָ֔הּ 1 The Hebrew here is very difficult, and there are a variety of opinions regarding the meaning. Questions include: (1) Whose hand is referred to? Amalek’s, Yahweh’s, or Moses’? (2) What is the hand on (or against)? Yahweh’s throne or banner? (3) What is the meaning of the Hebrew preposition meaning on, against, or above? What does that signify? Rebellion, or taking an oath, or holding onto a symbol of power? If there is another translation in your region, it may be best to simply follow the interpretation it gives. Alternate translation: “Because a hand was on the throne of Yah” or “Because a hand was on the banner of Yah”
17:16 sw1q מִלְחָמָ֥ה לַיהוָ֖ה בַּֽעֲמָלֵ֑ק 1 This phrase has no verbs in Hebrew. You may need to translate the noun **war** as a verb. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will make war with Amalek” or “Yahweh will war against Amalek”
18:intro t8g2 0 # Exodus 18 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-12: Jethro visits Moses and hears all that Yahweh has done\n- v. 13-27: Jethro observes Moses and advises him to set up a subsidiarity leadership structure; Moses does so\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Leadership lessons\n\nJethro taught Moses an important leadership lesson in this chapter. Many scholars look at this chapter for important leadership lessons. Moses delegated some of his responsibilities to other godly men so that he would not become worn out by all the demands made of him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties\n\n### Order of events\n\nThe timing of the events in [verse 2](../18/02.md) is not clear and, whatever their timing, may be difficult to translate. The question: Is Jethro’s **taking** Zipporah related to the past event of Moses sending her back to him at some otherwise unmentioned point in time, or is Jethro’s **taking** related to his coming to meet Moses in [verse 5](../18/05.md).\n\n### Verse 11\n\n[Verse 11](../18/11.md) is difficult in the original and requires interpretation.\n\n### God and Yahweh\n\nIn this chapter, God, who is named Yahweh in much of the rest of the book, is mostly referred to as God instead of by his name as is usual. Translations should not suggest that they are not different beings.\n\n### Kinship: Father-in-law\n\nJethro is the father of Moses’ wife. Some languages may make a distinction between that and a woman’s father-in-law. If that is the case, note it in verses: 1-2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])\n\n### Participant reference\n\nJethro is often referred to simply as the father-in-law of Moses in this chapter. He is also named explicitly (referred to by name) an unusually high number of times (it would be more usual to have more pronouns referring to him). Frequent use of his name is likely to emphasize his familial ties and authority (or honored status). Some languages may need to alter the way he is referred to for naturalness or to convey the same sense of familial ties and authority (or honored status).
18:1 nl86 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship חֹתֵ֣ן מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 The label, **father-in-law of Moses** refers to the father of the wife of Moses. If your language uses a different term for a man’s father-in-law than for a woman’s father-in-law, choose the appropriate one here. Note the use of this term also in verses: 2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. Alternate translation: “the father of the wife of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
18:2 zw6h וַיִּקַּ֗ח יִתְרוֹ֙ חֹתֵ֣ן מֹשֶׁ֔ה אֶת־צִפֹּרָ֖ה אֵ֣שֶׁת מֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 This could mean: (1) Jethro took Zipporah to Moses, or (2) Jethro had earlier welcomed back Zipporah.
18:2 chy6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אַחַ֖ר שִׁלּוּחֶֽיהָ 1 This is something Moses had done earlier. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after Moses had sent her home to her father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:3 khs1 וְאֵ֖ת שְׁנֵ֣י בָנֶ֑יהָ 1 This is the ending of the sentence that begins with the words **Jethro … took Zipporah** in [verse 2](../18/02.md). This could mean: (1) Jethro took Zipporah and her two sons to Moses, or (2) Jethro had earlier welcomed back Zipporah and her two sons.
18:3 k4mb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names גֵּֽרְשֹׁ֔ם 1 **Gershom** is a son of Moses and Zipporah; his name means “foreigner.” See [2:22](../02/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:4 xi35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֱלִיעֶ֑זֶר 1 **Eliezer** is a son of Moses and Zipporah; his name means “God is the one who helps me.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:4 z2km rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מֵחֶ֥רֶב פַּרְעֹֽה 1 The phrase **from the sword of Pharaoh** represents being killed by Pharaoh or Pharaoh’s army. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from being killed by Pharaoh” or “from being killed by Pharaoh’s army” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:5 zzab וּבָנָ֥יו 1 Alternate translation: “with his sons”
18:7 s5p2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַיִּשְׁתַּ֨חוּ֙ וַיִּשַּׁק־ל֔וֹ 1 These were symbolic acts that were the normal way that people showed great respect and devotion in that culture. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
18:8 rkq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עַ֖ל אוֹדֹ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 The word **Israel** represents the Israelite people. Alternate translation: “in order to help the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:8 a1ra rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כָּל־הַתְּלָאָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר מְצָאָ֣תַם 1 Moses writes of **hardships** happening to them as if hardships had discovered where they were. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the hardships that had happened to them” or “how they had many hard experiences” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:9 wp1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִיַּ֥ד מִצְרָֽיִם 1 The hand represents the power of someone to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians were doing to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:10 nrv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִיַּ֥ד מִצְרַ֖יִם וּמִיַּ֣ד פַּרְעֹ֑ה & מִתַּ֖חַת יַד־מִצְרָֽיִם 1 The hand represents the power of someone to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians and from the power of Pharaoh … from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians and Pharaoh were doing to you … from what the Egyptians were doing to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:11 kmk7 כִּ֣י בַדָּבָ֔ר 1 Here, **because of the matter** probably refers back to Yahweh’s rescue of Israel. Alternate translation: “because of what he did”
18:11 ljj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר זָד֖וּ עֲלֵיהֶֽם 1 The most natural referent for **they** is **the gods**, who, perhaps through their agents (Pharaoh and the Egyptians), fought against Yahweh and oppressed the Israelites (**them**). This would connect back to [Exodus 12:12](../12/12.md) where Yahweh declares that he is bringing judgment on the gods of Egypt. You may need to make some part of this explicit. Alternate translation: “in which they proudly fought Yahweh by oppressing Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:12 voi9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֥י הָאֱלֹהִֽים 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of God. In this case it likely means that this was a worship event. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:13 ni2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיְהִי֙ מִֽמָּחֳרָ֔ת 1 A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
18:13 ano2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַיֵּ֥שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֖ה לִשְׁפֹּ֣ט 1 Sitting was symbolic of having a position of authority. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses sat down as a judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
18:14 bax5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מָֽה־הַדָּבָ֤ר הַזֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר אַתָּ֤ה עֹשֶׂה֙ לָעָ֔ם 1 Jethro uses this question to show Moses that what he was doing was not good. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be doing all of this for the people!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
18:14 b5wj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מַדּ֗וּעַ אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְבַדֶּ֔ךָ וְכָל־הָעָ֛ם נִצָּ֥ב עָלֶ֖יךָ מִן־בֹּ֥קֶר עַד־עָֽרֶב 1 Jethro used this question to show Moses that he was doing too much. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Why are you doing all this for the people? Why are you doing this by yourself, and why are all the people standing around you from morning until evening, asking you to make decisions for them?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
18:14 cfd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְבַדֶּ֔ךָ 1 The word **sit** here is a metonym for “judge.” Judges would sit while they listened to people’s complaints. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “do you judge alone” or “are you the only one who judges the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:14 tiqs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit נִצָּ֥ב עָלֶ֖יךָ 1 The people came to be near Moses so that they could get a chance for him to hear their petitions. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “petition you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:18 jtd2 נָבֹ֣ל תִּבֹּ֔ל 1 Alternate translation: “You will surely make yourself very tired”
18:18 h91b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כָבֵ֤ד מִמְּךָ֙ 1 Jethro speaks of the hard work that Moses is doing as if it were a physical burden that Moses was carrying. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is too hard for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:19 pug7 אִיעָ֣צְךָ֔ 1 Alternate translation: “I will guide you” or “I will instruct you”
18:19 v8i9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וִיהִ֥י אֱלֹהִ֖ים עִמָּ֑ךְ 1 Jethro speaks of God helping Moses as if God would be with Moses. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God will help you” or “God will give you wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:19 w4r8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְהֵבֵאתָ֥ אַתָּ֛ה אֶת־הַדְּבָרִ֖ים אֶל־הָאֱלֹהִֽים 1 Jethro speaks of Moses telling God about their disputes as if they were something that Moses was bringing to God. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and you tell God about their disputes” or and “you tell God what they are arguing about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:20 w3vf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְהוֹדַעְתָּ֣ לָהֶ֗ם אֶת־הַדֶּ֨רֶךְ֙ יֵ֣לְכוּ בָ֔הּ 1 Jethro speaks of living or behaving like walking. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You must show them how to live” or “You must show them how to behave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:21 p5ap וְאַתָּ֣ה תֶחֱזֶ֣ה 1 Alternate translation: “As for you, search out” or “You must also search out”
18:21 n936 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְשַׂמְתָּ֣ עֲלֵהֶ֗ם 1 Jethro speaks of giving them authority over people as putting them over people. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You should select leaders for the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:21 xprc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns וְשַׂמְתָּ֣ עֲלֵהֶ֗ם 1 Here, **them** refers to the Israelites. Moses is advised to place good men in charge of groups of Israelites. Alternate translation: “And you must appoint these men over the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
18:21 d2hv rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שָׂרֵ֤י אֲלָפִים֙ שָׂרֵ֣י מֵא֔וֹת שָׂרֵ֥י חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים וְשָׂרֵ֥י עֲשָׂרֹֽת 1 This could mean: (1) these numbers represent the exact amount of people in each group. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of groups of 1,000 people, groups of 100 people, groups of 50 people, and groups of 10 people” or (2) these numbers are not exact, but represent groups of people of various sizes. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of very small groups, small groups, large groups, and very large groups” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
18:22 y5n2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כָּל־הַדָּבָ֤ר הַגָּדֹל֙ יָבִ֣יאוּ אֵלֶ֔יךָ 1 By **every great situation they will bring to you**, Jethro is recommending that the new leaders should pass the most difficult cases to Moses for him to judge them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the difficult cases they will tell you about” or “when there are difficult cases, they will tell you about them so you could judge them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:22 u42p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְהָקֵל֙ מֵֽעָלֶ֔יךָ וְנָשְׂא֖וּ אִתָּֽךְ 1 Jethro speaks of the hard work that they would do as if it were something that they would carry beside Moses and make lighter for Moses by helping him. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and lessen your work by having them do the hard work with you” or “and make your work easier by having them help you do the hard work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:23 wyq4 וְיָֽכָלְתָּ֖ עֲמֹ֑ד 1 Alternate translation: “then you will not wear yourself out”
18:23 bt5p כָּל־הָעָ֣ם הַזֶּ֔ה עַל־מְקֹמ֖וֹ יָבֹ֥א בְשָׁלֽוֹם 1 Here, getting **to their place** could mean each person’s home tent or it could mean the whole group gets to the promised land. If you cannot leave it ambiguous, it would be best to indicate something like “harmony in the camp.” Alternate translation: “all these people will live in harmony”
18:25 n2ws rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor רָאשִׁ֖ים עַל־הָעָ֑ם 1 Moses writes of the leaders of people as if they were the **head** of a body. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “leaders over the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:25 tb18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אַנְשֵׁי־חַ֨יִל֙ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, what sort of ability they had can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “men who were able to lead” or “men who were able to judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:25 iqn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שָׂרֵ֤י אֲלָפִים֙ שָׂרֵ֣י מֵא֔וֹת שָׂרֵ֥י חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים וְשָׂרֵ֥י עֲשָׂרֹֽת 1 This could mean: (1) these numbers represent the exact amount of people in each group. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of groups of 1,000 people, groups of 100 people, groups of 50 people, and groups of 10 people” or (2) these numbers are not exact, but represent groups of people of various sizes. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of very small groups, small groups, large groups, and very large groups” See how you translated this in [Exodus 18:21](../18/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
18:26 abx4 וְשָׁפְט֥וּ אֶת־הָעָ֖ם בְּכָל־עֵ֑ת 1 Alternate translation: “They judged the people most of the time” or “They judged the people in all regular circumstances”
18:26 z7j4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֶת־הַדָּבָ֤ר הַקָּשֶׁה֙ יְבִיא֣וּן אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 The author writes of telling Moses about the difficult cases as bringing him the difficult cases. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They told Moses about the difficult cases” or “When there were difficult cases, they told Moses about them so that he would judge them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
19:intro ck7e 0 # Exodus 19 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter consist of a series of Moses going up Mount Sinai, talking to Yahweh, coming down, and talking to the people. He is being the intermediary, carrying messages between Yahweh and the people.\n- v. 1-2: Arrival at Sinai\n- v. 3-8: First cycle of Moses going up and down for instruction and response\n- v. 9-15: Second cycle, people get ready to hear God\n- v. 16-19: God speaks to the people from the mountain\n- v. 20-25: Third cycle\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “A kingdom of priests”\n\nThe function of the priests was to intercede for the people. The Levites were the only priests in Israel; this is a metaphor indicating that the nation was to intercede for the world as a whole. They were also to be holy, or set apart, from the rest of the world. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### Revealing the law\n\nThe events of this chapter are concerned with preparing the people to receive the law of Moses. The people go through all of this to prepare themselves for the law, which shows the great importance of this event for Israel. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### Boundaries between Yahweh and the people\n\nMoses is told to make the people holy in preparation for meeting Yahweh, then boundaries are set up to keep the people separate from Yahweh, and then the priests are told to make themselves holy. The theme of a holy separation is beginning to be developed that will become much of the law code.
19:1 r5tj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּחֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ הַשְּׁלִישִׁ֔י & בַּיּ֣וֹם הַזֶּ֔ה 1 This means they arrived at the wilderness on the first day of the month just as they left Egypt on the first day of the month. The first day of the third month on the Hebrew calendar is near the middle of May on Western calendars. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “In the month 3 … on the day 1 of the month” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
19:2 nk51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מֵרְפִידִ֗ים 1 **Rephidim** is an area on the edge of the wilderness of Sinai where the people of Israel had been camping. See how you translated this name in [Exodus 17:1](../17/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
19:3 kgev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism תֹאמַר֙ לְבֵ֣ית יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְתַגֵּ֖יד לִבְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 These two phrases have exactly the same meaning. This may be for poetic effect, as Yahweh’s statement here through [verse 6](../19/06.md) is somewhat artfully crafted. You may need to use a strategy other than parallelism to achieve a similar poetic effect in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
19:4 z9i6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual אַתֶּ֣ם רְאִיתֶ֔ם 1 The word **you** here refers to the Israelites. Yahweh is telling Moses what to tell the Israelites. If your language has a plural form of you, you would need it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
19:4 b7ph rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וָאֶשָּׂ֤א אֶתְכֶם֙ עַל־כַּנְפֵ֣י נְשָׁרִ֔ים 1 God speaks of caring for his people while they traveled as if he were an eagle and carried them on his **wings**. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how I helped you travel like an eagle that carries her babies on her wings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
19:5 c767 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּקֹלִ֔י 1 God’s voice represents what he says. Alternate translation: “to what I say” or “to my words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:5 fh8e וּשְׁמַרְתֶּ֖ם אֶת־בְּרִיתִ֑י 1 Alternate translation: “and do what my covenant requires you to do”
19:6 gm9s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לִ֛י מַמְלֶ֥כֶת כֹּהֲנִ֖ים 1 God speaks of his people as if they were **priests**. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my kingdom of people who are like priests” or “my kingdom of people who do what priests do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
19:7 c5tq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיָּ֣שֶׂם לִפְנֵיהֶ֗ם אֵ֚ת כָּל־הַדְּבָרִ֣ים הָאֵ֔לֶּה 1 Moses setting the words before them means that he was telling people things. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And he told them all these words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
19:7 xjbb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵיהֶ֗ם 1 Here, **face** means the person. Alternate translation: “before them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:7 zqk1 כָּל־הַדְּבָרִ֣ים הָאֵ֔לֶּה אֲשֶׁ֥ר צִוָּ֖הוּ יְהוָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “all that Yahweh had commanded him”
19:8 ljf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַיָּ֧שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֛ה אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָעָ֖ם 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, where Moses went can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses went back up the mountain to report the words of the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19:8 rwx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָעָ֖ם 1 Here, **words** refers to what the people said. Alternate translation: “what the people said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:9 ih2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָעָ֖ם 1 Here, **words** refers to what the people said. Alternate translation: “what the people said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:10 ie7y וְקִדַּשְׁתָּ֥ם 1 This may mean instruct the people, or it may mean Moses will have a role as well. Alternate translation: “and tell them to dedicate themselves to me” or “and help them to purify themselves for me”
19:11 tdg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְעֵינֵ֥י 1 Here, **before the eyes** means “so they can see.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:12 d48p וְהִגְבַּלְתָּ֤ 1 The **boundary** was either a mark or some kind of barrier.
19:12 hhv5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes לֵאמֹ֔ר הִשָּׁמְר֥וּ לָכֶ֛ם 1 A second-level direct quotation begins with **watch**. It is not clear where this command that Moses is to give the Israelites ends. Most English translations end it in [verse 13](../19/13.md) before the last sentence. For that reason, it may be most helpful to translate the instruction as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them to watch themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
19:12 xct0 הִשָּׁמְר֥וּ לָכֶ֛ם עֲל֥וֹת בָּהָ֖ר וּנְגֹ֣עַ בְּקָצֵ֑הוּ 1 Here, the negative command is implied from the **watch yourselves** command. Alternate translation: “Watch yourselves against climbing on the mountain or touching on its edge”
19:12 kis1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָּל־הַנֹּגֵ֥עַ בָּהָ֖ר מ֥וֹת 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must surely put to death any person who touches the mountain” or “You must surely kill anyone who touches the mountain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
19:13 l9ak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לֹא־תִגַּ֨ע בּ֜וֹ יָ֗ד 1 Here, **hand** is a metonym for any part of a person. Alternate translation: “No person shall touch that one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:13 k35k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive סָק֤וֹל יִסָּקֵל֙ אוֹ־יָרֹ֣ה יִיָּרֶ֔ה 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly stone or shoot him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
19:13 vw19 יָרֹ֣ה יִיָּרֶ֔ה 1 This refers to being killed by someone who shoots arrows from a bow.
19:13 ezpm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go יַעֲל֥וּ 1 If you translate this with come or go, consider which would be the correct perspective for your language and the text context. Yahweh is speaking, so “come up” is valid; however, the people will be the ones moving, so “go up” is valid as well. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
19:15 bw2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism אַֽל־תִּגְּשׁ֖וּ אֶל־אִשָּֽׁה 1 This is a polite way of talking about sexual relations. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “do not sleep with your wives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
19:15 z0aq אִשָּֽׁה 1 This word means both “woman” and “wife.” Context dictates the correct translation. Since wife would make it a narrower command, **woman** was chosen here.
19:18 a8p7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile כְּעֶ֣שֶׁן הַכִּבְשָׁ֔ן 1 This shows that it was a very large amount of smoke. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “like the smoke from a very large fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
19:19 m8ae הוֹלֵ֖ךְ וְחָזֵ֣ק מְאֹ֑ד 1 Alternate translation: “continued to become louder and louder”
19:19 f5e6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְקֽוֹל 1 The word **voice** here refers to a sound that God made. This could mean: (1) “by speaking loudly like thunder” or (2) “by speaking” or (3) “by causing thunder to sound” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:20 zx5p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go וַיֵּ֧רֶד & וַיַּ֥עַל 1 You may need to consider your language’s rules for perspective regarding going or coming up or down in this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
19:21 d2qm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor פֶּן־יֶהֶרְס֤וּ 1 God spoke about walking past the boundary as if they might break down a barrier and walk through it. See how you translated “set bounds” in [Exodus 19:12](../19/12.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not to go beyond the boundary” or “not to go through the barrier” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
19:21 oht2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism וְנָפַ֥ל 1 Here, **fall** refers to dying. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
19:22 pq8j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor יִפְרֹ֥ץ בָּהֶ֖ם יְהוָֽה 1 Yahweh’s anger and judgment are pictured as something that will **burst** through a boundary. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yahweh kills them in anger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
19:23 gagp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes בָּ֨נוּ֙ לֵאמֹ֔ר הַגְבֵּ֥ל אֶת־הָהָ֖ר וְקִדַּשְׁתּֽוֹ 1 This quoted command could be translated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “us to set boundaries on the mountain to keep it separate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
19:24 bk6p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אַל־יֶֽהֶרְס֛וּ 1 God spoke about walking past the boundary as if they might **break** down a barrier and walk through it. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 19:21](../19/21.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “must not go beyond the boundary” or “must not go through the barrier” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
19:24 p1yq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor יִפְרָץ־בָּֽם 1 Yahweh’s anger and judgment are pictured as something that will **burst** forth from him. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 19:22](../19/22.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he kill them in anger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:intro x7vt 0 # Exodus 20 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-17: Yahweh gives the Ten Commandments\n- v. 18-21: the people react\n- v. 22-26: Yahweh gives a little more explanation about idols and altars\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Covenant\n\nYahweh’s covenant faithfulness is now based on the covenant he made with Abraham as well as the covenant he is making with Moses. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenantfaith]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n### Form of you\n\nThe singular form of you is used in the commandments; however, the commandments applied to the whole Israelite community. There is both a singular and a corporate aspect to them. You may need to choose between singular and plural if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
20:2 qg71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבֵּ֥ית עֲבָדִֽים 1 Yahweh speaks of **Egypt** as if it were a **house** where people keep slaves. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:3](../13/03.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the place where you were slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:3 r9h3 לֹֽ֣א יִהְיֶֽה־לְךָ֛ אֱלֹהִ֥ים אֲחֵרִ֖ים עַל־פָּנָֽיַ 1 Alternate translation: “You must not worship any other gods besides me”
20:4 s7n3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism וְכָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר בַּשָּׁמַ֨יִם֙ מִמַּ֔עַל וַאֲשֶׁ֥ר בָּאָ֖רֶץ מִתָּ֑חַת וַאֲשֶׁ֥ר בַּמַּ֖יִם מִתַּ֥חַת לָאָֽרֶץ 1 This list means all created things wherever they are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nor anything that looks like anything created, whether that is in heaven above, or that is in the earth beneath, or that is in the water under the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
20:4 rkn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְכָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **likeness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “nor anything looking like something” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
20:5 ka3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns לָהֶ֖ם 1 Here, **them** refers to carved figures or idols. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
20:5 hx93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis בָּנִ֛ים עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְעַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by **sons**, therefore **third and fourth** refers to the grandchildren and great-grandchildren. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the sons down to the third and fourth generations” or “and even on the grandchildren and great-grandchildren” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
20:5 s2ia rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְעַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “to generations 3 and 4”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
20:6 u9nc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְעֹ֥שֶׂה חֶ֖סֶד לַאֲלָפִ֑ים לְאֹהֲבַ֖י 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faithfulness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I am faithful to the covenant with thousands of those who love me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
20:6 oyh7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis לַאֲלָפִ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply necessary words from the context. Alternate translation: “to the thousandth generation” or “for a thousand generations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
20:6 yw38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לַאֲלָפִ֑ים לְאֹהֲבַ֖י 1 Here, **thousands** may mean: (1) “forever,” that is, “to all descendants forever” (2) a number too many to count. Alternate translation: “for every generation” or “forever to innumerable people who love me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:7 o96b תִשָּׂ֛א & יִשָּׂ֥א 1 To **lift up**, take, or use the name of Yahweh (with emptiness, i.e. improperly) covers many sorts of speaking or invoking his name or making a claim to him or attempting to manipulate him or misrepresenting him. A broad word should be used in translation of this term.
20:7 t3k2 לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֛א אֶת־שֵֽׁם־יְהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֶ֖יךָ 1 Alternate translation: “You must not use the name of Yahweh your God”
20:7 sl6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives לֹ֤א יְנַקֶּה֙ 1 If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I will certainly consider guilty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
20:8 kwn7 לְקַדְּשֽׁוֹ 1 Alternate translation: “to make it holy to me” or “to consecrate it to me”
20:10 t1ky rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בִּשְׁעָרֶֽיךָ 1 Cities often had walls around them to keep out enemies, and gates for people to go in and out. Anyone who was inside the gates was part of the community. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “within your community” or “inside your city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:11 vw1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּיּ֣וֹם הַשְּׁבִיעִ֑י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day seven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
20:14 wyv9 לֹ֖א תִּנְאָֽף 1 Alternate translation: “You must not have sex with anyone other than your spouse”
20:16 zix8 לֹֽא־תַעֲנֶ֥ה בְרֵעֲךָ֖ עֵ֥ד שָֽׁקֶר 1 Alternate translation: “You must not speak a false report against your neighbor”
20:17 vt9t לֹ֥א תַחְמֹ֖ד 1 Alternate translation: “You must not strongly want to have” or “You must not want to take”
20:18 nm52 הָהָ֖ר עָשֵׁ֑ן 1 Alternate translation: “the smoky mountain”
20:18 lmt5 וַיָּנֻ֔עוּ 1 Alternate translation: “and they shook with fear”
20:20 slb8 וּבַעֲב֗וּר תִּהְיֶ֧ה יִרְאָת֛וֹ עַל־פְּנֵיכֶ֖ם לְבִלְתִּ֥י תֶחֱטָֽאוּ 1 Alternate translation: “so that you will honor him and not sin”
20:20 hocw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor תִּהְיֶ֧ה יִרְאָת֛וֹ עַל־פְּנֵיכֶ֖ם 1 Here, **fear** is spoken of as something that could be **above their faces**. This means that they would be continually thinking about honoring God. It is similar to the image in [Exodus 13:16](../13/16.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you will live always reverencing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:23 qm44 אֱלֹ֤הֵי כֶ֨סֶף֙ וֵאלֹהֵ֣י זָהָ֔ב 1 Alternate translation: “gods made out of silver or gold” or “idols made out of silver or gold”
20:24 pf1i מִזְבַּ֣ח אֲדָמָה֮ 1 The phrase **an altar of earth** means an altar made of materials from the ground, such as stone, soil, or clay.
20:24 ge89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אַזְכִּ֣יר אֶת־שְׁמִ֔י 1 Here, **name** is a metonym for God’s being. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I cause myself to be remembered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:24 zmc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אַזְכִּ֣יר אֶת־שְׁמִ֔י 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I choose for you to remember me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
20:26 qm1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְלֹֽא־תַעֲלֶ֥ה בְמַעֲלֹ֖ת עַֽל־מִזְבְּחִ֑י 1 If you need to connect this statement more explicitly to the previous statements regarding building the alter, you could add a phrase about building steps. Alternate translation: “Do not build steps up to the altar and go up to it on those steps” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:26 e28y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֛ר לֹֽא־תִגָּלֶ֥ה עֶרְוָתְךָ֖ עָלָֽיו 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you do not expose your nakedness over it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:intro dnd3 0 # Exodus 21 General Notes\n\nThis chapter begins to give the Israelite civil case law, that is, the explanation of how to apply the principles condensed in the ten commandments.\n\n## Structure:\n\n- 1: Introduction\n- 2-6: Laws regarding male slaves\n- 7-11: Laws regarding female slaves\n- 12-17: Capital crimes\n- 18-36: Liability laws\n * 18-27: Regarding human violence\n * 28-36: Regarding damage done by or to animals\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n### Hypothetical situations\n\nThroughout the case law, a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if.” It is followed by a description of the situation; then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will have these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).\n\n### Passive construction\n\nMany portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]].\n\n### Daughters sold as servants\n\nThe section from [verses 7-11](../21/07.md) may be somewhat confusing because a daughter that is sold as a servant is seamlessly connected to her becoming someone’s wife. It seems the two things could be closely related.\n\n### Ransom payment\n\nIn [verse 30](../21/30.md) a man whose bull killed someone may evade the death penalty by paying a ransom price, but the conditions for that happening are not clear.
21:1 xxf4 you must set before them 0 Yahweh continues speaking to Moses. There is no quote break between chapters.
21:1 hhf7 תָּשִׂ֖ים 1 Alternate translation: “you must give” or “you must tell”
21:1 ddql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵיהֶֽם 1 Here, **faces** represents the presence of the nation. Alternate translation: “before them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:2 di5z General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nHere Yahweh begins telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.
21:2 wj0e rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical כִּ֤י תִקְנֶה֙ עֶ֣בֶד עִבְרִ֔י 1 # General Information:\n\nThis is the first of many hypothetical situations, introduced by “when” or **if,** which you will encounter over the next several chapters. See the [introduction to chapter 21](../21/intro.md). You will need to translate these consistently in a manner that expresses that these situations have not happened. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
21:3 ln3r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אִם־בְּגַפּ֥וֹ יָבֹ֖א בְּגַפּ֣וֹ יֵצֵ֑א 1 What **by himself** means can be stated clearly. Some languages require that the additional condition, that he marries while a slave, be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “If he became a slave while he had no wife, and if he marries while he is a slave, the master need only free the man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:3 pfn3 בְּגַפּ֥וֹ & בְּגַפּ֣וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “alone” or “without a wife”
21:3 e467 אִם־בַּ֤עַל אִשָּׁה֙ ה֔וּא 1 Alternate translation: “if he was married when he became a slave” or “if he came as a married man”
21:5 jqh4 לֹ֥א אֵצֵ֖א חָפְשִֽׁי 1 Alternate translation: “I do not want my master to set me free”
21:6 vnjk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy הָ֣אֱלֹהִ֔ים 1 The word for **God** at its most literal means “great ones.” Here it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. Texts other than the standard Hebrew text support this reading. See [Exodus 22:8-9](../22/08.md) for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:6 z8x1 וְרָצַ֨ע & אֶת־אָזְנוֹ֙ 1 Alternate translation: “and … will put a hole in his ear”
21:6 xpd3 בַּמַּרְצֵ֔עַ 1 An **awl** is a pointed tool used to make a hole
21:6 k6ev לְעֹלָֽם 1 Alternate translation: “until the end of his life” or “until he dies”
21:8 lpqh has designated 0 This verse is the first of three possible situations between a master and his female slave.
21:8 t2zf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְהֶפְדָּ֑הּ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “then he must allow her father to buy her back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:8 h7f7 בְּבִגְדוֹ־בָֽהּ 1 Alternate translation: “since he has deceived her”
21:9 h9ni he has treated her deceitfully 0 This verse is the second of three possible situations between a master and his female slave.
21:9 w99z לִבְנ֖וֹ יִֽיעָדֶ֑נָּה 1 Alternate translation: “he decides that she is the one who will be his son’s wife”
21:9 suz0 כְּמִשְׁפַּ֥ט הַבָּנ֖וֹת יַעֲשֶׂה־לָּֽהּ 1 Alternate translation: “he must do to her according to the manner in which daughters are customarily treated”
21:10 i0xh designates her as a wife for his son 0 This verse and the next are the third of three possible situations between a master and his female slave.
21:10 rxk4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives שְׁאֵרָ֛הּ כְּסוּתָ֥הּ וְעֹנָתָ֖הּ לֹ֥א יִגְרָֽע 1 If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he must give the first wife the same food, clothing, and marital rights she had before” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
21:10 np9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism וְעֹנָתָ֖הּ 1 This term only occurs here in the Bible. It probably means things that a husband must do for his wife. Most commentators believe it specifically means having sexual relations with her, possibly so that she can bear children. Alternate translation: “or her right to intimacy” or “or her childbearing rights” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
21:12 su6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly execute that person” or “you must certainly kill that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:13 h4ka וַאֲשֶׁר֙ לֹ֣א צָדָ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “But if he did not plan to do it” or “But if he did not do it on purpose”
21:13 gme9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְשַׂמְתִּ֤י לְךָ֙ מָק֔וֹם אֲשֶׁ֥ר יָנ֖וּס שָֽׁמָּה 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the purpose for choosing a place explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will choose a place to which he can run away to be safe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:15 y3hd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּמַכֵּ֥ה אָבִ֛יו וְאִמּ֖וֹ מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If anyone hits his father or mother, you must surely put him to death” or “You must surely kill anyone who hits his father or mother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:16 iu81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must kill that kidnapper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:17 h8qf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּמְקַלֵּ֥ל אָבִ֛יו וְאִמּ֖וֹ מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must surely kill anyone who curses his father or his mother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:17 kvbc וּמְקַלֵּ֥ל 1 The word translated **acts contemptuously** means the opposite of “honor” (as in the commandment to honor one’s parents). Alternate translation: “Whoever acts dishonorably toward”
21:19 tv0z וְנִקָּ֣ה 1 Alternate translation: “then … is innocent”
21:19 xg6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שִׁבְתּ֛וֹ 1 This refers to a situation when someone cannot work to earn money. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the time he could not work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:19 ws14 וְרַפֹּ֥א יְרַפֵּֽא 1 Alternate translation: “and for his medical costs” or “and for his costs for healing”
21:20 te41 תַּ֣חַת יָד֑וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “because of the injury” or “because the master hit him”
21:20 h4eg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive נָקֹ֖ם יִנָּקֵֽם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly punish that man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:21 r65u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כִּ֥י כַסְפּ֖וֹ הֽוּא 1 A common view is that the loss of the valuable property, the slave, is itself a punishment. It may be that the master loses the slave for a time and also has to pay for his healing, or it may be that the slave dies after a few days. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that the servant was valuable to his master explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he has already lost his servant who was valuable to him” or “because he has already lost his servant’s work for a time and had to pay for his healing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:22 a6av וְיָצְא֣וּ יְלָדֶ֔יהָ וְלֹ֥א יִהְיֶ֖ה אָס֑וֹן 1 It is not clear in the passage what happens to the child. The text is simply as in the ULT. Some have taken it to mean that the child dies because of premature birth, and the **serious injury** only relates to the woman. In this case, a fine is imposed for the loss of the child. However, the text could also mean that the child is born safely. A fine is still imposed because of the great danger to the two lives. Then the next few verses give consequences for any injury either to mother or child.
21:22 cn4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive עָנ֣וֹשׁ יֵעָנֵ֗שׁ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly fine the guilty man” or “the guilty man must pay a fine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:22 v5ye בִּפְלִלִֽים 1 Alternate translation: “what the judges decide”
21:23 ya82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְנָתַתָּ֥ה נֶ֖פֶשׁ תַּ֥חַת נָֽפֶשׁ 1 This means that if someone is hurt, the person who caused the hurt must be hurt in the same way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you must take the killer’s life for the murdered person’s life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:24 c5bq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit עַ֚יִן תַּ֣חַת עַ֔יִן 1 This means that if someone is hurt, the person who caused the hurt must be hurt in the same way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the striker’s eye for the injured person’s eye” (and repeated in like manner for each example throughout this and the next verse) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:26 i8cg אִ֜ישׁ 1 Here, **man** refers to the owner of a slave.
21:28 sp6w יִגַּ֨ח שׁ֥וֹר 1 Alternate translation: “an ox injures with its horns”
21:28 qk3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive סָק֨וֹל יִסָּקֵ֜ל הַשּׁ֗וֹר 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely stone the ox to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:28 q2gv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְלֹ֤א יֵאָכֵל֙ אֶת־בְּשָׂר֔וֹ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and you must not eat its flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:29 zgll rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְהוּעַ֤ד בִּבְעָלָיו֙ וְלֹ֣א יִשְׁמְרֶ֔נּוּ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state **its owner was warned** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and someone warned its owner but he did not keep it in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:29 x2y0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְהוּעַ֤ד בִּבְעָלָיו֙ וְלֹ֣א יִשְׁמְרֶ֔נּוּ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the content of the warning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and its owner was warned that it gores but he did not keep it in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:29 nzn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְגַם־בְּעָלָ֖יו יוּמָֽת 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and you must also kill its owner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:30 t5rs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אִם־כֹּ֖פֶר יוּשַׁ֣ת עָלָ֑יו וְנָתַן֙ פִּדְיֹ֣ן נַפְשׁ֔וֹ כְּכֹ֥ל אֲשֶׁר־יוּשַׁ֖ת עָלָֽיו 1 The text does not specify who will impose a ransom on the ox’s owner. Since other texts indicate that justice is retributive and performed by the dead person’s family, that is one option. Another option is that the judges will impose it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express one of these explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:30 py37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אִם־כֹּ֖פֶר יוּשַׁ֣ת עָלָ֑יו & יוּשַׁ֖ת עָלָֽיו 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. However, you must make a decision regarding who is imposing the ransom or use an unspecified pronoun, if that is possible in your language (this second option would not make sense in English). Alternate translation: “If the judges impose a ransom on him … they impose on him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:31 kg25 יִגָּ֖ח & יִגָּ֑ח 1 Alternate translation: “it injures with its horns … it injures with its horns”
21:31 to8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns לּֽוֹ 1 Here, **him** probably refers to the ox’s owner. Alternate translation: “to the owner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:32 qzv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney כֶּ֣סֶף׀ שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים שְׁקָלִ֗ים 1 In ancient times, a silver shekel weighed about 11 grams or about a third of an ounce. You could try to express the equivalent in terms of modern money values, but if you did, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. Instead, you could say something general like “30 silver coins” or give the equivalent weight or use the biblical term in the text and explain the weight in a footnote. Alternate translation: “330 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
21:32 qy0g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אִם־עֶ֛בֶד יִגַּ֥ח הַשּׁ֖וֹר 1 Because they are to kill the ox, the slave must have died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If an ox kills a male servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:32 wm9a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְהַשּׁ֖וֹר יִסָּקֵֽל 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must kill the ox by stoning it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:33 fd4p יִפְתַּ֨ח & בּ֗וֹר 1 Alternate translation: “uncovers a hole in the ground” or “takes a cover off a hole in the ground”
21:34 b48a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כֶּ֖סֶף יָשִׁ֣יב לִבְעָלָ֑יו 1 The owner must be paid for the loss of his animal. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he must pay the owner for the dead animal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:34 ip1n יְשַׁלֵּ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “must make restitution”
21:34 j8qz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְהַמֵּ֖ת יִֽהְיֶה־לּֽוֹ 1 The one who paid for the loss of the animal will become the owner of the dead animal and can do what he wants with it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the dead animal will belong to the owner of the pit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:35 z9ug וְחָצ֣וּ אֶת־כַּסְפּ֔וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “and divide the money” or “and divide the money they receive”
21:36 fkx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive א֣וֹ נוֹדַ֗ע 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:36 v64b נַגָּ֥ח הוּא֙ מִתְּמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “the ox had gored other animals before”
21:36 ix8h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְלֹ֥א יִשְׁמְרֶ֖נּוּ בְּעָלָ֑יו 1 This means that the owner did not keep his ox safely where it could not wander to hurt other animals. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and its owner did not keep it inside a fence” or “and its owner did not tie it securely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:36 dcv2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שַׁלֵּ֨ם יְשַׁלֵּ֥ם שׁוֹר֙ תַּ֣חַת הַשּׁ֔וֹר 1 The owner of the ox that killed must give an ox to the man who lost his ox. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the owner of the ox that killed must surely give a living ox to the owner of the ox that died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:intro f9vb 0 # Exodus 22 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\nThis chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. We will not attempt to provide an outline since almost every verse is about a different case.\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n### Hypothetical situations\n\nThroughout the case law a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if.” Then there is a description of the situation, and then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will contain these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).\n\n### Passive construction\n\nMany portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]].
22:1 syx5 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.
22:1 onm0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical כִּ֤י יִגְנֹֽב־אִישׁ֙ שׁ֣וֹר אוֹ־שֶׂ֔ה וּטְבָח֖וֹ א֣וֹ מְכָר֑וֹ 1 # General Information:\n\nThis is the first of many hypothetical situations in this chapter, introduced by “when” or **if,** which you will encounter over the next several chapters. See the [introduction](../22/intro.md). You will need to translate these consistently in a manner that expresses that these situations have not actually happened. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
22:1 bc03 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה & וְאַרְבַּע 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “5 … and 4” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
22:2 mt43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אִם־בַּמַּחְתֶּ֛רֶת יִמָּצֵ֥א הַגַּנָּ֖ב 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If anyone finds a thief while he is breaking in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:2 e98x בַּמַּחְתֶּ֛רֶת 1 Alternate translation: “while using force to enter a house”
22:2 gt5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְהֻכָּ֣ה וָמֵ֑ת 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if anyone strikes the thief so that he dies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:2 fq57 אֵ֥ין ל֖וֹ דָּמִֽים 1 Alternate translation: “no one will be guilty of murdering him”
22:3 vym5 אִם־זָרְחָ֥ה הַשֶּׁ֛מֶשׁ עָלָ֖יו 1 Alternate translation: “But if it is light before he breaks in” or “But if he breaks in and it is after sunrise”
22:3 c5yl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְנִמְכַּ֖ר בִּגְנֵבָתֽוֹ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must sell him as a slave in order to pay for what he stole” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:4 k926 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אִֽם־הִמָּצֵא֩ תִמָּצֵ֨א בְיָד֜וֹ הַגְּנֵבָ֗ה & חַיִּ֑ים 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If they find that he still has the live animal that he stole” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:4 g5kg שְׁנַ֖יִם יְשַׁלֵּֽם 1 The meaning of **compensate double** is not entirely clear. Most interpretations follow the UST, that is, two animals total must be given, the stolen one and one more. Some interpret double to mean the thief must pay two animals for every animal that he took, so three total. It would be best to leave double as ambiguous as possible. Alternate translation: “he must compensate twice what he stole”
22:5 j24t יַבְעֶר & וּבִעֵ֖ר 1 Alternate translation: “causes to eat plants … and it eats plants”
22:5 nlxc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns בְּעִיר֔וֹ 1 **Livestock** is a collective singular noun that could refer to cows, goats, sheep, or basically any domesticated animals. In some languages you will need to translate it as a plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
22:5 jrb3 יְשַׁלֵּֽם 1 Alternate translation: “he must pay back the owner of that field”
22:6 x6aj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כִּֽי־תֵצֵ֨א אֵ֜שׁ וּמָצְאָ֤ה קֹצִים֙ וְנֶאֱכַ֣ל 1 Here, **breaks out** and **consumes** can be stated in active form or in another way that is natural in your language if your language does not use the passive form in this way. Alternate translation: “If someone starts a fire, and it spreads in thorns, and it consumes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:6 i4ma וּמָצְאָ֤ה קֹצִים֙ 1 Alternate translation: “and moves along the ground through dry plants”
22:6 u1pa rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown גָּדִ֔ישׁ 1 This is grain that has been cut and tied in bundles. Alternate translation: “bundled grain” or “harvested grain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
22:6 r2cf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַקָּמָ֖ה 1 This is grain that has not been cut, but it is ready to be harvested. Alternate translation: “the grain still growing in the field” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
22:7 jw3v לִשְׁמֹ֔ר 1 Alternate translation: “to watch over it” or “to keep it safe”
22:7 na9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְגֻנַּ֖ב 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone steals it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:7 x2sh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אִם־יִמָּצֵ֥א הַגַּנָּ֖ב 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if you find the thief” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:8 lwg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אִם־לֹ֤א יִמָּצֵא֙ הַגַּנָּ֔ב וְנִקְרַ֥ב בַּֽעַל־הַבַּ֖יִת אֶל־הָֽאֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 You may need to translate these in an active voice if your language does not use passive in this way. Alternate translation: “If no one finds the thief, bring the owner of the house to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:8 c812 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy הָֽאֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 The word for **God** at its most literal means “great ones.” Here and in the [next verse](../22/09.md) it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. See [Exodus 21:6](../21/06.md) for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:8 f774 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom שָׁלַ֛ח יָד֖וֹ בִּמְלֶ֥אכֶת רֵעֵֽהוּ 1 This is an idiom for stealing. If you have a way of saying this in your language, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “he has stolen his neighbor’s property” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
22:9 p7ab דְּבַר & דְּבַר 1 Alternate translation: “dispute of … the dispute of”
22:9 fgz1 כִּי־ה֣וּא זֶ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “This is mine” or “This is my missing property”
22:9 m31k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy הָֽאֱלֹהִ֔ים & אֱלֹהִ֔ים 1 The word used here for **God**, at its most literal, means “great ones.” Here and in the [previous verse](../22/08.md) it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. See [Exodus 21:6](../21/06.md) for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:10 h7ms rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive נִשְׁבַּ֥ר אוֹ־נִשְׁבָּ֖ה 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:10 hzow נִשְׁבָּ֖ה 1 Here, **carried away** means that it is not a thief but a wild animal that takes the ox or sheep away (to eat it). See [verse 12](../22/12.md) for cases where the animal is stolen while in another’s care.
22:11 gl7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive שְׁבֻעַ֣ת יְהוָ֗ה תִּהְיֶה֙ בֵּ֣ין שְׁנֵיהֶ֔ם & וְלָקַ֥ח בְּעָלָ֖יו 1 Only the man who is accused of stealing the animal must swear the oath. The owner of the lost animal must accept the oath that has been sworn. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the man who was caring for the animal must swear an oath before Yahweh … and the owner must accept that oath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:12 yw3w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְאִם־גָּנֹ֥ב יִגָּנֵ֖ב מֵעִמּ֑וֹ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But if someone stole the animal from him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:13 b313 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אִם־טָרֹ֥ף יִטָּרֵ֖ף 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But if a wild beast tore the animal in pieces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:14 h8yw שַׁלֵּ֥ם יְשַׁלֵּֽם 1 Alternate translation: “must certainly repay with another animal” or “must certainly pay the owner for the animal”
22:14 wu3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְנִשְׁבַּ֣ר אוֹ־מֵ֑ת 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled in the UST.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:15 g3zw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אִם־שָׂכִ֣יר 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone rented the animal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:15 r792 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בָּ֖א בִּשְׂכָרֽוֹ 1 The one who borrowed the animal will not have to pay the owner anything more than the hiring or rental fee. This fee will pay for the loss of the animal. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the money that someone paid to rent the animal will cover the loss of the animal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:15 f9w9 בִּשְׂכָרֽוֹ 1 Alternate translation: “for its rental fee” or “for the money paid to rent the animal”
22:16 a8s8 וְכִֽי־יְפַתֶּ֣ה אִ֗ישׁ בְּתוּלָ֛ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־אֹרָ֖שָׂה 1 Alternate translation: “If a man persuades a virgin who is not engaged that she wants to lie with him”
22:16 th2m לֹא־אֹרָ֖שָׂה 1 Alternate translation: “not promised to be married”
22:16 g24h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism וְשָׁכַ֣ב 1 Lying with someone refers to having sex. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “if he has sex with her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
22:16 x33y מָהֹ֛ר יִמְהָרֶ֥נָּה 1 The **bride price** was money paid to the family to compensate for the loss of their daughter.
22:17 y2xz rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ל֑וֹ & יִשְׁקֹ֔ל 1 Here, **him** and **he** refer back to the man who seduced the virgin. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
22:19 y3qy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism כָּל־שֹׁכֵ֥ב עִם־בְּהֵמָ֖ה 1 This refers to sexual relations. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “Whoever has sexual relations with an animal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
22:19 b807 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָּל־שֹׁכֵ֥ב עִם־בְּהֵמָ֖ה מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state **be put to death** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must surely execute whoever lies with an animal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:20 n4nh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive יָֽחֳרָ֑ם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation (placed at the beginning of the sentence): “You must completely destroy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:21 kr35 לֹא־תוֹנֶ֖ה 1 Alternate translation: “You must not mistreat” or “You must not cheat”
22:21 eoa5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כִּֽי־גֵרִ֥ים הֱיִיתֶ֖ם בְּאֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 The Israelites are called to remember their previous condition, that they lived as foreign guests in Egypt. They came first to avoid the famine in Jacob and Joseph’s time and were dependent on Egyptian hospitality. Later they were wronged and oppressed, and they are not to do that to those who sojourn with them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for you were wronged and oppressed as sojourners in the land of Egypt” or “for you also depended on hospitality while you lived as sojourners in Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:22 djh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives כָּל־אַלְמָנָ֥ה וְיָת֖וֹם לֹ֥א תְעַנּֽוּן׃ 1 If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You must treat all widows and fatherless children fairly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
22:22 l2ih וְיָת֖וֹם 1 Alternate translation: “or child with no parents”
22:24 zszz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְחָרָ֣ה אַפִּ֔י 1 This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh will be angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and I will became very angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
22:24 sx9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בֶּחָ֑רֶב 1 To be killed **with the sword** is a metonym that means a person will die violently, perhaps while fighting in a war. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “violently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:25 v5je כְּנֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “like one who lends money”
22:25 g3ry לֹֽא־תְשִׂימ֥וּן עָלָ֖יו נֶֽשֶׁךְ 1 Alternate translation: “you must not charge him extra money for borrowing” or “you must not charge him extra money for the loan”
22:27 wi2m כְסוּתוֹ֙ לְבַדָּ֔הּ 1 Alternate translation: “is his only coat” or “is his only garment to keep him warm”
22:27 x7zb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion בַּמֶּ֣ה יִשְׁכָּ֔ב 1 This question adds emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He will have nothing to wear while he sleeps!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
22:28 eel2 אֱלֹהִ֖ים לֹ֣א תְקַלֵּ֑ל 1 Alternate translation: “Do not insult God” or “Do not speak evil about God”
22:28 tdj6 וְנָשִׂ֥יא בְעַמְּךָ֖ לֹ֥א תָאֹֽר 1 Alternate translation: “and do not ask God to do bad things to your ruler”
22:29 p8nk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives לֹ֣א תְאַחֵ֑ר 1 If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You must bring all of your offerings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
22:30 m4wq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּיּ֥וֹם הַשְּׁמִינִ֖י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 8” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
22:31 jjhn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְאַנְשֵׁי־קֹ֖דֶשׁ תִּהְי֣וּן לִ֑י 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “And you shall be holy men to men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
23:intro hk5t 0 # Exodus 23 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\nThis chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. It also touches on the patterns of life regarding the Sabbaths ([verses 10-12](../23/10.md)) and Festivals ([verses 14-19](../23/14.md)). At [verse 20](../23/20.md) Yahweh begins telling them about their future as they go to and live in the promised land.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Celebrations of feasts and festivals\n\nThe people of Israel were required to celebrate certain feasts and festivals. These were part of the law of Moses, and some are described in this chapter. Their purpose was to worship Yahweh and to remember the great things Yahweh has done for them.
23:1 we1y General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.
23:1 eeoc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֖א שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **report** and **emptiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “You must not report emptily” or “You must not report falsely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
23:1 fu5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אַל־תָּ֤שֶׁת יָֽדְךָ֙ עִם־רָשָׁ֔ע 1 Here, to **put your hand with the wicked** means to support the lies that he is telling in order to harm someone else. The image is of putting out your hand to help him, to make him stronger than he would be on his own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You must not assist the wicked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
23:1 y1a3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עֵ֥ד חָמָֽס 1 Here, **violence** can also mean “wrong.” Either way, it means to harm another person by committing injustice (violence to justice) by lying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a false witness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:2 nqz9 וְלֹא־תַעֲנֶ֣ה 1 Alternate translation: “and you also must not speak”
23:2 z6ej rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לֹֽא־תִהְיֶ֥ה אַחֲרֵֽי־רַבִּ֖ים לְרָעֹ֑ת 1 This is a metaphor that describes one’s agreeing with a group of people as if he actually walked behind that group. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You must not do the evil that the crowd wants” or “You must not agree with the majority for evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
23:2 nuag rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis לִנְטֹ֛ת & לְהַטֹּֽת 1 The phrase “from justice” is omitted twice but should be understood in both cases. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to turn aside from justice … that turns aside from justice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
23:2 tnv2 לִנְטֹ֛ת & לְהַטֹּֽת 1 Here, **to turn aside** means to do illegal or immoral actions that result in an unjust ruling. Alternate translation: “to pervert justice … that perverts justice”
23:6 z2al לֹ֥א תַטֶּ֛ה מִשְׁפַּ֥ט אֶבְיֹנְךָ֖ בְּרִיבֽוֹ 1 Alternate translation: “Do not decide to treat a poor man unjustly in legal matters”
23:6 vh76 בְּרִיבֽוֹ 1 Here, **in his lawsuit** refers to any matter that a court decides.
23:7 ljdw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִדְּבַר־שֶׁ֖קֶר תִּרְחָ֑ק 1 Here distance is used to tell the Israelites to have no part in deception. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not speak deceptively” or “Do not join a false matter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
23:7 c6xl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וְנָקִ֤י וְצַדִּיק֙ 1 These two terms mean very similar things, both of which contrast with **the wicked** later in the verse. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “and … the person who has not done anything wrong or the person who always does what is right” or “and … the person who does right and not wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
23:7 mf4w לֹא־אַצְדִּ֖יק רָשָֽׁע 1 Alternate translation: “I will not find the wicked not guilty” or “I will not say that a wicked person is innocent”
23:8 gh3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification כִּ֤י הַשֹּׁ֨חַד֙ יְעַוֵּ֣ר פִּקְחִ֔ים וִֽיסַלֵּ֖ף דִּבְרֵ֥י צַדִּיקִֽים 1 Here, a “bribe” is described as if it could take action itself that negatively affects justice. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for if you do, an evil person can give money to blind the clear-sighted and to pervert the words of the righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
23:8 ai37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּ֤י הַשֹּׁ֨חַד֙ יְעַוֵּ֣ר פִּקְחִ֔ים וִֽיסַלֵּ֖ף דִּבְרֵ֥י צַדִּיקִֽים 1 To **blind the clear-sighted** is a metaphor that means causing those who know what is right to act like they do not. And **perverts the words of the righteous** could mean causes those who would speak the truth (in court) to lie or causes the judge to give an evil judgment or causes those listening to **the words of the righteous** to choose to act as if they had heard something different. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for a bribe causes those who understand the right thing to do not to do it and causes good men to speak lies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
23:9 mzu9 אֶת־נֶ֣פֶשׁ הַגֵּ֔ר 1 Alternate translation: “the feelings of the foreigner”
23:10 rt7h תְּבוּאָתָֽהּ 1 Alternate translation: “the food its plants produce”
23:11 waxp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וְהַשְּׁבִיעִ֞ת 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “But year 7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
23:11 b5q6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תִּשְׁמְטֶ֣נָּה וּנְטַשְׁתָּ֗הּ 1 This means to leave the land fallow, that is, in its natural state, unplowed, unplanted, not used to grow food. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
23:11 s4wv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְאָֽכְלוּ֙ אֶבְיֹנֵ֣י עַמֶּ֔ךָ 1 The poor can eat any food that grows on its own in a field that is not cultivated. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “so the poor among your people may harvest and eat any food that grows on its own in that field” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:12 ij92 שֽׁוֹרְךָ֙ וַחֲמֹרֶ֔ךָ 1 Alternate translation: “your work animals”
23:12 u07q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּבַיּ֥וֹם הַשְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “and on day 7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
23:12 gpu1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְיִנָּפֵ֥שׁ בֶּן־אֲמָתְךָ֖ וְהַגֵּֽר 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and the son of your female slave and the sojourner may refresh themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23:13 ldn8 תִּשָּׁמֵ֑רוּ 1 Alternate translation: “Do” or “Obey”
23:13 va2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וְשֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽיךָ 1 These two instructions mean almost the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Be sure never to speak the names of other gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
23:13 x5tf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְשֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽיךָ 1 These parallel phrases probably mean praying to other gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not pray to other gods, never let me hear you do that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:13 apnw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽיךָ 1 To be **on your mouth** means to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nor speak them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:13 s86p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽיךָ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also see previous note. Alternate translation: “nor speak them so someone could hear them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23:15 bu7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הָֽאָבִ֔יב 1 **Aviv** is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. Aviv is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
23:15 tx1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives וְלֹא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖י רֵיקָֽם 1 Understatement is used here to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You must not come to me without a proper offering” or “You must always bring an offering to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
23:16 ybsb וְחַ֤ג הַקָּצִיר֙ 1 Elsewhere this is called the “Festival of Weeks.” See [Exodus 34:22](../34/22.md) and Deuteronomy 16:9 and following.
23:16 pnx4 וְחַ֤ג הָֽאָסִף֙ 1 This festival celebrated the final harvesting of all the crops for the year. This festival was also known as the Festival of Shelters or the Festival of Booths. The idea came from the practice of the farmers living in temporary booths, or huts, out in the fields to guard the crop as it ripened. See Deuteronomy 16:13. Alternate translation: “And the Festival of the Ingathering”
23:16 wgxm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּצֵ֣את הַשָּׁנָ֔ה 1 The phrase **in the exiting of the year** means at the end of the year. The year is pictured as something that is leaving. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as the year goes out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
23:17 t5xj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יֵרָאֶה֙ & אֶל־פְּנֵ֖י הָאָדֹ֥ן׀ יְהוָֽה׃ 1 Here, to **appear to the face of the Lord Yahweh** means to gather to worship. **To the face** is a metonym for Yahweh’s presence, referring to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:20 bssx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְפָנֶ֔יךָ 1 This means “in front of you.” Alternate translation: “in front of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:21 mpfy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy הִשָּׁ֧מֶר מִפָּנָ֛יו 1 This means to respect him; **from his face** refers to his person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Show respect to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:21 pm7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הִשָּׁ֧מֶר מִפָּנָ֛יו 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23:21 p5y3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result אַל־תַּמֵּ֣ר בּ֑וֹ כִּ֣י לֹ֤א יִשָּׂא֙ לְפִשְׁעֲכֶ֔ם כִּ֥י שְׁמִ֖י בְּקִרְבּֽוֹ׃ 1 There are two reasons given for the instruction **do not cause bitterness in him**. They are connected in such a way that you could say: “Because my name is within him, he will not forgive your transgressions; therefore, do not cause bitterness in him.” The relation of the **name** and **forgiveness** is not explicit. Alternate translation: “If you provoke him, he will not pardon your sins, for my name is within him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
23:21 p4jv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy שְׁמִ֖י בְּקִרְבּֽוֹ 1 Here, **name** refers to God’s authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “he has my authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:21 gt76 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וּשְׁמַ֥ע בְּקֹל֖וֹ 1 Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and obey what he says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:22 z1gn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אִם־שָׁמֹ֤עַ תִּשְׁמַע֙ בְּקֹל֔וֹ 1 Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you carefully obey what he says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:22 y9bm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וְאָֽיַבְתִּי֙ אֶת־אֹ֣יְבֶ֔יךָ וְצַרְתִּ֖י אֶת־צֹרְרֶֽיךָ 1 These two phrases mean the same thing and are used for emphasis. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
23:23 x2nh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְפָנֶיךָ֒ 1 This phrase, **before your face**, means “in front of you.” Alternate translation: “in front of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:24 a1d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְלֹ֥א תַעֲשֶׂ֖ה כְּמַֽעֲשֵׂיהֶ֑ם 1 The Israelites must not live as the people who worship other gods. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and you must not live as the people live who worship those gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:25 t3ir rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism וּבֵרַ֥ךְ אֶֽת־לַחְמְךָ֖ וְאֶת־מֵימֶ֑יךָ 1 Here, **your bread and your water** is a merism that means food and drink. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and he will bless your food and drink” or “and he will bless you by giving you food and drink” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
23:25 ydl4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וּבֵרַ֥ךְ & וַהֲסִרֹתִ֥י 1 Yahweh switched between the first and third pronoun to refer to himself. Here, both **he** and **I** refer to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
23:26 q4gz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives לֹ֥א תִהְיֶ֛ה מְשַׁכֵּלָ֥ה וַעֲקָרָ֖ה 1 If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Every woman will be able to become pregnant and give birth to healthy babies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
23:26 i1r9 מְשַׁכֵּלָ֥ה 1 to have a pregnancy end early and unexpectedly, resulting in the death of the baby
23:26 geqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אֶת־מִסְפַּ֥ר יָמֶ֖יךָ אֲמַלֵּֽא 1 This is an idiom that means to live a long time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I will give you a long life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
23:27 yps8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְפָנֶ֔יךָ 1 This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “before you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:27 q901 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְנָתַתִּ֧י אֶת־כָּל־אֹיְבֶ֛יךָ אֵלֶ֖יךָ עֹֽרֶף 1 This is an idiom meaning that the enemies will turn and run away (showing the Israelites the backs of their necks). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and I will make all of your enemies flee” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
23:28 t0r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְפָנֶ֑יךָ & מִלְּפָנֶֽיךָ 1 This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “before you … from before you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:28 cg7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַצִּרְעָ֖ה 1 The **hornet** is a flying insect that can sting people and cause pain. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
23:28 oocw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns הַצִּרְעָ֖ה & וְגֵרְשָׁ֗ה 1 Here, **hornet** is used in the singular but refers to a large group of the flying, stinging insects. **It** agrees in number with **hornet**. It may be necessary to translate as a plural. Alternate translation: “hornets … and they will drive out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
23:29 wfdi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִפָּנֶ֖יךָ 1 This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “from before you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:29 i9aq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit פֶּן־תִּהְיֶ֤ה הָאָ֨רֶץ֙ שְׁמָמָ֔ה 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make the rest of the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “lest the land become desolate because no one would be living in the land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:30 mne7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִפָּנֶ֑יךָ 1 This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “from before you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:31 my2e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִפָּנֶֽיךָ 1 This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “from before you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:33 d1fp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּֽי־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְךָ֖ לְמוֹקֵֽשׁ 1 This means worshiping other gods will lead the people of Israel to certain destruction, as if they were an animal caught in a hunter’s trap. It could also be saying that leaving the other people around will make it so that the Israelites see the other people’s worship and are lured (like in a trap) into worshiping the other gods, which is a sin against Yahweh. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Worshiping them will surely destroy you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
24:intro b83l 0 # Exodus 24 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n- v. 1-2: Yahweh summons Moses\n- v. 3-8: Moses reads the covenant and the people accept it; this is ritually marked by sacrifice and sprinkling of blood\n- v. 9-11: Moses and Israelite elders go up the mountain, see God and eat\n- v. 12-15: Yahweh summons Moses further up the mountain without the other elders, and he goes\n- v. 16-18: Description of Yahweh’s glory, and Moses is at the top of the mountain\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- there are a number of similes used to describe people’s encounter with God\n- “covenant” appears in a variety of ways\n- the mountain, the mountain of God, and Mount Sinai are all the same location\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Moses’ covenant\n\nThe people of Israel promise to obey the covenant Yahweh made with Moses. Their continued blessings were contingent upon their obedience to this covenant. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n### God’s holiness\n\nBecause Yahweh is perfectly holy, he can only be approached in a certain way. Because of this, only Moses was allowed near Yahweh. This is also why Yahweh is described as a “devouring fire.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
24:1 hji6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent Nadab … Abihu 0 A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
24:1 c97i rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names נָדָ֣ב וַאֲבִיה֔וּא 1 **Nadab and Abihu** are men’s names. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
24:1 zukb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אֶל־יְהוָ֗ה 1 Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
24:1 ymip rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְהִשְׁתַּחֲוִיתֶ֖ם 1 Here, after **bow down,** “to me” is implied. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and you shall bow down to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24:2 p06o rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns וְהֵ֖ם 1 Here, **they** refers to all the other people mentioned in [verse 1](../24/01.md). Alternate translation: “and Aaron, Nadab, Abihu, and the elders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
24:2 dqnp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה 1 Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
24:3 sbc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent with one voice 0 Verses 3-8 tell of a different scene than the rest of the chapter, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. It seems that there were some preparations needed before Moses and the elders could go up to meet Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
24:3 nuqr with one voice 0 See [Exodus 19:8](../19/08.md) for how you translated a very similar event.
24:3 cg32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ק֤וֹל אֶחָד֙ 1 Here, **with one voice** is an idiom that means the people were in complete agreement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “together” or “in agreement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
24:4 h7gg תַּ֣חַת הָהָ֑ר 1 Alternate translation: “at the base of the mountain”
24:4 uipf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers וּשְׁתֵּ֤ים עֶשְׂרֵה֙ & לִשְׁנֵ֥ים עָשָׂ֖ר 1 Alternate translation: “and 12 … according to the 12” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
24:7 c9tm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown סֵ֣פֶר הַבְּרִ֔ית 1 Here, **book** does not mean something in our modern format. It was likely a piece of papyrus (an early form of paper made from reeds) or animal skin that rolled up. Alternate translation: “the Covenant he had written down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
24:8 h9ff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הַדָּ֔ם 1 This refers to **the blood** that Moses had put into the bowls. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24:8 juxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit עַ֥ל כָּל־הַדְּבָרִ֖ים הָאֵֽלֶּה׃ 1 **These words** refers to what Moses just read aloud to them, that is, Yahweh’s commands. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which I just read aloud to you and you agreed to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24:9 izl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent Nadab … Abihu 0 A new scene begins with this verse, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. Here the narrative is connected to [verse 2](../24/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
24:9 uz7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names נָדָב֙ וַאֲבִיה֔וּא 1 **Nadab and Abihu** are men’s names. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
24:9 nuq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַיַּ֥עַל 1 The men **went up** the mountain. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24:10 ic4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification וְתַ֣חַת רַגְלָ֗יו 1 **And under his feet** speaks of God as if he had human feet. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And below where God was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
24:10 q8sn לִבְנַ֣ת 1 a hard surface for walking or riding
24:10 pm87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַסַּפִּ֔יר 1 A **sapphire** is a gemstone that is blue in color. If there is a blue gemstone that your people are familiar with, you may use it here, as the exact gemstone is not certain. You may also describe it. Alternate translation: “a blue gemstone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
24:10 zd6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile וּכְעֶ֥צֶם הַשָּׁמַ֖יִם לָטֹֽהַר 1 The point of this comparison is the blueness of the tile. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and it was blue like the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
24:11 jds6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְאֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑וֹ 1 Here, **his hand** refers to his judgement. This means that God did not harm the leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God did not harm the Israelite leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
24:11 b398 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְאֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑וֹ 1 What would be expected is that they would die if they saw God. The Israelite elders ability to see God and live is unexpected. Be sure your translation conveys that. Alternate translation: “However, he did not send out his hand to the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
24:12 dx4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit לְהוֹרֹתָֽם 1 This means so that Moses and the other Israelite leaders could teach the laws and commandments to the Israelite people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24:13 flw7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants וִיהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ 1 **Joshua** is introduced here again. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
24:13 gv5e וִיהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ מְשָׁרְת֑וֹ 1 The word translated **servant** here is usually associated with a higher position, like a government minister. Avoid using a word that implies a lower-class serving role. Alternate translation: “and Joshua his assistant”
24:14 mhvj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וְאֶל־הַזְּקֵנִ֤ים אָמַר֙ 1 The structure of the Hebrew indicates but does not require that this speech by Moses happened before [verse 13](../24/13.md) (hence **had said**). The ULT takes this view, however, for languages where it is hard to express events out of order, the UST reflects the other grammatical possibility and says in [24:13](../24/13.md) that Moses started up the mountain and in [24:15](../24/15.md) that he went the rest of the way up the mountain. Following this, you can view this verse as if Moses paused and gave these final instructions as he was leaving the elders behind, thus keeping a sequential structure. Either approach is permissible by the text, but the approach of the ULT is preferred, if possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
24:14 qiy4 לָ֣נוּ 1 Alternate translation: “Joshua and me”
24:14 uc7r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names וְחוּר֙ 1 **Hur** is a man’s name. See how you translated this name in [Exodus 17:10](../17/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
24:14 jyh8 וְהִנֵּ֨ה 1 **Behold** is used to draw attention to important information that Moses is about to tell them. It is frequently omitted. If your language uses a statement to draw attention to important information, you should consider using it here. Alternate translation: “Remember”
24:14 dqhj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מִי־בַ֥עַל דְּבָרִ֖ים 1 This is an idiom that means that someone has a legal dispute or complaint. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever has a legal claim” or “Anyone with a law case” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
24:16 j2s5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כְּבוֹד־יְהוָה֙ 1 This was the brilliant light of Yahweh’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the brilliant light showing Yahweh’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
24:16 uwdd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּיּ֥וֹם הַשְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day number 7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
24:17 e4n6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile כְּאֵ֥שׁ אֹכֶ֖לֶת 1 This means the glory of Yahweh was very large and seemed to burn brightly, like a fire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “like a big fire burning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
24:17 k5lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְעֵינֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 Their **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing represents their thoughts or judgment about what they saw. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated a similar expression in [15:26](../15/26.md). Alternate translation: “to the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
24:18 h1wy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers אַרְבָּעִ֣ים י֔וֹם וְאַרְבָּעִ֖ים לָֽיְלָה 1 Alternate translation: “forty days and forty nights” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
25:intro t23a 0 # Exodus 25 General Notes\n\n## Structure:\n\n* v. 1-7: Instructions for gifts the Israelites may give to help build the place where they will worship God\n* v. 8-9: Introductory building instructions\n* v. 10-22: Instructions for building the Box of the Testimony\n* v. 23-30: Instructions for building the table\n* v. 31-39: Instructions for building the lampstand\n* v. 40: Summary instruction\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n* The tent of meeting and Box of the Testimony are introduced in this chapter.\n* Translators will need to take special care in translating the concept of atonement.\n\n## Potential Translation Issues in this Chapter:\n\n* There are many unfamiliar items in this chapter. Fortunately they are mostly all physical items. Translators will have to try to understand what each item is and translate it into the closest equivalent in their culture. It may be helpful for translators to try to find images depicting some of the items the Israelites were to make.\n* There are some biblical weights and measurements that translators may not have encountered before.\n* From [verse 11](../25/11.md) until the end of chapter 30, almost every instruction regarding the construction of the tent of meeting and all the associated items are given with a singular form of “you,” as if Moses himself would make them. However, it is clear and made explicit in [chapter 31](../31/01.md) that certain skilled craftsmen will receive these instructions from Moses and make these items. In some languages you may need to change from second to third person throughout, following the pattern in [25:10](../25/10.md). There are a few exceptions which will have their own note. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]].
25:2 ygtd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks דַּבֵּר֙ 1 The beginning of this verse marks the start of a very long direct quote which continues until the end of [Exo 30:10](../30/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
25:2 tktu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations דַּבֵּר֙ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְיִקְחוּ־לִ֖י תְּרוּמָ֑ה 1 In some languages you may have to make **and they shall take a contribution for me** a direct quote. Note that this will make it a second-level quotation and you will need to mark it with second-level quotation marking if your language uses them. Alternate translation: “Say to the sons of Israel, ‘You shall take a contribution for me.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
25:2 r5yr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֣ר יִדְּבֶ֣נּוּ לִבּ֔וֹ 1 This is an idiom that indicates a person’s desire to give an offering. Many languages will have a similar idiom, though the body part may vary. Alternate translation: “who wants to give one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
25:2 k78q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual תִּקְח֖וּ 1 The word **you** is plural and refers to Moses and the leaders. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
25:4 c1qn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּתְכֵ֧לֶת וְאַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְתוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or “thread” may be the best understanding. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
25:4 c958 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְתוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
25:5 ayup rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מְאָדָּמִ֛ים 1 When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish in color. It is not clear whether these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
25:5 va28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תְּחָשִׁ֖ים 1 The meaning of this word is not known. It may refer to some water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. [Sea cows on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sirenia) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
25:5 d4fa rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שִׁטִּֽים 1 A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
25:6 i6gp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּשָׂמִים֙ 1 Here, **spices** are things made from parts of plants that people dry and then grind into a powder to put in oil or food, giving it a particular smell or flavor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
25:7 mg4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown אַבְנֵי־שֹׁ֕הַם 1 An **onyx** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red, or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
25:9 m1np rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular אוֹתְךָ֔ 1 Here, **you** is singular and refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
25:9 w4sc כֵּלָ֑יו 1 Here, **utensils** is a general term that you could translate by a broad term that could encompass all of the things used in the Dwelling, as described in this and the several following chapters. Alternate translation: “its implements”
25:9 c9qe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual תַּעֲשֽׂוּ 1 Here, **you** is plural and refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
25:9 tc2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person תַּעֲשֽׂוּ 1 Since Moses does not construct these items himself, you may consider shifting the instructions to the third person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “they shall make it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
25:10 o8dl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שִׁטִּ֑ים 1 These trees, **acacias**, are small trees with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in [25:5](../25/05.md). [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
25:10 cs23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance אַמָּתַ֨יִם וָחֵ֜צִי & וְאַמָּ֤ה וָחֵ֨צִי֙ & וְאַמָּ֥ה וָחֵ֖צִי 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 115cm … 69cm … 69cm (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
25:10 saf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction וָחֵ֜צִי & וָחֵ֨צִי֙ & וָחֵ֖צִי 1 A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
25:12 wbq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְיָצַ֣קְתָּ לּ֗וֹ אַרְבַּע֙ טַבְּעֹ֣ת זָהָ֔ב 1 Casting rings was a process in which gold was melted, poured into a mold that was in the shape of a ring, and then allowed to cool and harden. If this sort of metal-working process is unknown to your people, you may simply describe it, or use a word meaning “make,” as the UST does. The UST approach is preferred, as the creation process is not in focus here, and it would be cumbersome to include the description in the text. You could use a word meaning “make,” and include the description in a footnote if you are including those and your team feels it is important to understand. Alternate translation: “You shall make four rings of gold by melting the gold and pouring it into molds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
25:13 i5mc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שִׁטִּ֑ים 1 A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in [25:5](../25/05.md). [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
25:15 k67p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism בְּטַבְּעֹת֙ הָאָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַבַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽנּוּ 1 # General Information:\n\nThese two phrases mean similar things. Yahweh is saying the same thing in two different ways to emphasize how important this command is. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The poles belong in the rings of the box; no one is ever to remove them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
25:15 aea1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive בְּטַבְּעֹת֙ הָאָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַבַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽנּוּ 1 # General Information:\n\nIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as seen in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:17 ast8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance אַמָּתַ֤יִם וָחֵ֨צִי֙ & וְאַמָּ֥ה וָחֵ֖צִי 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to the metric system is: 115 centimeters … 69 centimeters … 69 centimeters (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
25:17 c8o7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction וָחֵ֨צִי֙ & וָחֵ֖צִי 1 A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
25:19 b4l9 מִן־הַכַּפֹּ֛רֶת תַּעֲשׂ֥וּ אֶת־הַכְּרֻבִ֖ים עַל־שְׁנֵ֥י קְצוֹתָֽיו 1 This seems to indicate that the cherubim should be formed out of the same piece of gold as the rest of the lid. It may, however, mean that at the end they should be one piece, so the gold should be heated to melting and the lid and cherubim joined together. Alternate translation: “You shall join the cherubim to the atonement lid on its two ends”
25:22 zu9u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular לְךָ֮ & אִתְּךָ֜ & אוֹתְךָ֖ 1 Here, **you** is singular and refers to Moses. If you have been using a plural you for Yahweh’s commands which have been to give to others, make sure you use the singular form of “you” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
25:23 t312 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance שִׁטִּ֑ים אַמָּתַ֤יִם אָרְכּוֹ֙ וְאַמָּ֣ה רָחְבּ֔וֹ וְאַמָּ֥ה וָחֵ֖צִי קֹמָתֽוֹ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 115 centimeters … 46 centimeters … 69 centimeters (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
25:23 a2o9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction וָחֵ֖צִי 1 A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
25:25 awi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance טֹ֖פַח 1 You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **handbreadth** is a measurement of approximately eight centimeters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
25:25 bit8 לּ֥וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “for the table”
25:27 jdh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְבָתִּ֣ים 1 Here, **to house the poles** means that the rings will hold the poles. Since the rings are where the poles belong for use when carrying the table, the rings are in their **house.** If your language has a similar idiom meaning “place of belonging,” you may use it, or you may translate the idea. Alternate translation: “to be a place for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
25:28 l4fk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְנִשָּׂא־בָ֖ם אֶת־הַשֻּׁלְחָֽן 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And you shall carry the table with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:29 nrmp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown קְּעָרֹתָ֜יו וְכַפֹּתָ֗יו וּקְשׂוֹתָיו֙ וּמְנַקִּיֹּתָ֔יו 1 We do not know precisely what these dishes were. It is likely that the **plates** were mostly flat dishes for holding the bread that would be on the table. The **pans** may have been shallow bowls or deep plates for holding incense, or they may have been something more like a ladle or spoon. The **pitchers** probably held wine to be poured into the **bowls** for the drink offerings. You will need to translate using the closest word for each such item in your culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
25:29 v78d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֻסַּ֖ךְ בָּהֵ֑ן 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “from which the priests will pour out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:30 uth7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לֶ֥חֶם פָּנִ֖ים 1 Here, **faces** represents the presence of Yahweh. This bread represented the presence of God. Alternate translation: “the bread of the Presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
25:30 kh7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְפָנַ֥י 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in front of me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
25:31 kc3q מִקְשָׁ֞ה 1 Alternate translation: “of beaten gold” See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md).
25:31 g25l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive תֵּעָשֶׂ֤ה 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you shall make” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:33 i7bh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מְֽשֻׁקָּדִ֞ים 1 **Almond blossoms** are white or pink flowers with five petals. (An almond is a kind of nut.) You may want to include a short description as a footnote or in the text (if that is your translation style) the first time this object is encountered. Alternate translation: “shaped like the five-petaled almond flower” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
25:35 lk10 וְכַפְתֹּ֡ר תַּחַת֩ שְׁנֵ֨י הַקָּנִ֜ים מִמֶּ֗נָּה וְכַפְתֹּר֙ תַּ֣חַת שְׁנֵ֤י הַקָּנִים֙ מִמֶּ֔נָּה וְכַפְתֹּ֕ר תַּחַת־שְׁנֵ֥י הַקָּנִ֖ים מִמֶּ֑נָּה לְשֵׁ֨שֶׁת֙ הַקָּנִ֔ים הַיֹּצְאִ֖ים מִן־הַמְּנֹרָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “There must be a leafy base under the first pair of branches—made as one piece with it, and a leafy base under the second pair of branches—also made as one piece with it. In the same way there must be a leafy base under the third pair of branches, made as one piece with it. It must be the same for all six branches extending out from the lampstand.”
25:36 r7yz מִקְשָׁ֥ה 1 Alternate translation: “of beaten gold” See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md).
25:37 dfn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְהֵאִ֖יר עַל־עֵ֥בֶר פָּנֶֽיהָ 1 Here, **face** represents the location of the lampstand. Alternate translation: “so they shine light near it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
25:39 ff5p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight כִּכָּ֛ר 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A talent weighs about 33 kilograms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
25:40 y081 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּרְאֵ֖ה וַעֲשֵׂ֑ה 1 All the items described in this chapter are included in what Moses is told to **see and make**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “See and make everything I have described” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
25:40 gyte rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וּרְאֵ֖ה וַעֲשֵׂ֑ה 1 Here, **see** relates to observing or overseeing. Essentially, Yahweh is telling Moses to be careful as he observes the pattern on the mountain and as he sees the craftsmen of Israel working on these items, so that they are made correctly. Alternate translation: “Observe carefully and work exactly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
25:40 l7je rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אַתָּ֥ה מָרְאֶ֖ה 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I am showing you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26:intro emw7 0 # Exodus 26 General Notes\n\n- The sacred tent has four layers (from inside to out): linen, goats’ hair, tanned rams’ skins, and fine leather.\n- There are multiple different curtains described using three different Hebrew words: one sort of curtains to make the walls of the tent ([verses 1-13](../26/01.md)), another to separate the Holy Place and Most Holy Place (also known as Holy of Holies) ([verses 31-34](../26/31.md)), and another for the entrance of the sacred tent ([verses 36-37](../26/36.md)). If there are words in your language that would make a distinction between these sorts of hanging cloths, it would be appropriate to make a distinction in your translation.\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.\n- v. 1-30: Instructions for constructing the exterior of the sacred tent\n * v. 1-6: Inner covering\n * v. 7-14: Outer covering layers\n * v. 15-30: Wooden framework\n- v. 31-35: Instructions for arranging the interior of the sacred tent\n- v. 36-37: Instructions for hanging the entrance curtain\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The tent of meeting\n\nThis chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building of a tent where Moses would meet Yahweh and the box would be stored. This would eventually become the Dwelling. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
26:1 ks8r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular תַּעֲשֶׂ֖ה 1 Yahweh is speaking to Moses, so the word **you** is singular. Yahweh probably expected Moses to tell someone else to do the actual work, but Moses would be the one responsible for seeing that the work was done correctly. Alternate translation: “, tell a craftsman to make” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
26:1 vre7 וּתְכֵ֤לֶת וְאַרְגָּמָן֙ וְתֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י 1 This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
26:1 xvs7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְתֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י 1 A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:1 ni5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֗ר 1 This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:1 n2vm חֹשֵׁ֖ב 1 a person who is skilled in making beautiful objects by hand
26:2 dkr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance שְׁמֹנֶ֤ה וְעֶשְׂרִים֙ בָּֽאַמָּ֔ה & אַרְבַּ֣ע בָּאַמָּ֔ה 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 12.9 meters … 184 centimeters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
26:3 ba6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive חֲמֵ֣שׁ הַיְרִיעֹ֗ת תִּֽהְיֶ֨יןָ֙ חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ֑הּ וְחָמֵ֤שׁ יְרִיעֹת֙ חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָֽהּ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Join five of the curtains each to another, and join five of the curtains each to another.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26:4 wdum rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal הָאֶחָ֔ת & הַשֵּׁנִֽית 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
26:4 d0sl בַּחֹבָ֑רֶת 1 Alternate translation: “in one set of five curtains”
26:4 gjt1 בַּמַּחְבֶּ֖רֶת הַשֵּׁנִֽית 1 Alternate translation: “in the other set of five curtains”
26:5 nkr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָֽהּ 1 This is an idiom meaning “to each other.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “one to the other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
26:6 sns4 וְעָשִׂ֕יתָ חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים קַרְסֵ֣י זָהָ֑ב וְחִבַּרְתָּ֨ אֶת־הַיְרִיעֹ֜ת אִשָּׁ֤ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָהּ֙ 1 The clasps fit into the loops (verses 4 and 5) to hold the curtains together.
26:6 k12s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִשָּׁ֤ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָהּ֙ 1 This is the same idiom as in the previous verse, meaning together. Alternate translation: “to each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
26:6 b242 אֶחָֽד 1 Alternate translation: “as though it were one piece”
26:7 jeaz לְאֹ֖הֶל 1 This refers to an outer tent over the sacred tent. Alternate translation: “for an outer tent”
26:8 v7i1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance שְׁלֹשִׁים֙ בָּֽאַמָּ֔ה & אַרְבַּ֣ע בָּאַמָּ֔ה 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 13.8 meter … 184 centimeters (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
26:9 kb9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶל־מ֖וּל פְּנֵ֥י הָאֹֽהֶל 1 Here, **face** is probably referring to the entrance of the tent. The opening for the protective tent and the sacred tent would have been coordinated so they were in the same place. Alternate translation: “in front of the entrance of the tent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
26:9 q3og הָאֹֽהֶל 1 As in [verse 7](../26/07.md), **the tent** refers to the outer tent over the sacred tent. Alternate translation: “the outer tent”
26:10 etf7 loops 0 See how you translated a very similar text in [Exodus 26:4](../26/04.md).
26:11 cq36 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַקְּרָסִים֙ 1 The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:12 hftk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction חֲצִ֤י 1 A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
26:13 k4ci rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance וְהָאַמָּ֨ה & וְהָאַמָּ֤ה 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 centimeters (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
26:14 kii8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תְּחָשִׁ֖ים 1 The meaning of this word, **sea cows**, is not known. It may refer to a water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. [Sea cows on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sirenia) See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:14 yz3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מְאָדָּמִ֑ים 1 When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish. It is not clear if these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md). Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:15 y85l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַקְּרָשִׁ֖ים 1 Here, **frames** refers to open wooden structures made to hold the curtains. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:15 tw2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שִׁטִּ֖ים 1 The **acacias** are relatively small trees with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in [25:5](../25/05.md). [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:16 z2rv rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance עֶ֥שֶׂר אַמּ֖וֹת & וְאַמָּה֙ וַחֲצִ֣י הָֽאַמָּ֔ה 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 4.6 meters … 69 centimeters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
26:16 p3av rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction וַחֲצִ֣י 1 A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
26:17 zwfj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown יָד֗וֹת 1 Here, the term **tenons** means a part of the wood sticking out from the rest of the frame so that it can be put into a hole in another object. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:17 xf6s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ֑הּ 1 This is an idiom meaning “to each other.” See how you translated this in [26:5](../26/05.md). Alternate translation: “one to the other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
26:19 c9id אַדְנֵי־כֶ֔סֶף 1 The **bases of silver** were silver blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place and off the ground.
26:19 o357 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שְׁנֵ֨י אֲדָנִ֜ים תַּֽחַת־הַקֶּ֤רֶשׁ הָאֶחָד֙ לִשְׁתֵּ֣י יְדֹתָ֔יו וּשְׁנֵ֧י אֲדָנִ֛ים תַּֽחַת־הַקֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָאֶחָ֖ד לִשְׁתֵּ֥י יְדֹתָֽיו 1 The effect of this is to start a list, and the hearer will assume it should be completed. Try to translate this in the way that a speaker of your language would give instructions that are meant to be carried out on a whole group of objects. This same phrasing occurs again in [verse 21](../26/21.md) and [verse 25](../26/25.md). Alternate translation: “two bases under the first frame for its two tenons, and then two bases under the next frame for its two tenons, and so on for all the frames” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26:21 rlcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֗ים תַּ֚חַת הַקֶּ֣רֶשׁ הָֽאֶחָ֔ד וּשְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֔ים תַּ֖חַת הַקֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָאֶחָֽד 1 The effect of this is to start a list, and the hearer will assume it should be completed. Try to translate this in the way that a speaker of your language would give instructions that are meant to be carried out on a whole group of objects. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md). Alternate translation: “two bases under the first frame, and then two bases under the next frame, and so on for all the frames” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26:25 cbpl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֗ים תַּ֚חַת הַקֶּ֣רֶשׁ הָאֶחָ֔ד וּשְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֔ים תַּ֖חַת הַקֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָאֶחָֽד 1 The effect of this is to start a list, and the hearer will assume it should be completed. Try to translate this in the way that a speaker of your language would give instructions that are meant to be carried out on a whole group of objects. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md). Alternate translation: “two bases under the first frame, and then two bases under the next frame, and so on for all the frames” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26:25 p2wu rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְאַדְנֵיהֶ֣ם & אֲדָנִ֑ים & אֲדָנִ֗ים & אֲדָנִ֔ים 1 The **bases** were silver blocks that had a slot in them to keep the frame in place. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:26 fc8p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְרִיחִ֖ם 1 The **crossbars** are horizontal support beams that give stability to the structure. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:29 ji1j בָּתִּ֖ים לַבְּרִיחִ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “which will hold the crossbars” or “because they will hold the crossbars”
26:29 nq3m לַבְּרִיחִ֑ם 1 The **crossbars** are horizontal support beams that give stability to the structure. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:26](../26/26.md).
26:30 csf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הָרְאֵ֖יתָ בָּהָֽר 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26:31 yqi6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
26:33 p2yq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַקְּרָסִים֒ 1 The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:33 x28l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ הַקֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “the Most Holy Place” or “the Extraordinarily Holy Place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
26:34 u3tu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession בְּקֹ֖דֶשׁ הַקֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy places. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “in the Most Holy Place” or “in the Extraordinarily Holy Place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
26:35 lv9e הַשֻּׁלְחָן֙ & הַמְּנֹרָה֙ 1 This is the **table** Yahweh told Moses how to make in [25:23-30](../25/23.md) and the **lampstand** he told him how to make in [25:31-39](../25/31.md).
26:36 tiz7 The table must be on the north side 0 See how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
26:36 rr16 תְּכֵ֧לֶת וְאַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְתוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 This could mean: (1) “yarn that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple, and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
26:36 f6td rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְשֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֑ר 1 This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:36 r2fy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown רֹקֵֽם 1 Alternate translation: “a person who sews decorative designs into cloth” or “a person who embroiders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:37 av60 an embroiderer 0 See how you translated very similar instructions in [verse 32](../26/32.md).
27:intro x4f7 0 # Exodus 27 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.\n- v. 1-8: Instructions for constructing the altar\n- v. 9-19: Instructions for constructing the outer curtain walls forming the courtyard around the sacred tent\n- v. 20-21: Instructions for the lampstand\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The tent of meeting\n\nThis chapter gives specific instructions regarding building the courtyard area around the Dwelling containing the altar where priests made sacrifices to Yahweh.\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- The verb **make** at the beginning of [verse 9](../27/09.md) is the only verb from verses 9-18. Some languages may be able to translate a clause chain this long without additional verbs. Others (including English), will need to supply at least a minimum number of verbs (ULT) or quite a few verbs (UST) for naturalness.\n- There continue to be a number of possibly unknown terms, still all tangible objects.
27:1 s8qy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance חָמֵשׁ֩ אַמּ֨וֹת & וְחָמֵ֧שׁ אַמּ֣וֹת & וְשָׁלֹ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 2.3 meters … 2.3 meters … 138 centimeters (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
27:4 hsq3 מִכְבָּ֔ר 1 The **grate** is a frame of crossed metal bars for holding wood when burning.
27:4 vlau וְעָשִׂ֣יתָ עַל־הָרֶ֗שֶׁת אַרְבַּע֙ טַבְּעֹ֣ת נְחֹ֔שֶׁת עַ֖ל אַרְבַּ֥ע קְצוֹתָֽיו 1 You may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles when translating this verse. See [Exo 25:12](../25/12.md), [Exo 25:26](../25/26.md), and [Exo 25:27](../25/27.md).
27:5 c5em rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְנָתַתָּ֣ה אֹתָ֗הּ תַּ֛חַת כַּרְכֹּ֥ב הַמִּזְבֵּ֖חַ מִלְּמָ֑טָּה וְהָיְתָ֣ה הָרֶ֔שֶׁת עַ֖ד חֲצִ֥י הַמִּזְבֵּֽחַ 1 The grate was placed inside the altar. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
27:7 b3yx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְהוּבָ֥א אֶת־בַּדָּ֖יו 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And you shall put its poles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:8 ecmh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person הֶרְאָ֥ה 1 Here, **he** refers to Yahweh in the third person. If it would be unnatural in your language for someone to refer to himself in this way, you may need to change it. Alternate translation: “I showed” or “Yahweh showed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
27:8 frcs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person יַעֲשֽׂוּ 1 Here, **they** refers to whoever will make all these items. It is an indication that even though Yahweh has been speaking to Moses in the singular throughout, these instructions are meant to be conveyed to Israelite craftsmen. See [25:intro](../25/intro.md) for more. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
27:9 v748 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֗ר 1 This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
27:9 ce9a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance מֵאָ֤ה בָֽאַמָּה֙ 1 You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
27:10 qq8f וְעַמֻּדָ֣יו עֶשְׂרִ֔ים וְאַדְנֵיהֶ֥ם עֶשְׂרִ֖ים נְחֹ֑שֶׁת 1 Here, **bronze** may refer to both the **pillars** and the **bases**, or just to the **bases.** The pillars inside the tent were of wood overlaid with gold; these may be wood overlaid with bronze.
27:11 gjg5 there must be hangings one hundred cubits long 0 See how you translated many similar words in [Exodus 27:9-10](../27/09.md).
27:11 ynao rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis מֵ֣אָה 1 Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “100 cubits” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
27:11 xev2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance מֵ֣אָה 1 You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
27:12 p4u4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּ֑ה 1 You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23 meters (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
27:13 w2sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים אַמָּֽה 1 You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23 meters (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
27:14 u8nm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance וַחֲמֵ֨שׁ עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה 1 You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 6.9 meters (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
27:14 z8n2 עַמֻּדֵיהֶ֣ם 1 The **pillars** were strong pieces of wood set upright and used as supports. See how you translated these in [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md).
27:14 gz7s וְאַדְנֵיהֶ֖ם 1 The **bases** were metal blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
27:15 s2cc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance חְמֵ֥שׁ עֶשְׂרֵ֖ה 1 You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 6.9 meters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
27:15 hlzp עַמֻּדֵיהֶ֣ם 1 These **posts** were strong pieces of wood set upright and used as supports. See how you translated these in [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md).
27:15 o49h וְאַדְנֵיהֶ֖ם 1 The **bases** were metal blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
27:16 kn9u blue, purple, and scarlet material and fine twined linen 0 See how you translated a nearly identical passage in [26:36](../26/36.md).
27:16 g5wi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance עֶשְׂרִ֣ים אַמָּ֗ה 1 You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
27:17 wtng rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive מְחֻשָּׁקִ֣ים 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Among other options not so relevant here, Wiktionary suggests that a **fillet** could be a “thin strip of any material, in various technical uses,” “thin featureless molding used as separation between broader decorative moldings,” or a rounded corner. Alternate translation: “you shall fillet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:18 wt7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance מֵאָ֨ה בָֽאַמָּ֜ה & חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּחֲמִשִּׁ֗ים & חָמֵ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters … 23 meters … 2.3 meters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
27:18 mu6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּחֲמִשִּׁ֗ים 1 Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “50 cubits” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
27:19 bs7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown יְתֵדֹתָ֛יו & יִתְדֹ֥ת 1 The **tent pegs** are strong, sharp pieces of metal driven into the ground and used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground or to secure ropes in order to create tension to stabilize something standing upright. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
27:21 p7ru rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche הָעֵדֻ֗ת 1 The **testimony** refers to the chest that contains the sacred slabs of stone on which Yahweh had written his commandments. If it would be more clear to your readers you may include a reference to the chest. Alternate translation: “is the Box of the Testimony” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
27:21 nlwz יַעֲרֹךְ֩ אֹת֨וֹ 1 Here, **it** refers to the lamp mentioned in the previous verse and **arrange** means to set it up for burning, and light it. Alternate translation: “shall set up the lampstand and light it”
27:21 j41s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in front of me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
27:21 vr7m חֻקַּ֤ת עוֹלָם֙ לְדֹ֣רֹתָ֔ם מֵאֵ֖ת בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 See how you translated a similar statement in [12:14](../12/14.md)
28:intro r3yx 0 # Exodus 28 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n- v. 1: Introduction - Aaron and sons will become priests\n- v. 2-5: General introduction of sacred clothing\n- v. 6-14: Instructions for the ephod\n * v. 9-14: Instructions regarding stones on ephod\n- v. 15-28: Instructions for the breastpiece\n * v. 17-21: Instructions regarding stones on breastpiece\n * v. 22-28: Instructions for mounting the breastpiece on the ephod\n- v. 29-30: Aaron should wear things over his heart\n- v 31-35: Instructions for making the robe with bells and pomegranates\n- v. 36-38: Instructions regarding the turban\n- v. 39-41: Closing general instructions regarding clothing\n- v. 42-43: Instructions on making and wearing undergarments\n- v. 43b: Closing statement\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Holy garments\n\nBecause Yahweh is holy, only the priests could approach him, and when they did they had to be wearing specially made clothing. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- Verses 17-20 list 12 kinds of stone. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. The UST gives the probable color of the gemstones. Translators may use names of familiar gem stones.
28:1 e1xb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular וְאַתָּ֡ה 1 Here, **you** refers to Moses; in this case, it is used to highlight that he is the person who must do the next thing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
28:1 w9ls rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship אַהֲרֹ֨ן אָחִ֜יךָ 1 Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
28:1 ofgr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names נָדָ֧ב וַאֲבִיה֛וּא אֶלְעָזָ֥ר וְאִיתָמָ֖ר 1 These are men’s names. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
28:2 zxy0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בִגְדֵי־קֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “holy clothes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
28:3 n17y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular וְאַתָּ֗ה 1 Here, **you** refers to Moses; in this case, it is used to highlight that he is the person who must do the next thing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
28:3 c9pv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism אֶל־כָּל־חַכְמֵי־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִלֵּאתִ֖יו ר֣וּחַ חָכְמָ֑ה 1 There is a little bit of parallelism here. Yahweh is clarifying who causes someone to be **wise of heart**. You could translate this in a more causative way if that would make more sense. Alternate translation: “to anyone whom I have filled with the spirit of wisdom, making them wise of heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
28:3 wt7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶל־כָּל־חַכְמֵי־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִלֵּאתִ֖יו ר֣וּחַ חָכְמָ֑ה 1 Here, **heart** and **spirit** are both referring to things innately possessed by a person that is, traits of a person. **Wisdom** refers to skill or talent with crafting in this case. Together **wise of heart** and **filled with the spirit of wisdom** both essentially mean “a talented craftsman.” If it would be more clear to your readers, you may consider making some of this more explicit. Alternate translation: “to every talented craftsman, those whom I have made skilled in their work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28:4 tr5e וּכְתֹ֥נֶת תַּשְׁבֵּ֖ץ 1 We do not know what word translated **of woven work** means, as it only occurs here and in [verse 39](../28/39.md) as a verb. Alternate translation: “and a checkered tunic” or “an embroidered garment”
28:4 dz5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מִצְנֶ֣פֶת 1 This is a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. You may translate it using a word commonly used for a similar item in your culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:4 k184 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְאַבְנֵ֑ט 1 The **sash** is a piece of cloth that people wear around their waist or across their chest. You may translate it with a word commonly used for a similar item in your culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:4 jqtg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בִגְדֵי־קֹ֜דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in [28:2](../28/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
28:5 rxke rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְאֶת־הַתְּכֵ֖לֶת וְאֶת־הָֽאַרְגָּמָ֑ן וְאֶת־תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַשָּׁנִ֖י 1 This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or “thread” may be the best understanding. See how you translated this in [25:4](../25/04.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:5 pfq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַשָּׁנִ֖י 1 A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:6 u3rx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְשֵׁ֥שׁ מָשְׁזָ֖ר 1 This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md). Alternate translation: “fine twined linen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:6 k3bj חֹשֵֽׁב 1 The description **skillful craftsman** refers to a person who can make beautiful objects by hand.
28:7 dpph שְׁתֵּ֧י כְתֵפֹ֣ת חֹֽבְרֹ֗ת יִֽהְיֶה־לּ֛וֹ אֶל־שְׁנֵ֥י קְצוֹתָ֖יו וְחֻבָּֽר 1 This likely meant creating some sort of fastening up by the shoulders to attach the front of the ephod to its back. Alternate translation: “They shall make it so that the front and back attach to each other at the shoulders”
28:7 wt20 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְחֻבָּֽר 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “join it together that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:8 u5av אֲשֶׁ֣ר עָלָ֔יו כְּמַעֲשֵׂ֖הוּ מִמֶּ֣נּוּ 1 This is saying that the sash should be attached to the ephod, perhaps cut from the same material used to make the rest of the ephod.
28:9 c4ia rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown אַבְנֵי־שֹׁ֑הַם 1 These **stones of onyx** are valuable stones that have layers of white and black, red, or brown. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:10 h5mr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שִׁשָּׁה֙ & הַשִּׁשָּׁ֧ה 1 Alternate translation: “6 of … the 6” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
28:10 zlte כְּתוֹלְדֹתָֽם 1 Alternate translation: “according to their birth order”
28:11 dv8k פִּתּוּחֵ֣י חֹתָ֗ם 1 Alternate translation: “in the same way a person engraves on a seal”
28:11 x1xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown חָרַשׁ֮ אֶבֶן֒ 1 A **craftsman of stone** is a person who cuts designs into stones. Alternate translation: “a detailed stone cutter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:11 cm3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown חֹתָ֗ם 1 This is an engraved stone often set into a ring and used to stamp a design into a wax seal to authenticate an official document. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:11 gh2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מִשְׁבְּצ֥וֹת 1 These are pieces of metal that hold the stones onto the ephod. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:12 ypfd זִכָּרֹ֖ן & לְזִכָּרֹֽן 1 The text does not specify if Yahweh or Aaron or someone else is the one being reminded by the stones. It also does not specify exactly what the reminder is of. Try to maintain this ambiguity if possible in your translation.
28:12 shn5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֧י 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28:13 pi4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מִשְׁבְּצֹ֖ת 1 The **ornamental settings** are pieces of precious metal that surround the sides of hold each stone to hold it onto the ephod. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:14 e746 וּשְׁתֵּ֤י שַׁרְשְׁרֹת֙ זָהָ֣ב טָה֔וֹר מִגְבָּלֹ֛ת תַּעֲשֶׂ֥ה אֹתָ֖ם מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה עֲבֹ֑ת 1 Alternate translation: “and you shall make two chains of pure gold that are braided like cords”
28:15 sf8e מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה חֹשֵׁ֔ב כְּמַעֲשֵׂ֥ה אֵפֹ֖ד תַּעֲשֶׂ֑נּוּ 1 Alternate translation: “a skillful workman will make it like the ephod”
28:16 cny4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance זֶ֥רֶת & וְזֶ֥רֶת 1 You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A span is approximately 23 centimeters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
28:16 onj6 רָב֥וּעַ יִֽהְיֶ֖ה כָּפ֑וּל 1 Alternate translation: “Fold it in half so it will be square”
28:17 spd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nTwelve kinds of stones are listed in the next four verses. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:17 n1ys rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown אֹ֤דֶם פִּטְדָה֙ וּבָרֶ֔קֶת 1 These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:18 qq9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וְהַטּ֖וּר הַשֵּׁנִ֑י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And row 2:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
28:18 ga1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown נֹ֥פֶךְ סַפִּ֖יר וְיָהֲלֹֽם 1 These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:18 a5rr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown סַפִּ֖יר 1 This is a gemstone that is blue in color. See how you translated this in [Exodus 24:10](../24/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:19 uw42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וְהַטּ֖וּר הַשְּׁלִישִׁ֑י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And row 3:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
28:19 z17r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown לֶ֥שֶׁם שְׁב֖וֹ וְאַחְלָֽמָה 1 These are precious stones (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:20 ekaf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וְהַטּוּר֙ הָרְבִיעִ֔י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And row 4:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
28:20 ul2e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תַּרְשִׁ֥ישׁ וְשֹׁ֖הַם וְיָשְׁפֵ֑ה 1 These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:20 rgf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְשֹׁ֖הַם 1 An **onyx** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red, or brown. See how you translated these in [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:20 pw5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive מְשֻׁבָּצִ֥ים זָהָ֛ב יִהְי֖וּ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You shall set them in gold” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:21 z8mw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown פִּתּוּחֵ֤י חוֹתָם֙ 1 This is an engraved stone often set into a ring and used to stamp a design into a wax seal to authenticate an official document. Here the stone is mounted on a ring. See how you translated “signet” in [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:22 m7yl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שַֽׁרְשֹׁ֥ת גַּבְלֻ֖ת מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה עֲבֹ֑ת זָהָ֖ב טָהֽוֹר 1 See how you translated similar phrases in [Exodus 28:14](../28/14.md). Alternate translation (should replace **twisted chains**): “chains that are made of pure gold and are braided like cords” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:25 d8y3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶל־מ֥וּל פָּנָֽיו 1 Here, **face** simply refers to the object (the ephod). Alternate translation: “on its front side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28:25 a4lc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit עַל־שְׁתֵּ֣י הַֽמִּשְׁבְּצ֑וֹת 1 These are two settings that enclose the stones. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
28:27 f2nn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy פָּנָ֔יו 1 Here, **face** simply refers to the object (the ephod). Alternate translation: “on its front side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28:27 vw1w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown לְחֵ֖שֶׁב 1 The **waistband** was a cloth belt made from narrow linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:8](../28/08.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:28 se56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְלֹֽא־יִזַּ֣ח הַחֹ֔שֶׁן מֵעַ֖ל 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the breastpiece shall stay attached to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:28 wf9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives וְלֹֽא־יִזַּ֣ח הַחֹ֔שֶׁן מֵעַ֖ל 1 If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “so that the breastpiece shall stay attached to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
28:29 z1mz שְׁמ֨וֹת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 This refers to the names of the tribes engraved on the twelve stones the breastplate as described in [Exodus 28:17-21](./17.md).
28:29 cc97 עַל־לִבּ֖וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “over Aaron’s heart” or “on his chest”
28:30 dgn9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate הָאוּרִים֙ וְאֶת־הַתֻּמִּ֔ים 1 It is not clear what **the Urim and the Thummim** are. They were objects, possibly stones, that the priest used to somehow determine the will of God. Because of this, it is basically impossible to translate. In your translation, you can spell it the way it sounds in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
28:30 f537 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְנָשָׂ֣א אַ֠הֲרֹן אֶת־מִשְׁפַּ֨ט בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל עַל־לִבּ֛וֹ לִפְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה תָּמִֽיד 1 This phrase appears to refer to the Urim and Thummim and explain their purpose. Alternate translation: “And Aaron shall bear the decisions for the sons of Israel over his heart before Yahweh continually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:30 fep5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה & לִפְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh … before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28:32 x42n מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה אֹרֵ֗ג 1 Alternate translation: “made by a weaver”
28:32 rw96 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown אֹרֵ֗ג 1 Alternate translation: “a person who weaves” or “a person who creates cloth using thread, yarns and wool” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:32 t60l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תַחְרָ֛א 1 We do not know what this term means, but the implication seems to be that the collar should be made strong. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:32 ubhg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יִקָּרֵֽעַ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:33 qm1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תְּכֵ֤לֶת וְאַרְגָּמָן֙ וְתוֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י 1 This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or “thread” may be the best understanding. See how you translated this in [25:4](../25/04.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:34 kl55 פַּעֲמֹ֤ן זָהָב֙ וְרִמּ֔וֹן פַּֽעֲמֹ֥ן זָהָ֖ב וְרִמּ֑וֹן 1 This phrase is repeated to show the pattern of the design on the robe. Alternate translation: “alternate pomegranates and golden bells”
28:35 pf61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְנִשְׁמַ֣ע ק֠וֹלוֹ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the bells make a sound” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:35 fmqu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֧י יְהוָ֛ה 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28:35 ky8s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person יְהוָ֛ה 1 Here, Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
28:35 qtf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְלֹ֥א יָמֽוּת 1 The probable implication is that he would die because he did not obey Yahweh. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “As a result, he will not die because of disobeying my instructions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
28:36 mzej rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown צִּ֖יץ 1 We do not know exactly what this was. It was probably a thin piece of gold smaller than the palm of someone’s hand. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:36 nd2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וּפִתַּחְתָּ֤ עָלָיו֙ פִּתּוּחֵ֣י חֹתָ֔ם 1 See how you translated similar words in [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md) Alternate translation: “write on it in the same way a person engraves on a seal.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:37 qka6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַמִּצְנָ֑פֶת & הַמִּצְנֶ֖פֶת 1 This was a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:37 lxq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶל־מ֥וּל פְּנֵֽי־הַמִּצְנֶ֖פֶת 1 Here, **face** means the front. Alternate translation: “to the front of the turban” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28:38 frqm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְנָשָׂ֨א אַהֲרֹ֜ן אֶת־עֲוֺ֣ן הַקֳּדָשִׁ֗ים 1 Here, **iniquity** is pictured as something that can be carried or worn like the turban. It also seems to picture handing off the iniquity from the people to Aaron. Also here, **iniquity** actually seems to refer to the punishment for anything that might be wrong regarding the things the Israelites offer Yahweh. You may need to use a different word than **bear** to convey the transfer of responsibility for wrongs from the people to Aaron. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and Aaron shall be responsible for any wrong related to the holy things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:38 chuz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28:38 jbt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person יְהוָֽה 1 Here, Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
28:39 t5vj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מִצְנֶ֣פֶת 1 This was a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:39 yi1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְאַבְנֵ֥ט 1 A **sash** is a decorative piece of cloth that a person wears around his waist or across his chest. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:39 i62z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown רֹקֵֽם 1 An embroiderer is a person who sews decorative designs onto cloth. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:40 pfs2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown אַבְנֵטִ֑ים 1 The **sashes** are decorative pieces of cloth that people wear around the waist or across the chest. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:40 v2tj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וּמִגְבָּעוֹת֙ 1 A headband is a decorative, narrow strip of cloth that is worn around the head above the eyes. This seems to be similar to, but perhaps smaller than the turban worn by the high priest. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:41 xa75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship אַהֲרֹ֣ן אָחִ֔יךָ 1 Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
28:41 agey rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּמִלֵּאתָ֧ אֶת־יָדָ֛ם 1 This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and you shall ordain them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
28:42 vz62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מִכְנְסֵי 1 These are articles of clothing worn under the outer clothes, next to the skin. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:42 m1bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism בְּשַׂ֣ר עֶרְוָ֑ה 1 This refers to the male genitalia. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “their private parts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
29:intro xmd9 0 # Exodus 29 General Notes\n\nLarge translation teams working on multiple books at the same time should note that this chapter is very similar to Leviticus 8.\n\n## Structure\n\nAs you translate, you may perceive a different structure in this chapter than what is below. Feel free to organize in a way that is clear in your language. This chapter is really one united whole; the outline below is one possible way of subdividing it.\nThe Consecration of the Priests\n- v. 1-3 Preparing items\n- v. 4-9 Preparing Aaron and his sons\n- v. 10-14 Sacrificing the bull to purify the altar\n- v. 15-34 Sacrificing the rams\n * v. 15-18 The first ram wholly burned\n * v. 19-28 The second ram used for consecrating and divided for eating\n * v. 29-30 Priestly succession\n * v. 31-34 More instructions regarding eating the second ram\n- v. 35-37 Instructions to do all this for seven days\n- v. 38-41 Instructions for perpetual offerings\n- v. 42-46 Yahweh’s affirmation\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Consecrating priests\n\nThis chapter records the process of consecrating priests. The priests were to be set apart from the rest of Israel because Yahweh is holy. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/consecrate]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Forms of you\n\nFor this chapter, it seems that the singular “you” that Yahweh has been using to give Moses general instructions for the last several chapters now actually refers to Moses himself. If you have been translating the instructions using a plural form of you or by shifting the instructions to the third person, you should switch back to a singular form referring directly to Moses for this chapter.\n\n### “I will live among the Israelites”\n\nAs God, Yahweh is everywhere and cannot be limited to a single space. This phrase indicates that he permanently remains within Israel in a special way while they have the ark.
29:1 d6gk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וְזֶ֨ה 1 A new scene begins here. There is a change in topic from instructions for making garments for priests to consecrating priests. This may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
29:1 ld5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns לָהֶ֛ם 1 Here, **they** refers to Aaron and his sons. Alternate translation: “to Aaron and his sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
29:1 jhj3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בֶּן־בָּקָ֛ר 1 This is an idiom meaning young. If you do not have a similar idiom you may translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “a young one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
29:2 ptm7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive בְּלוּלֹ֣ת בַּשֶּׁ֔מֶן & מְשֻׁחִ֣ים בַּשָּׁ֑מֶן 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. You may need to shorten the sentences and make the alternate translation content separate sentences or mark it off with special punctuation. Alternate translation: “(mix them with oil) … (rub them with oil)” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
29:2 wkyb וּרְקִיקֵ֥י מַצּ֖וֹת מְשֻׁחִ֣ים בַּשָּׁ֑מֶן 1 These may have been rubbed with oil before or after baking.
29:2 r449 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְחַלֹּ֤ת & וּרְקִיקֵ֥י 1 These are different kinds of food made from flour. While all the breads were somewhat flat because they were unleavened, the **cakes** were a bread enriched with oil, and the **wafers** were especially thin. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
29:3 gm58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns אוֹתָם֙ 1 Alternate translation: “the bread, cakes, and wafers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
29:3 cd6m וְהִקְרַבְתָּ֥ אֹתָ֖ם בַּסָּ֑ל וְאֶ֨ת־הַפָּ֔ר וְאֵ֖ת שְׁנֵ֥י הָאֵילִֽם 1 Here, **in the basket** is almost parenthetical. You may need to restructure the sentence or use punctuation to make it clear that **the bull and the two rams** are connected to **bring**, and not to **in the basket.** Alternate translation: “and you shall bring them near (in the basket) along with the bull and the two rams”
29:4 a6rz אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד 1 The **tent of meeting** is another name for the Dwelling. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:21](../27/21.md).
29:5 pr4i rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּחֵ֖שֶׁב 1 This was a cloth belt made from narrow linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:8](../28/08.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
29:6 ap2x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַמִּצְנֶ֖פֶת & הַמִּצְנָֽפֶת 1 This was a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
29:6 y59s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown נֵ֥זֶר הַקֹּ֖דֶשׁ 1 This **crown** is described in [Exodus 28:36](../28/36.md) as being engraved with the words “Holy to Yahweh” and made of pure gold. There it is referred to by a different Hebrew word, which is translated as “rosette.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
29:6 n4bt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns אֶת־נֵ֥זֶר הַקֹּ֖דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the holy crown” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
29:7 rwuj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שֶׁ֣מֶן הַמִּשְׁחָ֔ה 1 See how you translated **oil of anointing** in [25:6](../25/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
29:9 j3a8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown אַבְנֵ֜ט 1 A **sash** is a decorative piece of cloth that people wear around their waist or across their chest. See how you translated this word in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
29:9 bh2d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מִגְבָּעֹ֔ת 1 A headband is a narrow, decorative strip of cloth that is worn around the head above the eyes. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:40](../28/40.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
29:9 r1x4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown כְּהֻנָּ֖ה 1 Here, **the priesthood** means the official office of priest. Alternate translation: “the duty of being priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
29:9 ze9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְהָיְתָ֥ה לָהֶ֛ם כְּהֻנָּ֖ה 1 The duty of being priests will also belong to the descendants of Aaron’s sons. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And the priesthood will belong to them and their descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
29:9 p7m9 לְחֻקַּ֣ת עוֹלָ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “a law that will not end.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:43](../28/43.md).
29:9 zbzk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּמִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְיַד־בָּנָֽיו 1 The phrase, **fill the hand**, seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “And you shall ordain Aaron and his sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
29:9 jhwb וּמִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְיַד־בָּנָֽיו 1 The phrase, **fill the hand** may be (1) a summary and reminder statement of the whole ordination process, (2) referring to the previous description, meaning that the priests have been ordained, or (3) referring to the following description, meaning that the priests are about to be ordained. It would probably be best to translate this in the way a mid-text summary reminder phrase would be spoken in your language, avoiding any indication that it refers only to the previous or following text.
29:10 wjko tent of meeting 0 The purpose of the sacrifice explained here through verse 14 is to purify or cleanse the altar. This is made more clear in [verses 36-37](../29/36.md).
29:10 sgur rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֖י אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד 1 Here, **face** refers to the front of the tent. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
29:10 rf0w rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וְסָמַ֨ךְ אַהֲרֹ֧ן וּבָנָ֛יו אֶת־יְדֵיהֶ֖ם עַל־רֹ֥אשׁ הַפָּֽר 1 The slaughter of the bull in the next verse occurs while the priests continue to have their hands on the bull’s head. Take care to arrange the phrases and to use words or forms that indicate that the two events happened at the same time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
29:12 c2ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown קַרְנֹ֥ת 1 These were projections that looked like ox horns attached to the four corners of the altar. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
29:12 xdl5 כָּל־הַדָּ֣ם 1 Alternate translation: “the remaining blood”
29:13 x2c5 וְהִקְטַרְתָּ֖ 1 Alternate translation: “and burn them to make smoke”
29:13 nsg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַכָּבֵ֔ד & הַכְּלָיֹ֔ת 1 The **liver** and **kidneys** are organs in the body. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
29:14 eza8 וְאֶת־בְּשַׂ֤ר הַפָּר֙ וְאֶת־עֹר֣וֹ וְאֶת־פִּרְשׁ֔וֹ תִּשְׂרֹ֣ף 1 Alternate translation: “But as for the remaining parts of the bull, including the flesh and dung, you shall burn it”
29:14 o262 מִח֖וּץ לַֽמַּחֲנֶ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “outside the borders of where the Israelites are camped”
29:15 pd0t rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וְסָ֨מְכ֜וּ אַהֲרֹ֧ן וּבָנָ֛יו אֶת־יְדֵיהֶ֖ם עַל־רֹ֥אשׁ הָאָֽיִל 1 The slaughter of the ram in the next verse occurs while they continue to have their hands on the ram’s head. Take care to arrange the phrases and to use words or forms that indicate that the two events happened at the same time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
29:17 w2nb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown קִרְבּוֹ֙ 1 Alternate translation: “the organs” See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:13](../29/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
29:18 qc2i וְהִקְטַרְתָּ֤ אֶת־כָּל־הָאַ֨יִל֙ 1 Alternate translation: “and burn all of the ram to make smoke”
29:18 pwjk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism עֹלָ֥ה ה֖וּא לַֽיהוָ֑ה רֵ֣יחַ נִיח֔וֹחַ אִשֶּׁ֥ה לַיהוָ֖ה הֽוּא 1 These phrases are in parallel, with the second expanding and clarifying the first. In some languages, you may need to use a different structure to expand and clarify the **burnt offering**. Alternate translation: “It is a pleasant smelling burnt offering made by fire to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
29:19 zzsi הַשֵּׁנִ֑י 1 Except for **the second,** this verse is identical to [verse 15](../29/15.md).
29:20 j6b1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְשָׁחַטְתָּ֣ אֶת־הָאַ֗יִל 1 They killed the ram by cutting its throat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and kill the ram by cutting its throat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
29:21 bxs6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְלָקַחְתָּ֞ מִן־הַדָּ֨ם אֲשֶׁ֥ר עַֽל־הַמִּזְבֵּחַ֮ וּמִשֶּׁ֣מֶן הַמִּשְׁחָה֒ וְהִזֵּיתָ֤ 1 Moses would mix the blood and oil. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And you shall take some of the blood that is on the altar and mix it with some of the oil of anointing and sprinkle it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
29:22 i3dc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַקֶּ֗רֶב & הַכָּבֵד֙ & הַכְּלָיֹ֗ת 1 The **entrails, liver**, and **kidneys** refer to organs inside the body. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:13](../29/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
29:23 mcko וְכִכַּ֨ר לֶ֜חֶם אַחַ֗ת וַֽחַלַּ֨ת לֶ֥חֶם שֶׁ֛מֶן אַחַ֖ת וְרָקִ֣יק אֶחָ֑ד מִסַּל֙ הַמַּצּ֔וֹת אֲשֶׁ֖ר לִפְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 All of these items were in the basket mentioned in [verse 2](../29/02.md), not just the wafer. Be sure this is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “and from the basket of bread without yeast that is before the face of Yahweh: one round loaf of bread, and one cake of bread of oil, and one wafer”
29:23 td8w וְכִכַּ֨ר לֶ֜חֶם אַחַ֗ת וַֽחַלַּ֨ת לֶ֥חֶם שֶׁ֛מֶן אַחַ֖ת וְרָקִ֣יק אֶחָ֑ד מִסַּל֙ הַמַּצּ֔וֹת 1 For 29:23, see how you translated similar words in [Exodus 29:2](../29/02.md).
29:23 i7vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֲשֶׁ֖ר לִפְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 This means in the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “that you have placed before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
29:24 b9bj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns הַכֹּ֔ל 1 Here, **all these** refers to the parts of the sacrifice mentioned in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
29:24 q6k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וְהֵנַפְתָּ֥ 1 While the text reads, **you shall raise**, logically, it is Aaron and his sons who will raise the offerings at this point. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the third person. Alternate translation: “and they shall raise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
29:24 xhhf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וְהֵנַפְתָּ֥ אֹתָ֛ם תְּנוּפָ֖ה לִפְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 The act of raising the meat and bread symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out the process of handing the offering to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and they shall show that they are giving them to me by holding them up to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
29:24 ypit rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 This means in the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
29:25 e6bj וְהִקְטַרְתָּ֥ הַמִּזְבֵּ֖חָה עַל־הָעֹלָ֑ה לְרֵ֤יחַ נִיח֨וֹחַ֙ לִפְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה אִשֶּׁ֥ה ה֖וּא לַיהוָֽה 1 See how you translated similar phrases in [verse 18](../29/18.md).
29:26 bf71 מֵאֵ֤יל הַמִּלֻּאִים֙ 1 See how you translated this in [verse 22](../29/22.md). Alternate translation: “from the ram that you dedicated”
29:26 c21f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וְהֵנַפְתָּ֥ אֹת֛וֹ תְּנוּפָ֖ה 1 The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. See how you translated this in [verse 24](../29/24.md). Alternate translation: “and show that you are giving it to me by holding it up to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
29:27 dzkx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction הַתְּנוּפָ֗ה וְאֵת֙ שׁ֣וֹק הַתְּרוּמָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוּנַ֖ף וַאֲשֶׁ֣ר הוּרָ֑ם 1 The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. See how you translated this in [verse 24](../29/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
29:28 uc2d וְהָיָה֩ לְאַהֲרֹ֨ן וּלְבָנָ֜יו לְחָק־עוֹלָ֗ם מֵאֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא 1 Alternate translation: “This offering is what Aaron and his sons will always receive from the people”
29:28 q3ms מֵאֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא וּתְרוּמָ֞ה יִהְיֶ֨ה מֵאֵ֤ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ מִזִּבְחֵ֣י שַׁלְמֵיהֶ֔ם תְּרוּמָתָ֖ם לַיהוָֽה 1 The amount of repetition in this verse may make it difficult to translate smoothly. You may consider combining some phrases if that would work better in your language. Alternate translation: “for the Israelites must offer this portion from what they bring to Yahweh as peace offerings to him”
29:29 qta8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּבִגְדֵ֤י הַקֹּ֨דֶשׁ֙ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in [28:2](../28/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
29:29 a59z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּלְמַלֵּא־בָ֖ם אֶת־יָדָֽם 1 **Fill their hand** seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “to ordain them in the clothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
29:31 l3xk אֵ֥יל הַמִּלֻּאִ֖ים 1 The **ram of consecration** refers to the second ram, the one described in [verses 19](../29/19.md) and following.
29:31 u9kl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּמָקֹ֥ם קָדֹֽשׁ 1 This is not the same as the Holy Place outside of the Most Holy Place. This probably refers to a place within the courtyard. However, its exact location is not otherwise specified. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the entrance to the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
29:33 mcdc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְמַלֵּ֥א אֶת־יָדָ֖ם 1 This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “to ordain them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
29:34 rhp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יֵאָכֵ֖ל 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one may eat it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
29:35 yo59 כָּ֔כָה 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **thus** means “like this” and, as the next verses make clear, refers to the sacrificial ceremony outlined in this chapter which they must repeat seven times.
29:35 c2si rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom תְּמַלֵּ֥א יָדָֽם 1 # General Information:\n\nThis seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “you shall ordain them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
29:36 r5tx General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse and the next explain the purpose of the sacrifice detailed in [verses 10-14](../29/10.md).
29:36 s81n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal וּפַ֨ר חַטָּ֜את תַּעֲשֶׂ֤ה לַיּוֹם֙ עַל־הַכִּפֻּרִ֔ים וְחִטֵּאתָ֙ עַל־הַמִּזְבֵּ֔חַ בְּכַפֶּרְךָ֖ עָלָ֑יו 1 # General Information:\n\nThe phrase **and you shall purify the altar by making atonement for it** describes the purpose of offering the bull. You may want to use a stronger connector. In languages that need to put purpose first, you may need to re-order the clauses. Alternate translation: “And you shall offer a bull of purification for atonement daily, thus you shall purify the altar, by making atonement for it.” or “You shall purify the altar by making atonement for it: you shall offer a bull of purification daily for its atonement.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
29:37 pq5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֔ים 1 Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
29:37 qk5h יִקְדָּֽשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “will also become set apart”
29:38 e4r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּנֵֽי־שָׁנָ֛ה 1 # General Information:\n\nThe phrase **sons of a year** is an idiom meaning one year old. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
29:39 qxst rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בֵּ֥ין הָעַרְבָּֽיִם 1 # General Information:\n\nThe exact meaning of this phrase is debated. Since the priests ate many of the sacrifices, it may have been offered around the time of the evening meal. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
29:40 x6i4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction וְעִשָּׂרֹ֨ן & רֶ֣בַע & רְבִעִ֥ית 1 A **tenth** means one part out of ten equal parts. A **fourth** means one part out of four equal parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
29:40 nd8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְעִשָּׂרֹ֨ן סֹ֜לֶת 1 Many commentators suggest that this means one tenth of an “ephah” even though “ephah” is not written. If your translation style retains the original measurement words, you may need to insert the word you are using for “ephah” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
29:40 oxsl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume וְעִשָּׂרֹ֨ן סֹ֜לֶת & רֶ֣בַע הַהִ֔ין & רְבִעִ֥ית הַהִ֖ין 1 The values given in the UST are approximations as the exact size of an ephah and a hin is not precisely known. An ephah (the implied measurement) may have been around 22 liters, so this is about 2.2 liters of flour. A hin may have been around 3.7 liters, so this is about one liter of both oil and wine. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
29:41 ibch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בֵּ֣ין הָעַרְבָּ֑יִם 1 The exact meaning of the phrase **between the evenings** is debated. Since the priests ate many of the sacrifices, it may have been offered around the time of the evening meal. See how you translated it in [verse 39](../29/39.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
29:42 j8cg לְדֹרֹ֣תֵיכֶ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md).
29:42 h5r7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 This means in the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
29:43 ic8i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְנִקְדַּ֖שׁ בִּכְבֹדִֽי 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “My awesome presence will dedicate the tent to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
30:intro z3yc 0 # Exodus 30 General Notes\n\nThis chapter is mostly a return to instructions for building worship equipment for the sacred tent.\nThe forms of “you” are mostly singular. However, they again refer to the workmen that Moses will instruct, so you should return to whatever form you have been following in chapters 25-28.\n\n## Structure:\n\n- v. 1-10: Incense altar\n * v. 1-6: Instructions for making the incense altar\n * v. 7-10: Use of the incense altar\n- v. 11-16: Ransom money for taking a census\n- v. 17-21: Instructions for a washbasin\n- v. 22-30: Anointing oil\n * v. 22-25: Instructions for making the oil\n * v. 26-33: Instructions for using the oil\nv- 34-38: Making and using sacred incense\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Atonement\n\nThrough the offering of blood and money, things and people were kept in God’s favor. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/atonement]])\n\n### Holiness\n\nSome items in this chapter became so holy that they could make other things holy. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### Unknown terms\n\nThere are a number of ingredient terms that are unknown even to scholars.
30:1 v8vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual וְעָשִׂ֥יתָ 1 Here, **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
30:2 w56e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown קַרְנֹתָֽיו 1 See how you translated **horns** in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
30:2 a39m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance אַמָּ֨ה & וְאַמָּ֤ה & וְאַמָּתַ֖יִם 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46cm … 46cm … 94cm (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
30:3 d3uu General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md), so see how you translated there.
30:4 qyg4 to be attached to it 0 When translating this verse, you may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles. See [Exo 25:12](../25/12.md), [Exo 25:26](../25/26.md), [Exo 25:27](../25/27.md), & [Exo 27:4](../27/04.md).
30:4 bvxi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְבָתִּ֣ים 1 Here, the word **housings** means that the rings will hold the poles. Since they are where the poles belong for use, they are their house. If you have a similar idiom meaning “place of belonging,” you may use it or you may translate the idea. Alternate translation: “a place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
30:6 ulvn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֣י & לִפְנֵ֣י 1 Here, **before the face of** means in front of. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
30:7 o1zo בַּבֹּ֣קֶר בַּבֹּ֗קֶר 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “Each morning” or “Daily, in the morning”
30:7 l2rl בְּהֵיטִיב֛וֹ אֶת־הַנֵּרֹ֖ת 1 # General Information:\n\nThe lamps had burned overnight and weren’t needed during the day, so he would put them out and do whatever maintenance was required for them to be ready to burn again in the evening. Alternate translation: “trims the lamps”
30:8 nrgk וּבְהַעֲלֹ֨ת אַהֲרֹ֧ן אֶת־הַנֵּרֹ֛ת 1 This may indicate that in the morning Aaron had taken the lamps down, and he would light them and then put them up on the holders in the evening.
30:8 sq7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בֵּ֥ין הָעֲרְבַּ֖יִם 1 The exact meaning of this phrase is debated. See how you translated it in [29:39](../29/39.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
30:8 qm7i לְדֹרֹתֵיכֶֽם 1 Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md).
30:9 ckf9 לֹא־תַעֲל֥וּ עָלָ֛יו קְטֹ֥רֶת זָרָ֖ה וְעֹלָ֣ה וּמִנְחָ֑ה 1 Later, in [verses 34](../30/34.md) and following, God describes how to make the one sort of incense that he wants burnt on this altar. Alternate translation: “You shall only offer up the kind of incense I tell you. You shall not make burnt or grain offerings on it.”
30:10 dgny rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים ה֖וּא לַיהוָֽה 1 This last clause defines the purpose of the ritual described in this verse. See [Exo 29:37](../29/37.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternate translation: “This is to make it holy of holies to Yahweh.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
30:10 k6xk קַרְנֹתָ֔יו 1 These were projections that looked like ox horns and were attached to the four corners of the altar. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md).
30:10 san2 לְדֹרֹ֣תֵיכֶ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md).
30:10 jxn0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים 1 Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
30:10 uxb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks לַיהוָֽה 1 After **Yahweh**, the direct quote that began in [Exo 25:2](../25/02.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
30:12 dprx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom תִשָּׂ֞א אֶת־רֹ֥אשׁ 1 In this context, **lift up the head** means to take a census. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “take a census” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
30:12 s73c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you תִשָּׂ֞א 1 This could mean: (1) **you** refers to Moses and the leaders of Israel in future generations when they take a census or (2) **you** refers to just Moses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
30:12 k5p1 אִ֣ישׁ 1 The leaders only counted the Israelite men.
30:13 y1kn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כָּל־הָעֹבֵר֙ עַל־הַפְּקֻדִ֔ים 1 This is an idiom that suggests that the men were counted by walking past someone who was counting people as they walked by. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Everyone counted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
30:13 i4wk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight הַשֶּׁ֖קֶל & בְּשֶׁ֣קֶל & גֵּרָה֙ הַשֶּׁ֔קֶל & הַשֶּׁ֔קֶל 1 The **shekel** and the **gerah** are units of weight. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
30:13 a2py rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney הַשֶּׁ֖קֶל & בְּשֶׁ֣קֶל & הַשֶּׁ֔קֶל & הַשֶּׁ֔קֶל 1 The **shekel** was used as both a weight and a unit of money. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
30:13 w3hx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction מַחֲצִ֥ית & מַחֲצִ֣ית 1 A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
30:13 nfp6 בְּשֶׁ֣קֶל הַקֹּ֑דֶשׁ עֶשְׂרִ֤ים גֵּרָה֙ הַשֶּׁ֔קֶל 1 There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time. This specified which one was to be used.
30:14 uqt6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כֹּ֗ל הָעֹבֵר֙ עַל־הַפְּקֻדִ֔ים 1 This is an idiom that suggests that the men were counted by walking past someone who was counting people as they walked by. It is the same phrase as in the [previous verse](../30/13.md). Alternate translation: “Everyone counted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
30:14 vhim rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מִבֶּ֛ן עֶשְׂרִ֥ים שָׁנָ֖ה 1 This is an idiom that refers to age. See the UST and how you translated the same idiom in [Exo 7:7](../07/07.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
30:14 k4h9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבֶּ֛ן עֶשְׂרִ֥ים שָׁנָ֖ה וָמָ֑עְלָה 1 Larger numbers are spoken of as being up or above smaller numbers. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from twenty years old and more” or “who is twenty years old or older” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
30:15 e8xa rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney מִֽמַּחֲצִ֖ית הַשָּׁ֑קֶל 1 See how you translated this in [Exodus 3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
30:15 ew8p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person נַפְשֹׁתֵיכֶֽם 1 The plural form of you is used here. In many cases, since Yahweh is speaking to Moses about the people that will be counted, it may make more sense to change to the third person. However, Moses would be counted as well and would have to pay the ransom, so a form of you that could include Moses and all the other Israelite men would also be an appropriate translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
30:16 z6tn וְהָיָה֩ לִבְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֤ל לְזִכָּרוֹן֙ לִפְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה לְכַפֵּ֖ר עַל־נַפְשֹׁתֵיכֶֽם 1 This sentence is very unclear. It is not clear who is being reminded of what. This could mean: (1) that it will remind Yahweh that the Israelites have given money for their lives, and therefore he should welcome them. (2) that it will remind the Israelites that they have given Yahweh money for their lives. Therefore, Yahweh will welcome them.
30:16 mwix rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
30:18 bh82 וְכַנּ֥וֹ 1 The **base** is what the basin would be put upon.
30:18 iq8n לְרָחְצָ֑ה 1 This phrase, **for washing**, explains the purpose for which the priests were to use the bronze basin.
30:19 ivb1 מִמֶּ֑נּוּ 1 Alternate translation: “in the water in the basin”
30:20 dyku rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְלֹ֣א יָמֻ֑תוּ 1 The priests might die if they do not wash because God would kill them for being defiled in his presence. If your readers would not understand this you may want to include it in a footnote or in the text. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
30:20 it0h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal וְלֹ֣א יָמֻ֑תוּ 1 Not dying is the goal of the priests’ washing. If the goal of some action needs to be placed elsewhere in the structure of your language move it to the usual location. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
30:21 hp35 וְהָיְתָ֨ה לָהֶ֧ם חָק־עוֹלָ֛ם ל֥וֹ וּלְזַרְע֖וֹ לְדֹרֹתָֽם 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:17](../12/17.md).
30:23 m9g7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּשָׂמִ֣ים 1 These are parts of dried plants (other than the leaves) which people grind into a powder and put in oil or food to give it a nice smell or flavor. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:6](../25/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
30:23 zq43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis חֲמֵ֣שׁ מֵא֔וֹת & חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים וּמָאתָ֑יִם & חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים וּמָאתָֽיִם 1 [The next verse](../30/24.md) mentions that these are shekel weight measurements. You may want to include some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “500 shekels … 250 shekels … 250 shekels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
30:23 xga2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְקִנְּמָן 1 We know that **cinnamon** is a sweet spice taken from the inside of the bark of a tree that grows in south-east Asia. [See Wikipeda](https://wikipedia.org/wiki/Cinnamon) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
30:23 t2me rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וּקְנֵה 1 This plant is unknown to scholars. Alternate translation: “and reed of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
30:24 p9jh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְקִדָּ֕ה 1 It is known that **cassia** is a sweet spice taken from the bark of a tree that grows in east Asia. It is slightly different than the spice cinnamon in the previous verse. [See Wikipeda](https://wikipedia.org/wiki/Cinnamomum_cassia) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
30:24 n38f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight בְּשֶׁ֣קֶל הַקֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time. This specified which one was to be used. See how you translated this in [Exodus 30:13](../30/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
30:24 dv89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume הִֽין 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the quantity in modern measurements. Alternatively, to help your readers recognize that the biblical writings come from long ago when people used different measurements, you could express the amount using the ancient measurement, the **hin**, and explain the equivalent in modern measurements in a footnote.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
30:25 k3s5 מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה רֹקֵ֑חַ 1 This could mean: (1) Moses was to have an ointment mixer do the work. (2) Moses was to do the work himself the way an ointment mixer would do it.
30:25 yv9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown רֹקֵ֑חַ 1 This is a person who is skilled in mixing spices and oils. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
30:25 ioem rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns שֶׁ֥מֶן מִשְׁחַת־קֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a holy oil of anointment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
30:26 u241 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you וּמָשַׁחְתָּ֥ 1 Here, **you** may refer to Moses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
30:29 np7g אֹתָ֔ם 1 Here, **them** refers to the items listed in [Exodus 30:26-28](../30/26.md).
30:29 m062 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֑ים 1 Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
30:31 k4s7 לְדֹרֹתֵיכֶֽם 1 Alternate translation: “all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md).
30:31 e2ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns שֶׁ֠מֶן מִשְׁחַת־קֹ֨דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in [30:25](../30/25.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
30:32 rlk4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive עַל־בְּשַׂ֤ר אָדָם֙ לֹ֣א יִיסָ֔ךְ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You shall not pour it on the body of a man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
30:32 v3br וּבְמַ֨תְכֻּנְתּ֔וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “and … with the same ingredients” or “and … with the same items” or “and … according to this recipe”
30:32 it0x rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result קֹ֣דֶשׁ ה֔וּא קֹ֖דֶשׁ יִהְיֶ֥ה לָכֶֽם 1 The second half of this statement (**it shall be holy to you**) explains to the people the result of this oil being holy, which is, they must respect it as a holy thing. It may make more sense in some languages to move this whole statement to the beginning of the verse, because the rule about pouring on someone’s body is an application of the result. Alternate translation (placed at the beginning of the verse): “Because it is sacred, you must treat it like it is sacred, therefore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
30:33 pa53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְנִכְרַ֖ת מֵעַמָּֽיו 1 See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
30:33 yhgi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְנִכְרַ֖ת מֵעַמָּֽיו 1 See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
30:34 uo57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown נָטָ֤ף׀ וּשְׁחֵ֨לֶת֙ וְחֶלְבְּנָ֔ה 1 # General Information:\n\nHere is a brief description of these materials, though we really do not know exactly what they are: **stacte** is a resin from certain gum plants, **onycha** is from certain shellfish or mollusks, and **galbanum** is another kind of gum resin. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
30:35 y8yj וְעָשִׂ֤יתָ אֹתָהּ֙ קְטֹ֔רֶת רֹ֖קַח מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה רוֹקֵ֑חַ 1 This could mean: (1) Moses was to have a perfumer do the work or (2) Moses was to do the work himself the way a perfumer would do it. See how you translated these words in [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md).
30:36 mxww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy הָעֵדֻת֙ 1 Here, **testimony** probably refers to the sacred chest that contained the tablets of the law. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
30:36 i71b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֖ים 1 Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
30:36 t8y9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual לָכֶֽם 1 Here, **you** is plural and refers to Moses and all the people. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
30:37 dq6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual תַעֲשׂ֖וּ 1 The word **you** here refers to the people of Israel. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
30:37 yv1y בְּמַ֨תְכֻּנְתָּ֔הּ 1 Alternate translation: “with the same ingredients” or “with the same items.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 30:32](../30/32.md).
30:37 wh25 קֹ֛דֶשׁ תִּהְיֶ֥ה לְךָ֖ לַיהוָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “You must consider it to be most holy”
30:38 xn6v לְהָרִ֣יחַ בָּ֑הּ 1 This could mean: (1) to enjoy the scent for oneself (2) to wear as a perfume.
30:38 sa1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְנִכְרַ֖ת מֵעַמָּֽיו 1 See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
30:38 o6v0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְנִכְרַ֖ת מֵעַמָּֽיו 1 See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
31:intro wfk7 0 # Exodus 31 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-11: Selection of the skilled craftsmen\n- v. 12-17: Sabbath instruction\n- v. 18: the end of Exodus’ recording of the law of Moses (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Sabbath\n\nAs described in this chapter, the Sabbath is more than just a day of worship or celebration. Its significance extends beyond a way to help people rest. It is a major part of the identity of the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])
31:2 m8ju rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom קָרָ֣אתִֽי בְשֵׁ֑ם 1 Yahweh speaks of choosing specific people as calling them by name. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I have chosen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
31:2 hf5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בְּצַלְאֵ֛ל & אוּרִ֥י & ח֖וּר 1 These are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
31:3 f7sk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וָאֲמַלֵּ֥א אֹת֖וֹ ר֣וּחַ אֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 Yahweh speaks of giving Bezalel his spirit as if Bezalel were a container and God’s spirit were a liquid. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have given my spirit to Bezalel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
31:3 hley rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בְּחָכְמָ֛ה 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **skill** in another way. Alternate translation: “so he can work skillfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
31:3 my4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּבִתְבוּנָ֥ה 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **understanding** in another way. Alternate translation: “and so he can understand his work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
31:3 emp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּבְדַ֖עַת 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** in another way. Alternate translation: “and so he knows his work well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
31:3 r6i5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּבְכָל־מְלָאכָֽה 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **craftsmanship** in another way. Alternate translation: “and for making all kinds of crafts” or “and so that he can make all kinds of things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
31:6 jh61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אָהֳלִיאָ֞ב & אֲחִֽיסָמָךְ֙ 1 These are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
31:6 wcq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּבְלֵ֥ב כָּל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב נָתַ֣תִּי חָכְמָ֑ה 1 God speaks of making people able to make things as if he were putting the ability into their hearts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I have given skill to all who are wise” or “I have made all who are wise able to make things well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
31:11 iusb rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns יַעֲשֽׂוּ 1 **They** refers to Bezalel and Oholiab as well as the unnamed other “skilled of heart” (talented craftsmen) referred to in [verse 2](../31/02.md) and [verse 6](../30/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
31:13 bveg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks לֵאמֹ֔ר 1 A second-level direct quotation starts after **saying**. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. There are multiple possible endings for this quotation, which will be addressed in later verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
31:13 i1lw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אַ֥ךְ אֶת־שַׁבְּתֹתַ֖י תִּשְׁמֹ֑רוּ 1 Yahweh uses the phrase **keep my Sabbaths** as a metaphor for obeying his instructions about the Sabbath, as if it was a precious thing they should guard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “You must certainly obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
31:13 gw13 לְדֹרֹ֣תֵיכֶ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md).
31:14 dsya rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks לָכֶ֑ם 1 One possible ending place for the second-level quotation that began in the previous verse is after **to you**. The rest of Yahweh’s instructions to Moses in this section do not use the second person to address Israel directly, so you may close the second-level quotation here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
31:14 plq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive מ֣וֹת יוּמָ֔ת 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely kill” or “you must surely execute” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
31:14 fz1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְנִכְרְתָ֛ה 1 See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
31:15 fvga rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּבַיּ֣וֹם הַשְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but day 7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
31:15 fxuo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely kill” or “you must surely execute” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
31:16 t9hw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְשָׁמְר֥וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל אֶת־הַשַּׁבָּ֑ת 1 Yahweh uses the phrase **keep my Sabbaths** as a metaphor for obeying his instructions about the Sabbath, as if it was a precious thing they should guard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel must obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
31:16 n7q2 לְדֹרֹתָ֖ם 1 See how you translated “throughout their people’s generations” in [Exodus 12:42](../12/42.md). Alternate translation: “; they and all the generations of their descendants must observe it.”
31:16 yef8 בְּרִ֥ית עוֹלָֽם 1 Alternate translation: “A covenant that will always exist” or “A lasting covenant”
31:17 oc30 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַיִּנָּפַֽשׁ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and he refreshed himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
31:18 xc6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כְּתֻבִ֖ים בְּאֶצְבַּ֥ע אֱלֹהִֽים 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which Yahweh wrote on with his own hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
32:intro vv2w 0 # Exodus 32 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThe events in verses 1-6 of this chapter occured while Moses spoke with God and therefore happened sometime during the events recorded between Exodus 24:15 and Exodus 31. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])\n\n- v. 1-6: The people ask Aaron to make them a god and he makes the golden calf\n- v. 7-29 - Yahweh and Moses’ reaction\n * v. 11-14 - Moses intercedes for the people\n- v. 30-34 - Moses intercedes for the people\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 32:18.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Idolatry\n\nThe making of the golden calf was considered a form of idolatry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
32:1 oan6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent the people saw 0 This chapter begins with a major scene shift, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
32:1 cfk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיַּ֣רְא הָעָ֔ם 1 Here, the word **saw** is used to indicate understanding or realization of a situation. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And the people realized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
32:1 lnau rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns וַיִּקָּהֵ֨ל הָעָ֜ם 1 This means the people both decided to gather and were the ones gathering. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
32:1 k2i1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ק֣וּם 1 **Arise** strengthens the force of the command following it. The people were demanding that Aaron make an idol for them. It did not necessarily mean that he should literally stand up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
32:1 mrb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יֵֽלְכוּ֙ לְפָנֵ֔ינוּ 1 Here, **before our faces** means ahead of. The Israelites want idols to lead them. Alternate translation: “shall lead us” or “shall be our leader” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
32:1 wulk כִּי־זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה 1 People showed disrespect by putting the word **this** before his name, as if Moses were someone they did not know and could not trust. They were creating social distance between him and themselves. When translating, use a form in your language that communicates the same sense of disassociation between people.
32:2 p86s rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns וְהָבִ֖יאוּ 1 Here, **them** refers to the golden rings. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
32:3 ckg2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole כָּל־הָעָ֔ם 1 This refers to all the people who rejected Moses as their leader and Yahweh as their God. Later parts of the text reveal that there were people still faithful to Moses and Yahweh and that the Israelites had a great deal more gold. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that means many or most. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
32:4 uf9e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וַיָּ֤צַר אֹתוֹ֙ בַּחֶ֔רֶט וַֽיַּעֲשֵׂ֖הוּ עֵ֣גֶל מַסֵּכָ֑ה 1 Most likely this means that Aaron melted the gold and poured it into a mold that had the shape of a calf. When the gold cooled and became hard, he removed the mold, and the hardened gold had the shape of a calf. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
32:4 cc7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns וַיֹּ֣אמְר֔וּ 1 The identity of the speakers, referred to as **they**, remains unknown. Alternate translation: “And someone said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
32:4 ence rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨יךָ֙ & הֶעֱל֖וּךָ 1 Because the speaker of this sentence is unknown and mentioned in the plural, it is possible that it is the people speaking. In that case, it would be possible for a translation to use the first person rather than second person here. Alternate translation: “These are our gods … brought us up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
32:4 n17v אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨יךָ֙ 1 In the text, there only appears to be one “god” (the golden calf idol) presented to Israel. If it would be clearer to your audience, you may consider translating **these … gods** as singular. Alternate translation: “this is your god”
32:5 ztx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַיַּ֣רְא אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what he saw explicitly. “Aaron saw what the people did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
32:5 odaq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְפָנָ֑יו 1 Here, **before its face** means in front of. Alternate translation: “in front of it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
32:5 p2df rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit לְפָנָ֑יו 1 Here, **it** is the golden bull-calf. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in front of the bull-calf idol” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
32:6 as6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism לְצַחֵֽק 1 This word may imply drunken and sexual sin (for a sexual implication see [Genesis 26:8](../GEN/26/08)). However, the only actions mentioned in the text are singing ([v. 18](../32/18.md)) and dancing ([v. 19](../32/19.md)), so translators should avoid using a term that is overly suggestive. Alternate translation: “to revel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
32:7 iajs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent to carouse in wild celebration 0 Here there is a scene shift back to the top of the mountain with Moses and Yahweh, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
32:7 tcek rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns שִׁחֵ֣ת 1 Here, **themselves** is used to indicate that the Israelites actions made the Israelites corrupt. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “have acted corruptly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
32:8 eua5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor סָ֣רוּ מַהֵ֗ר מִן־הַדֶּ֨רֶךְ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר צִוִּיתִ֔ם 1 Here God speaks of the people disobeying what he commanded them as if he had told them to walk on a certain road, and they left that road. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They have quickly stopped doing what I commanded them to do” or “They have quickly stopped obeying what I commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
32:8 tg9e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨יךָ֙ יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל אֲשֶׁ֥ר הֶֽעֱל֖וּךָ מֵאֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This is a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
32:8 w7v8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨יךָ֙ יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל אֲשֶׁ֥ר הֶֽעֱל֖וּךָ מֵאֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 You may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “that these are your gods, Israel, that brought you up from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
32:8 sjj1 אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨יךָ֙ 1 In the text, there only appears to be one “god” (the golden calf idol) presented to Israel. If it would be clearer to your audience, you may consider translating **these … gods** as singular. See how you translated this in [verse 4](../32/04.md). Alternate translation: “This is your god”
32:8 f62v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אֱלֹהֶ֨יךָ֙ & הֶֽעֱל֖וּךָ 1 Because the speaker of this sentence is unknown and mentioned in the plural, it is possible that it is the people speaking. In that case, it would be possible for a translation to use the first person rather than second person here. See how you translated this in [verse 4](../32/04.md). Alternate translation: “our gods … brought us up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
32:9 ffe2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor עַם־קְשֵׁה־עֹ֖רֶף 1 Yahweh speaks of the people being rebellious as if they had hard necks. The image comes from an animal that does not want to go the way his master is trying to direct him (not going in the way God commanded). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is a rebellious people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
32:9 my87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns הַזֶּ֔ה & הֽוּא 1 The word **people** is a collective noun, so the pronouns referring to the people are singular. You may use plural pronouns if that is the normal usage in your language. Alternate translation: “these … they” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
32:10 fmk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְעַתָּה֙ 1 **So now** is used here to mark that Yahweh’s next statements are a result of what he has said in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
32:10 sd9w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְיִֽחַר־אַפִּ֥י בָהֶ֖ם 1 This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh is angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And let me be angry with them”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
32:11 h62e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion לָמָ֤ה יְהוָה֙ יֶחֱרֶ֤ה אַפְּךָ֙ בְּעַמֶּ֔ךָ אֲשֶׁ֤ר הוֹצֵ֨אתָ֙ מֵאֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם בְּכֹ֥חַ גָּד֖וֹל וּבְיָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 Moses used this question to try to persuade Yahweh not to be so angry with his people. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, do not let your nose burn against your people whom you have brought out from the land of Egypt with great power and with a strong hand.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
32:11 nuwf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom יֶחֱרֶ֤ה אַפְּךָ֙ בְּעַמֶּ֔ךָ 1 This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh is angry with his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “are you angry with your people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
32:11 t2cv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet בְּכֹ֥חַ גָּד֖וֹל וּבְיָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 These two phrases share similar meanings and are combined for emphasis. If doubling in this way would not convey emphasis in your language, you will need to find a way to translate it that does give emphasis. Alternate translation: “using your very strong power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
32:11 ph43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וּבְיָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 Here, **hand** represents God’s actions or works. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “and with powerful works” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
32:12 r8ij rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion לָמָּה֩ יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵאמֹ֗ר בְּרָעָ֤ה הֽוֹצִיאָם֙ לַהֲרֹ֤ג אֹתָם֙ בֶּֽהָרִ֔ים וּ֨לְכַלֹּתָ֔ם מֵעַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽאֲדָמָ֑ה 1 Moses used this question to try to persuade God not to destroy his people. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: If you destroy your people, the Egyptians might say, ‘He brought them out with evil intent, to kill them in the mountains and to destroy them from on the face of the ground.’ (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
32:12 yvez rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵאמֹ֗ר בְּרָעָ֤ה הֽוֹצִיאָם֙ לַהֲרֹ֤ג אֹתָם֙ בֶּֽהָרִ֔ים וּ֨לְכַלֹּתָ֔ם מֵעַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽאֲדָמָ֑ה 1 After **saying,** this is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “the Egyptians say that you brought them out with evil intent, to kill them in the mountains and to destroy them from on the face of the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
32:12 kzh7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מֵעַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽאֲדָמָ֑ה 1 Here, **face** means “surface.” Alternate translation: “from the surface of the land” or “from the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
32:12 fns1 שׁ֚וּב מֵחֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔ךָ 1 Alternate translation: “Stop your burning anger” or “Stop being so angry”
32:12 iz5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom שׁ֚וּב מֵחֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔ךָ וְהִנָּחֵ֥ם עַל־הָרָעָ֖ה לְעַמֶּֽךָ 1 Here, Yahweh’s anger (burning nose) and plan to punish the people are spoken of as things that he could turn away from and repent of (repentance also means to turn from). This imagery may not translate into your language, and you may need to use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Calm down, and please do not stay determined to do evil to your people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
32:12 p1df rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מֵחֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔ךָ 1 This is an idiom that means anger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from your terrible anger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
32:13 p8jq נִשְׁבַּ֣עְתָּ 1 Alternate translation: “you made an oath”
32:13 q1g1 וְכָל־הָאָ֨רֶץ הַזֹּ֜את אֲשֶׁ֣ר אָמַ֗רְתִּי אֶתֵּן֙ לְזַרְעֲכֶ֔ם 1 That is, the land of Canaan.
32:15 cx7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive לֻחֹ֗ת כְּתֻבִים֙ מִשְּׁנֵ֣י עֶבְרֵיהֶ֔ם מִזֶּ֥ה וּמִזֶּ֖ה הֵ֥ם כְּתֻבִֽים 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh had written on both the sides of the tablets, on this side and on that side he had written.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
32:16 w3ua rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure וְהַ֨לֻּחֹ֔ת מַעֲשֵׂ֥ה אֱלֹהִ֖ים הֵ֑מָּה וְהַמִּכְתָּ֗ב מִכְתַּ֤ב אֱלֹהִים֙ ה֔וּא 1 These two sentences have an unusual structure that places emphasis on **tablets** and **writing**. If your language would emphasize these topics in a different way than moving them to the beginning of the sentence, follow your language’s natural usage for emphasis. Alternate translation: “And the tablets themselves were the work of God. And the writing itself was the writing of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
32:17 cua3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants יְהוֹשֻׁ֛עַ 1 Joshua was last mentioned in [Exodus 24:13](../24/13.md). The text does not say if he was on top of the mountain with Moses or if he waited for him part way up. Consider if your language will need to re-introduce Joshua in any way here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
32:18 r0gm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry אֵ֥ין קוֹל֙ עֲנ֣וֹת גְּבוּרָ֔ה וְאֵ֥ין ק֖וֹל עֲנ֣וֹת חֲלוּשָׁ֑ה ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ 1 These lines are widely considered to be poetic. It is not clear why a poetic form is used here. In some languages it may not be appropriate to convey this response in poetic form, in which case another form may be used. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
32:18 m4k0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism אֵ֥ין קוֹל֙ עֲנ֣וֹת גְּבוּרָ֔ה וְאֵ֥ין ק֖וֹל עֲנ֣וֹת חֲלוּשָׁ֑ה ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ 1 The poetic form here is parallelism in the repetition of **sound of singing**. If it would be unclear to say that Moses heard **the sound of singing** in the third line after saying he didn’t hear the sound of singing twice before, something more like the more contrastive UST may be followed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
32:18 fdg8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ 1 If it is unclear to say that Moses hears **the sound of singing** after twice saying he didn’t hear that, you may want to make the type of singing explicit. Consider referring to your translation of the last word of [verse 6](../32/06.md) (to play in the ULT). Alternate translation: “the sound of playful singing I hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
32:19 hr2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַיִּֽחַר־אַ֣ף מֹשֶׁ֗ה 1 This is an idiom for being angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and Moses was very angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
32:19 d8zo תַּ֥חַת 1 Alternate translation: “at the bottom of”
32:21 du5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes וַיֹּ֤אמֶר מֹשֶׁה֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן מֶֽה־עָשָׂ֥ה לְךָ֖ הָעָ֣ם הַזֶּ֑ה כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖יו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה׃ 1 Moses’ question is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternate translation: “Then Moses asked Aaron what the people did to him, that he had brought such a great sin on them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
32:21 np73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖יו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה 1 Moses spoke of causing people to **sin** as if sin were an object and Aaron put it **on them**. Alternate translation: “that you have caused them to sin greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
32:22 z2ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אַל־יִ֥חַר אַ֖ף 1 This is an idiom for anger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not be angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
32:22 vdy2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כִּ֥י בְרָ֖ע הֽוּא 1 This is probably an idiom that could mean (1) that the people are prone to evil or (2) that the people were in trouble (that is, they felt troubled because of not having contact with God). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “that they are set on evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
32:22 h6dm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person הֽוּא 1 Here, **it** is used because **people** is grammatically singular in Hebrew. Alternate translation: “they are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
32:23 w91d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes עֲשֵׂה־לָ֣נוּ אֱלֹהִ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֵלְכ֖וּ לְפָנֵ֑ינוּ כִּי־זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה הָאִ֗ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱלָ֨נוּ֙ מֵאֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם לֹ֥א יָדַ֖עְנוּ מֶה־הָ֥יָה לֽוֹ׃ 1 This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
32:23 zn68 זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה הָאִ֗ישׁ 1 People showed disrespect by putting the word **this** before his name, as if Moses were someone they did not know and could not trust. They were creating social distance between him and themselves. When translating, use a form in your language that communicates the same sense of disassociation between people. See how you translated this in [verse 1](../32/01.md).
32:24 yq7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes וָאֹמַ֤ר לָהֶם֙ לְמִ֣י זָהָ֔ב הִתְפָּרָ֖קוּ 1 **Whoever has gold, take it off yourself** is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, this can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “So I told them that whoever had any gold should take it off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
32:24 yy82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns הִתְפָּרָ֖קוּ 1 Aaron instructs people to take their own gold off. Alternate translation: “you take off your own” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
32:24 wvin rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וָאַשְׁלִכֵ֣הוּ בָאֵ֔שׁ וַיֵּצֵ֖א הָעֵ֥גֶל הַזֶּֽה 1 Aaron claims an unusual sequence of events here. The translation should surprise an audience unfamiliar with the story. He states that the result of simply throwing gold in the fire is the apperance (by its own power or volition it seems) of the calf. This is a lie. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
32:25 ck1f פָרֻ֖עַ 1 Alternate translation: “were behaving wildly” or “were not controlling themselves”
32:25 csg0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns כִּ֥י פָרֻ֖עַ ה֑וּא כִּֽי־פְרָעֹ֣ה אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 Here, the pronoun **it** agrees with the grammatical number of **people** (singular). If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “that they were let loose, for Aaron had let them loose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
32:26 jis7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיֹּ֕אמֶר מִ֥י לַיהוָ֖ה אֵלָ֑י 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “and said that whoever was for Yahweh should come to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
32:26 ryb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מִ֥י לַיהוָ֖ה 1 Moses speaks of being loyal to Yahweh as being **for Yahweh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever serves Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
32:27 xsl3 עִבְר֨וּ וָשׁ֜וּבוּ מִשַּׁ֤עַר לָשַׁ֨עַר֙ בַּֽמַּחֲנֶ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “Go from one side of the camp to the other, starting at one entrance to the camp and going to the entrance on the other side of the camp”
32:29 to5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מִלְא֨וּ יֶדְכֶ֤ם 1 This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). However, this usage is different from that text, as here it is not specified what authority they are given or what they are consecrated for other than **for Yahweh**. Alternate translation: “Consecrate yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
32:29 rkp6 מִלְא֨וּ יֶדְכֶ֤ם הַיּוֹם֙ לַֽיהוָ֔ה 1 Here it is unclear if **fill** should be rightly understood as in the past or as a new command. You may want to follow the decision of another translation your people are familiar with. Alternate translation: “You have filled your hand for Yahweh today”
32:29 c6fg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כִּ֛י אִ֥ישׁ בִּבְנ֖וֹ וּבְאָחִ֑יו 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the fact that they did this in obedience to God explicitly. Alternate translation: “For you have obeyed Yahweh, because each man was against his son and against his brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
32:29 l54l וְלָתֵ֧ת עֲלֵיכֶ֛ם הַיּ֖וֹם בְּרָכָֽה 1 This phrase is difficult to interpret. Several options depend on exactly how the conjunction, preposition, and verb combination are interpreted. The first difficulty is related to the difficulty with the previous verb: have they already been blessed or are they going to be blessed? (Alternate translation: “to have put a blessing on yourselves today”) The second difficulty is: should the clause connections be understood to say that the blessing is because of their actions, or more strongly, that a desire for blessing motivated them to take action? (Alternate translation: “and therefore a blessing is put on you today” or “so that a blessing may be put over you today”) The third difficulty is: while ultimately all blessing is from Yahweh, which is the subject here, Yahweh or the Levites? (Alternate translation: “and so Yahweh is putting a blessing on you today”) As with the previous clause, you may want to follow the decision of another translation your people are familiar with. Alternate translation: “, by that you brought blessing on yourselves”
32:30 kvj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet חֲטָאתֶ֖ם חֲטָאָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה 1 Here, **sin** used as a verb and then repeated as a noun for emphasis. Along with **great**, it suggests that the people sinned very, very badly. If the repetition of words in this way would not create emphasis, use another form in your language that would. Alternate translation: “You have sinned extremally badly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
32:30 r5fn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns חֲטָאתֶ֖ם חֲטָאָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for **sin**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
32:31 ccpg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet חָטָ֞א הָעָ֤ם הַזֶּה֙ חֲטָאָ֣ה 1 Here, **sin** is used as a verb and then repeated as a noun for emphasis. Along with **great**, it suggests that the people sinned very, very badly. If the repetition of words in this way would not create emphasis, use another form in your language that would. Alternate translation: “this people has sinned extremely badly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
32:31 y049 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns חֲטָאָ֣ה 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for **sin**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
32:32 brpu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis וְעַתָּ֖ה אִם־תִּשָּׂ֣א חַטָּאתָ֑ם 1 Moses leaves out his conclusion, perhaps as a way of making this conditional phrase into a request, or perhaps to avoid suggesting to God what would be good for him to do. However, if leaving out a conclusion would be misunderstood in your language you may need to rephrase it or add the implied conclusion. Alternate translation: “But now, if you forgive their sin, good!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
32:32 c72y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מְחֵ֣נִי 1 Here, **me** refers to the name of Moses. Alternate translation: “erase my name from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
32:32 ahb3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר כָּתָֽבְתָּ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what God had written in the book explicitly. Alternate translation: “in which you have written the names of your people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
32:33 igb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶמְחֶ֖נּוּ מִסִּפְרִֽי 1 Here, **him** represents that person’s name. Alternate translation: “I will erase that person’s name from my book” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
32:33 qwk9 מִסִּפְרִֽי 1 This refers to the book of Yahweh that Moses spoke of in [Exodus 32:32](../32/32.md).
32:34 xn8p rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וּבְי֣וֹם פָּקְדִ֔י וּפָקַדְתִּ֥י עֲלֵיהֶ֖ם חַטָּאתָֽם 1 Yahweh makes it clear that he will punish the people because they sinned by making and worshiping the idol. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “However, because they sinned, one day I will come to punish them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
32:35 wv1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָעֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן 1 The people are being spoken of as having made the calf themselves (along with Aaron) because they demanded it and gave their gold for it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they were guilty along with Aaron of making the calf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
32:35 h3kl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וַיִּגֹּ֥ף יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־הָעָ֑ם עַ֚ל אֲשֶׁ֣ר עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָעֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “And because they had made the calf (that Aaron made), Yahweh plagued the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
33:intro g5k3 0 # Exodus 33 General Notes\n\nThis chapter is largely about Moses continuing to negotiate for a closer relationship between Yahweh and himself and Yahweh and the people. There are a number of important theological issues addressed, especially Yahweh’s holiness and character. Several key terms appear.\n\n## Structure:\n\n- v. 1-6: Moses negotiating with Yahweh to go with Israel\n- v. 7-11: the temporary tent of meeting\n- v. 12-23: Moses negotiating with Yahweh to see his glory\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\nYahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4, so in some languages you may need to reverse them.\n\nVerses 7-11 seem to be background, general information about a somewhat unspecified time period. Be sure this is clear in how you structure these verses. See the beginning of verse 7 in the UST. While the term in verses 7-11 is often used interchangeably with the Dwelling that will be built in chapters 35-39, it is a temporary and different tent. One distinguishing feature is that it is well outside the camp, while the Dwelling will be in the center of the camp.\n\nThe word **tent** in verses 7-11 refers either to this temporary “tent of meeting” that Moses set up or to the tents that the Israelites lived in. Pay attention throughout these verses to which tent is referred to.
33:1 p8xp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes לֵאמֹ֔ר לְזַרְעֲךָ֖ אֶתְּנֶֽנָּה 1 # General Information:\n\nThe words which follow **saying** are a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
33:2 tlen וְשָׁלַחְתִּ֥י לְפָנֶ֖יךָ מַלְאָ֑ךְ וְגֵֽרַשְׁתִּ֗י אֶת־הַֽכְּנַעֲנִי֙ הָֽאֱמֹרִ֔י וְהַֽחִתִּי֙ וְהַפְּרִזִּ֔י הַחִוִּ֖י וְהַיְבוּסִֽי 1 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated these in [Exodus 23:20](../23/20.md) and [23:23](../23/23.md).
33:3 yyt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּדְבָ֑שׁ 1 Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. See how you translated this in [Exodus 3:8](../03/08.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
33:3 y347 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּדְבָ֑שׁ 1 God spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the milk and honey from those animals and plants were flowing through the land. See how you translated this in [Exodus 3:8](../03/08.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
33:3 ah5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor קְשֵׁה־עֹ֨רֶף֙ 1 Yahweh speaks of the people being rebellious as if they had **hard necks**. See how you translated this in [Exodus 32:9](../32/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
33:4 jemj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations וְלֹא־שָׁ֛תוּ אִ֥ישׁ עֶדְי֖וֹ עָלָֽיו 1 Here, **his** and **him** refer to both men and women. Alternate translation: “and the men and women did not put on their ornaments” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
33:4 cf7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown עֶדְי֖וֹ 1 This may have referred to beautiful clothing as well as chains and rings made from gold or silver that had could have had jewels in them. Alternate translation: “his adornments” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
33:4 qwuu rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge jewelry 0 Yahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4, so in some languages you may need to reverse them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
33:5 rn40 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events וַיֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 The word **had** places Yahweh’s statement back in time. It can be understood from context as Yahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4. If you are reversing the order of the verses for your language, you should adjust the verbal sequencing in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
33:5 ndhx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations אֱמֹ֤ר אֶל־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ 1 You may want to make the introductory portion of this quotation,**Say to the sons of Israel**, indirect to keep from having a quote inside a quote. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
33:5 rzr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor קְשֵׁה־עֹ֔רֶף 1 Yahweh speaks of the people being rebellious as if they had **hard necks**. See how you translated this in [Exodus 32:9](../32/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
33:5 hakp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical רֶ֧גַע אֶחָ֛ד אֶֽעֱלֶ֥ה בְקִרְבְּךָ֖ וְכִלִּיתִ֑יךָ וְעַתָּ֗ה 1 Because the surrounding narrative clearly shows that this is not what Yahweh did or will do, this is a hypothetical situation. Some languages may need to reorder the clauses. Alternate translation: “Since I would destroy if I went up among you for one moment, then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
33:5 l6ax rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal וְעַתָּ֗ה הוֹרֵ֤ד עֶדְיְךָ֙ מֵֽעָלֶ֔יךָ וְאֵדְעָ֖ה מָ֥ה אֶֽעֱשֶׂה־לָּֽךְ 1 The goal of the Israelites removing their ornaments is so that Yahweh can consider his reaction. Some languages may need to reorder this structure. Alternate translation: “So that I will know what I will do to you, take your ornaments down from on you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
33:5 gb16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְעַתָּ֗ה הוֹרֵ֤ד עֶדְיְךָ֙ מֵֽעָלֶ֔יךָ 1 This was a way for the Israelites to show that they were sorry for sinning. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
33:6 tomy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns וַיִּֽתְנַצְּל֧וּ 1 Here, **themselves** refers to the Israelites; they are both the ones doing the action and the ones to whom the action is done. A special form of verb or pronoun may be required to translate this in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
33:6 i0c5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מֵהַ֥ר חוֹרֵֽב׃ 1 Here, **from** means “from that point of time and continuing into the future.” Try to find a form in your language that means “from then on” for your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
33:7 wsfe rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background a stubborn people 0 Verses 7-11 seem to be background, general information about a somewhat unspecified time period. Be sure this is clear in how you structure these verses. See the beginning of verse 7 in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
33:7 fb65 הָאֹ֜הֶל 1 The word **tent** in verses 7-11 refers either to this temporary “tent of meeting” that Moses set up, or to the tents that the Israelites lived in. Pay attention throughout these verses to which tent is being referenced. Here it refers to the “tent of meeting.”
33:8 h2us אָהֳל֑וֹ 1 This refers to the people’s tents.
33:9 yt4f עַמּ֣וּד הֶֽעָנָ֔ן 1 See how you translated this in [13:21](../13/21.md).
33:9 vam7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יֵרֵד֙ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express where the **pillar of cloud would come down** from explicitly. Alternate translation: “would come down from the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
33:9 ghf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְדִבֶּ֖ר 1 Grammatically, the most likely referent for this pronoun is the **pillar of cloud**. By metonymy and based on [verse 11](../33/11.md), this probably refers to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
33:10 nyoe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וְרָאָ֤ה כָל־הָעָם֙ אֶת־עַמּ֣וּד הֶֽעָנָ֔ן עֹמֵ֖ד פֶּ֣תַח הָאֹ֑הֶל וְקָ֤ם כָּל־הָעָם֙ וְהִֽשְׁתַּחֲוּ֔וּ אִ֖ישׁ פֶּ֥תַח אָהֳלֽוֹ 1 This verse uses contrastive parallelism. The presence of Yahweh is represented in the cloud that stands at the entrance of the tent, while the people prostrate themselves at the entrance to their tents. It would be good to try to retain the contrasting image in your translation if possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
33:10 zvaf עַמּ֣וּד הֶֽעָנָ֔ן 1 See how you translated this in [13:21](../13/21.md).
33:10 dm01 אָהֳלֽוֹ 1 This refers to the people’s tents.
33:11 zrb8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor פָּנִ֣ים אֶל־פָּנִ֔ים 1 Speaking directly to each other rather than through dreams and visions is spoken of as if Moses and God saw each other’s faces while they spoke. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yahweh would speak directly to Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
33:11 lqe0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile כַּאֲשֶׁ֛ר יְדַבֵּ֥ר אִ֖ישׁ אֶל־רֵעֵ֑הוּ 1 The metaphor of speaking **face to face** is explained by the simile here. How you translated **face to face** in your language may determine how you should translate this explanation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
33:11 rcsu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants וּמְשָׁ֨רְת֜וֹ יְהוֹשֻׁ֤עַ בִּן־נוּן֙ נַ֔עַר 1 **Joshua** has been introduced before but not mentioned since [Exodus 32:17](../32/17.md). Consider if your language will need to re-introduce Joshua in any way here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
33:12 ohra rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent See 0 A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
33:12 hlsl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations הַ֚עַל אֶת־הָעָ֣ם הַזֶּ֔ה & דַעְתִּ֣יךָֽ בְשֵׁ֔ם וְגַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּעֵינָֽי 1 You may want to make these two second-level quotations indirect to reduce the levels of quotation. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
33:12 unz8 רְ֠אֵה 1 This is an interjection to get someone’s attention. Alternate translation: “Look!” or “Listen!” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you”
33:12 w7fs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom יְדַעְתִּ֣יךָֽ בְשֵׁ֔ם 1 To **know** someone **by name** is to know them well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I know you well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
33:12 uhjs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְגַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּעֵינָֽי 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and my eyes find you favorable” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
33:12 a7jr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְגַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּעֵינָֽי 1 Here, **found favor in my eyes** is an idiom that means “I am pleased with you” so it means that God is pleased with Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and you please me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
33:12 y281 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְגַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּעֵינָֽי 1 Here, **in my eyes** is a metaphor representing God’s evaluation. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and you have also found favor in my evaluation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
33:12 es6z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְגַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּעֵינָֽי 1 Here, **favor** is an abstract noun that you could express in another way if necessary in your language. Alternate translation: “and you have also been found approved in my eyes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
33:13 e6vv מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּעֵינֶ֗יךָ & אֶמְצָא־חֵ֖ן בְּעֵינֶ֑יךָ 1 Here, **found favor in your eyes** is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun **favor** into another form. Finally, **in your eyes** is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase **you have found favor in my eyes** in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md).
33:13 zi7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor הוֹדִעֵ֤נִי נָא֙ אֶת־דְּרָכֶ֔ךָ 1 Here, **ways** is a metaphor either: (1) for Yahweh’s plans or (2) for the holy life he requires. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: (1) “please cause me to know what you are going to do in the future” (2) “please cause me to know how people can do what pleases you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
33:13 gtv4 אֶמְצָא־חֵ֖ן בְּעֵינֶ֑יךָ 1 This instance of the phrase **find favor in your eyes** means in the future. Consider how to translate it in your language to convey an on-going situation. Alternate translation: “I can always find favor in your eyes”
33:13 o1ew וּרְאֵ֕ה כִּ֥י עַמְּךָ֖ הַגּ֥וֹי הַזֶּֽה׃ 1 Moses is requesting that Yahweh would again **see**, perceive, consider, or recognize the Israelites as his special people. In this way, Moses would know that Yahweh had truly forgiven them.
33:14 gh8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy פָּנַ֥י יֵלֵ֖כוּ 1 Yahweh’s **face** represents his presence, which represents himself. Alternate translation: “I will go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
33:14 esdd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit פָּנַ֥י יֵלֵ֖כוּ וַהֲנִחֹ֥תִי לָֽךְ 1 The preposition connected to **you** here has a very flexible meaning and seems to be connected to both **will go** and **will cause rest**. If this would be unclear, consider repeating it in both clauses. Alternate translation: “My face will go with you and I will cause rest for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
33:14 hl15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular לָֽךְ 1 The word **you** here refers to Moses. It is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
33:15 a2hc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical אִם־אֵ֤ין פָּנֶ֨יךָ֙ הֹלְכִ֔ים 1 **If your face is not going** is a hypothetical situation in which Moses makes a request that they not go anywhere without Yahweh. In some languages you may need to place the request first. Alternate translation: “Do not take us up from here if your face is not going” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
33:15 m5cq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אִם־אֵ֤ין פָּנֶ֨יךָ֙ הֹלְכִ֔ים 1 Yahweh’s **face** represents his presence, which represents himself. Alternate translation: “If you are not going” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
33:16 cgl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion וּבַמֶּ֣ה׀ יִוָּדַ֣ע אֵפ֗וֹא כִּֽי־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּעֵינֶ֨יךָ֙ אֲנִ֣י וְעַמֶּ֔ךָ הֲל֖וֹא בְּלֶכְתְּךָ֣ עִמָּ֑נוּ וְנִפְלֵ֨ינוּ֙ אֲנִ֣י וְעַמְּךָ֔ מִכָּ֨ל־הָעָ֔ם אֲשֶׁ֖ר עַל־פְּנֵ֥י הָאֲדָמָֽה 1 This verse contains two or three rhetorical questions, and the length of the second is debated. The first rhetorical question, “**And in what then will it be known that I have found favor in your eyes, I and your people?**” is used for emphasis and means, “There is only one way people will know that I and your people please you.” The second, “**Is it not in your going with us?**” is used to answer the first question and means “That way is your going with us.” It is possible that the rest of the verse is (1) a statement further clarifying how Yahweh’s favor is demonstrated (ULT, UST), (2) an extension of the second rhetorical question (“Is it not in your going with us so that I and your people shall be distinct from all of the people that are on the face of the earth?”), or (3) a separate rhetorical question making the same point (“And shall I and your people be distinct from all of the people that are on the face of the earth?”) Moses used these questions in order to emphasize that if Yahweh does not go with them, no one will know that Yahweh is pleased with Moses and the people. Use whatever forms would be natural in your language to present an argument like this. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
33:16 d36k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure וּבַמֶּ֣ה 1 This refers back to Moses’ hypothetical situation in the previous verse, that is, Yahweh not going with them. Use whatever connecting forms are necessary to make that clear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
33:16 tu8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּבַמֶּ֣ה׀ יִוָּדַ֣ע אֵפ֗וֹא 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And in what then will people know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
33:16 u82a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּעֵינֶ֨יךָ֙ 1 Here, **found favor** is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun **favor** into another form. Finally, **eyes** are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase **you have found favor in my eyes** in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
33:17 chua rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result גַּ֣ם אֶת־הַדָּבָ֥ר הַזֶּ֛ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר דִּבַּ֖רְתָּ אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֑ה כִּֽי־מָצָ֤אתָ חֵן֙ בְּעֵינַ֔י וָאֵדָעֲךָ֖ בְּשֵֽׁם 1 Here, **for** signals a reason clause. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because you have found favor in my eyes, and I know you by name, I will also do this thing that you have spoken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
33:17 ln7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מָצָ֤אתָ חֵן֙ בְּעֵינַ֔י 1 Here, **you have found favor in my eyes** is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun **favor** into another form. Finally, **eyes** are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase **you have found favor in my eyes** in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
33:17 aln2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular מָצָ֤אתָ 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **you** is singular and refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
33:17 u2nv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וָאֵדָעֲךָ֖ בְּשֵֽׁם 1 To know someone by name is to know them well. See how you translated this in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md). Alternate translation: “and I know you well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
33:18 w73v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns כְּבֹדֶֽךָ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
33:19 sx1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֲנִ֨י אַעֲבִ֤יר כָּל־טוּבִי֙ עַל־פָּנֶ֔יךָ 1 Yahweh speaks of his **goodness** like it was an object that he could move over Moses. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
33:19 e3o3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns טוּבִי֙ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **goodness**, you can express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
33:19 gzr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עַל־פָּנֶ֔יךָ & לְפָנֶ֑יךָ 1 Here, **face** means “you.” Alternate translation: “above you … before you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
33:19 d4z9 וְקָרָ֧אתִֽי בְשֵׁ֛ם יְהוָ֖ה 1 The meaning of the phrase is unclear. It may mean that Yahweh will disclose something about his character to Moses. Alternate translation: “and I will proclaim my name, ‘Yahweh,’”
33:19 vqq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וְחַנֹּתִי֙ אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֣ר אָחֹ֔ן וְרִחַמְתִּ֖י אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֲרַחֵֽם 1 These statements use parallelism internally and between each other. They stress Yahweh’s divine prerogative to do whatever he wants. The structure also parallels Yahweh’s I AM statements in [Exodus 3:14](../03/14.md). If this form of parallelism would be misunderstood in your language, consider another form that emphasizes that Yahweh is graciously kind to exactly those and only those to whom he chooses to show kindness, and he does so without outside influence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
33:20 c20q rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations וַיֹּ֕אמֶר 1 In some languages it may be better to omit **And he said** at the start of this verse to avoid stopping and restarting the quotation. Yahweh is speaking from 33:19-34:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
33:20 fyc0 כִּ֛י לֹֽא־יִרְאַ֥נִי הָאָדָ֖ם וָחָֽי 1 Alternate translation: “because no person can live after he has seen me”
33:21 loep rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations וַיֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה 1 In some languages it may be better to omit **And Yahweh said** at the start of this verse to avoid stopping and restarting the quotation. Yahweh is speaking from 33:19-34:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
33:21 s4iy הִנֵּ֥ה 1 Alternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you.”
33:22 qhe6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בַּעֲבֹ֣ר כְּבֹדִ֔י 1 Yahweh speaks of his **glory** as if it were an object that he could move over Moses. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while I pass over gloriously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
33:22 o5as rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns כְּבֹדִ֔י 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
33:22 ivf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification וְשַׂכֹּתִ֥י כַפִּ֛י עָלֶ֖יךָ 1 Here Yahweh speaks as if he, like a person, had hands that could cover things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile to retain the image, as this figure is important to retain and extends into the next verse. Alternate translation: “I will cover you as with a hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
33:23 fmu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification וַהֲסִרֹתִי֙ אֶת־כַּפִּ֔י וְרָאִ֖יתָ אֶת־אֲחֹרָ֑י וּפָנַ֖י לֹ֥א יֵרָאֽוּ 1 The strong personification image of Yahweh continues throughout this verse and should be retained, if possible. You may have to use similes if this would be misunderstood in your culture. Alternate translation: “Then it will be as if I stop covering you with a hand, and you will see a small part of my glory, like a person’s back, but not my full glory, like a person’s face.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
33:23 jq7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וּפָנַ֖י 1 Here, **but my face** is moved to the front of the clause to emphasize contrast with **my back**. If your language has a certain way of contrasting elements, be sure to make a strong contrast between Yahweh’s face and back. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
33:23 gw1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּפָנַ֖י לֹ֥א יֵרָאֽוּ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but you will not see my face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
34:intro smp6 0 # Exodus 34 General Notes\n\n## Outline\n\n* v. 1-4 Yahweh orders Moses to return to the mountain\n* v. 5-9 Yahweh reveals himself to Moses and Moses reacts\n* v. 10-28 Covenant renewal\n* v. 29-34 Moses reports to Israel\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n* In verse 1, Yahweh says he will write on stone tablets, yet later (v. 27-28) he commands Moses to write and the text says Moses writes.\n* Yahweh reveals something significant about himself or his character to Moses. There are a number of difficult terms and concepts.\n* The biblical metaphor of true worship as sexual fidelity appears in v. 14-16.\n* Several verses are repeated either exactly or closely from earlier chapters.\n* In v. 12-26 Yahweh appears to give a different 10 commandments from those in Exodus 20 (but also largely repeated from other earlier parts of Exodus), raising the question of what was actually written on the stone tablets in v. 28.\n* The concept of Moses’s shining face may be difficult in some cultures.\n\n### “He will bring the punishment for the fathers’ sin on their children”\n\nThis phrase does not mean that a child is necessarily punished for the sins of their parents. Many scholars believe that this passage indicates that a parent’s sins will have consequences that will affect their children and grandchildren. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
34:1 ppyw rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations וַיֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 Yahweh continues to speak to Moses, but there is a change of topic here, so you may want to retain the speech introduction. However, if it would be misunderstood, you could simply continue the quotation from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Yahweh continued” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
34:1 zf77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure אֲשֶׁ֥ר שִׁבַּֽרְתָּ 1 This clause reminds the reader of what tablets are being mentioned by reminding you of what had happened to the previous tablets. If it would be more helpful in your language to attach it to the first mention of the tablets in this verse, you could rearrange it like the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
34:1 s1kv לֻחֹ֥ת אֲבָנִ֖ים 1 Alternate translation: “flat slabs of stone” See how you translated this in [Exodus 31:18](../31/18.md)
34:3 ck6d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְגַם־אִ֥ישׁ אַל־יֵרָ֖א בְּכָל־הָהָ֑ר 1 Being seen doing something represents doing that. Alternate translation: “and do not let anyone else be anywhere on the mountain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
34:3 x3rx גַּם־הַצֹּ֤אן וְהַבָּקָר֙ אַל־יִרְע֔וּ אֶל־מ֖וּל הָהָ֥ר הַהֽוּא 1 Alternate translation: “Even flocks or herds are not allowed to come near the mountain to eat.”
34:5 sp7f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns וַיִּתְיַצֵּ֥ב עִמּ֖וֹ שָׁ֑ם וַיִּקְרָ֥א 1 The pronouns are not clear here, but the referents are probably as in the following alternate translation: “and Yahweh stood with Moses there, and Yahweh proclaimed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
34:5 r9ey rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַיִּקְרָ֥א בְשֵׁ֖ם יְהוָֽה 1 This could mean: (1) “he spoke the name ‘Yahweh’” (2) “he proclaimed who Yahweh is.” For the second meaning, **name** would represent who God is. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
34:6 fz1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person יְהוָ֣ה׀ יְהוָ֔ה אֵ֥ל רַח֖וּם וְחַנּ֑וּן 1 God is speaking about himself. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am God, and I am merciful and gracious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
34:6 t0kd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet רַח֖וּם וְחַנּ֑וּן 1 This is emphasizing that Yahweh cares for people and acts kindly toward them. If doubling would not strengthen the statement here in your language, consider another form that would. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
34:6 f7iq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אֶ֥רֶךְ אַפַּ֖יִם 1 The phrase **long of nostril** is an idiom that means Yahweh does not get angry easily or quickly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “slow to anger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
34:6 j7we rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְרַב־חֶ֥סֶד וֶאֱמֶֽת 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **covenant faithfulness** and **trustworthiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. (For **covenant faithfulness**, see [Exodus 20:6](../20/06.md)). Alternate translation: “always being faithful to my covenant and always being trustworthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
34:6 d1qj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet חֶ֥סֶד וֶאֱמֶֽת 1 This is emphasizing that Yahweh always does what he promises toward the people he loves. If doubling would not strengthen the statement here in your language, consider another form that would. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
34:7 lt2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns נֹצֵ֥ר חֶ֨סֶד֙ לָאֲלָפִ֔ים 1 See how you translated **covenant faithfulness**in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “faithfully loving thousands of generations” or “faithful to his covenant with thousands of generations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
34:7 x90l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole לָאֲלָפִ֔ים 1 This large number is used to mean “forever” or “to all descendants forever.” It is deliberately contrasted with **third** and **fourth** later in the verse to emphasize how much longer God’s covenant faithfulness is than his anger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys a very long time. Alternate translation: “for every generation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
34:7 dxkb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לָאֲלָפִ֔ים 1 The word **thousands** is a metonym for a number too many to count. Alternate translation: “to innumerable people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
34:7 hllt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany עָוֺ֛ן וָפֶ֖שַׁע וְחַטָּאָ֑ה 1 This list is meant to convey the idea of every kind of wrong. If a list like this would be misunderstood in your language you may need to use other terms or forms to make this point. Alternate translation: “every kind of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
34:7 e2qc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns עָוֺ֛ן וָפֶ֖שַׁע וְחַטָּאָ֑ה & עֲוֺ֣ן 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **iniquity, transgression, and sin**, you can express the same ideas in another way., as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
34:7 x397 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וְנַקֵּה֙ לֹ֣א יְנַקֶּ֔ה 1 Yahweh is speaking about himself. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “But I will certainly not acquit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
34:7 ts1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis וְנַקֵּה֙ לֹ֣א יְנַקֶּ֔ה 1 Whom Yahweh will not acquit is not stated. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translations: “But he will certainly not clear the guilty” or “But he will certainly not say that the guilty are innocent” or “But he will certainly not free guilty people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
34:7 lyrg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עֲוֺ֣ן 1 Here, **iniquity** refers to the consequences or the punishment for iniquity. Alternate translation: “the punishment for the iniquity of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
34:7 px85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor פֹּקֵ֣ד׀ עֲוֺ֣ן אָב֗וֹת עַל־בָּנִים֙ וְעַל־בְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔ים 1 The **iniquity of the fathers** is spoken of as if it were something capable of **visiting** people. This means that Yahweh makes the consequences of people’s sins affect their descendants. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “punishing the sons and the sons of the sons for the iniquity of the fathers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
34:7 c3tb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עַל־בָּנִים֙ וְעַל־בְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔ים 1 The references to **sons** and **sons of the sons** represents descendants. Alternate translation: “on their descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
34:7 d462 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֖ים וְעַל־רִבֵּעִֽים 1 Here, “generation” is implied after **third** and **fourth**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
34:7 pacu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֖ים וְעַל־רִבֵּעִֽים 1 Here, **third** and **fourth** means “several.” If this would not be understood and your language has a way of referring to an unspecified (but approximately 3-4) number, you may have to use it here. Alternate translation: “on a few generations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
34:8 c1qt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns וַיִּשְׁתָּֽחוּ 1 Here, **himself** means that Moses did this action to his own body. Some languages may use a special form to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
34:8 mf8o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וַיִּקֹּ֥ד אַ֖רְצָה וַיִּשְׁתָּֽחוּ 1 These two verbs have very similar meanings and are often used together to express people’s physical and spiritual posture in worship. If such repetition would be misunderstood in your language, you may need to express the physical action and spiritual action explicitly. Alternate translation: “and bowed to the ground in worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
34:9 mh3a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּעֵינֶ֨יךָ֙ 1 Here, **found favor** is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun **favor** into another form. Finally, **eyes** are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase **I have found favor in your eyes** in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
34:9 vhu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor עַם־קְשֵׁה־עֹ֨רֶף֙ ה֔וּא 1 Moses speaks of the people being rebellious as if they had **hard necks**. See how you translated this in [Exodus 32:9](../32/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
34:9 hw66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet לַעֲוֺנֵ֥נוּ וּלְחַטָּאתֵ֖נוּ 1 The words **iniquity** and **sin** mean basically the same thing and are combined for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “all our sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
34:10 zwsm your people 0 Starting in this verse, the covenant is largely repeated and consists of two parts: (1) what Yahweh will do, which is detailed in verses 10-11 (and briefly restated in verse 24) and (2) what is required of the Israelites, which is detailed in verses 12-26. For further context, see [Exodus 19:5 and following](../19/05.md), and [23:20-24:8](../23/20.md). Verses 12-26 are another list of ten commandments.
34:10 ps7o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כֹּרֵ֣ת בְּרִית֒ 1 To **cut a covenant** means to make a covenant. The terminology refers to ancient rituals around making covenants, which is illustrated in Genesis 15. See the imagery and how you translated there. Alternate translation: “am about to make a covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
34:10 zdq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession עַמְּךָ֙ 1 Here, the **people** are referred to as belonging to Moses. This refers to his being their leader. Alternate translation: “the people you lead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
34:10 itdx כָל־הָ֠עָם אֲשֶׁר־אַתָּ֨ה בְקִרְבּ֜וֹ 1 This phrase is ambiguous and could refer to: (1) the nations that surrounded Israel or (2) the Israelites (who surrounded Moses). Attempt to maintain the ambiguity if you can; otherwise you may choose one, perhaps following another locally known translation’s choice.
34:10 bj1a כִּֽי־נוֹרָ֣א ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֲנִ֖י עֹשֶׂ֥ה עִמָּֽךְ 1 This means that what Yahweh is doing causes people to be afraid. In this case, people will fear Yahweh when they see what he does. Alternate translation: “for what I am doing with you will cause fear”
34:10 s7uz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual עִמָּֽךְ 1 Here, **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
34:11 xtkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy גֹרֵ֣שׁ מִפָּנֶ֗יךָ 1 Here, **from before your faces** means “ahead of you” or “on your behalf.” Yahweh is emphasizing who is doing the driving out. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
34:11 kfix rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֶת־הָאֱמֹרִי֙ וְהַֽכְּנַעֲנִ֔י וְהַחִתִּי֙ וְהַפְּרִזִּ֔י וְהַחִוִּ֖י וְהַיְבוּסִֽי 1 See how you translated these in [Exodus 33:2](../33/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
34:12 fmc9 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses 12-16 are the first of these ten commandments. The original language is structured such that every clause in these verses is subordinate to the initial, **Guard yourself**. That sort of structure may not be possible in your language (as it is not in English).
34:12 mnpv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns לְךָ֗ 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **yourself** means that each Israelite should guard against committing these sins. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
34:12 n1il rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָאָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר אַתָּ֖ה בָּ֣א עָלֶ֑יהָ פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְמוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּקִרְבֶּֽךָ 1 # General Information:\n\nThis sentence contains two hypotheticals as a warning. Each is introduced by **lest**. Use a marker in your language that introduces a hypothetical situation, but also see the next note. Alternate translation: “If you were to cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land where you are about to go into, probably he would become as a trap in your midst.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
34:12 t1hz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָאָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר אַתָּ֖ה בָּ֣א עָלֶ֑יהָ פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְמוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּקִרְבֶּֽךָ 1 # General Information:\n\nThe second of these hypothetical statements is logically dependent on and follows after the first as a result. As you mark these hypotheticals, use a form that communicates that the second is a result of the first. Alternate translation: “because if you cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land where you are about to go into, then he will become as a trap in your midst” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
34:12 b459 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ 1 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated this in [34:10](../34/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
34:12 tnka rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב & יִהְיֶ֥ה 1 # General Information:\n\nThe word **inhabitant** is a singular noun that refers to any individual inhabitant or group of inhabitants from the peoples mentioned in the previous verse. The pronoun **he** is agreeing with that singular noun. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “with the inhabitants of … they become” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
34:12 lxz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְמוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּקִרְבֶּֽךָ 1 People who tempt others to sin are spoken of as if they were a **trap.** If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “lest those remaining people tempt you to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
34:13 wkbx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast כִּ֤י 1 This word marks a strong contrast with the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a new sentence: “Do the opposite!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
34:13 tfd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure אֶת־מִזְבְּחֹתָם֙ תִּתֹּצ֔וּן וְאֶת־מַצֵּבֹתָ֖ם תְּשַׁבֵּר֑וּן וְאֶת־אֲשֵׁרָ֖יו תִּכְרֹתֽוּן 1 This unusual word order reflects the original in bringing each item the Israelites must destroy into focus. You should use whatever form in your language would emphasize or focus on each item that they must destroy. Alternate translation, as separate sentences: “as for their altars, break them down! As for their stone pillars, smash them to pieces! As for their trees where they worship the goddess Asherah, cut them all down!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
34:13 gbp0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns תִּכְרֹתֽוּן 1 For some reason only this pronoun is singular, referring back the singular “inhabitant” in the previous verse. Translate it based on your decision in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
34:14 fzjz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction לֹ֥א תִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶ֖ה 1 To **bow to another god** means to worship it. This imagery is throughout scripture and should be retained in translation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you shall not bow to worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
34:14 vmx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּ֤י יְהוָה֙ קַנָּ֣א שְׁמ֔וֹ אֵ֥ל קַנָּ֖א הֽוּא׃ 1 The repeated word **jealous** means that God is concerned to keep his honor. If his people worship other gods, he loses honor, because when his people do not honor him, other people also will not honor him. This is pictured in a metaphor of a jealous spouse who is concerned that his spouse be faithful to him. This is an important Biblical metaphor that should be kept in translation if at all possible. The UST makes this image explicit as a simile, which can be done occasionally but would probably be too long for repeated use in a translation. Alternate translation: “Yahweh jealously guards his reputation. He is a God jealous of his honor.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
34:14 s5sd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כִּ֤י יְהוָה֙ קַנָּ֣א שְׁמ֔וֹ 1 Here, the word **name** represents God’s character. Alternate translation: “Yahweh is always jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
34:15 r70f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב & וְקָרָ֣א & מִזִּבְחֽוֹ 1 # General Information:\n\nThe word **inhabitant** is a singular noun that refers to any individual inhabitant or group of inhabitants from the peoples mentioned in the previous verse. The pronouns **he** and **his** are agreeing with that singular noun. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. See how you translated this in [verse 12](../34/12.md). Alternate translation: “with the inhabitants of … and they invite … from their sacrifice” or “with the inhabitants of … and one of them invites … from his sacrifice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
34:15 udz0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֥ת בְּרִ֖ית לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָאָ֑רֶץ וְזָנ֣וּ׀ אַחֲרֵ֣י אֱלֹֽהֵיהֶ֗ם וְזָבְחוּ֙ לֵאלֹ֣הֵיהֶ֔ם וְקָרָ֣א לְךָ֔ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nMost of this verse is a sort of chain of logically consecutive hypothetical events that Yahweh is warning the Israelites against. Your language may have a specific way this sort of argument must be structured or phrased. One way to see this would be to repeat **lest** before every verb in verse 15-16. Alternate translation: “If you cut a covenant the inhabitant of the land, and if they then prostitute after their gods and sacrifice to their gods, and if he then invites you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
34:15 f1e3 פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֥ת בְּרִ֖ית לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָאָ֑רֶץ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis phrase is exactly the same as the second clause of [verse 12](../34/12.md). It serves as a reminder of the command Yahweh is giving as he begins to expand on the “trap” he mentioned in verse 12. Your language may need to mark this repetition in a particular way. Alternate translation: “Remember: keep yourself lest you cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land”
34:15 n4nt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom תִּכְרֹ֥ת בְּרִ֖ית 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nSee how you translated this in [verse 12](../34/12.md). Alternate translation: “you make a covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
34:15 gtd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְזָנ֣וּ׀ אַחֲרֵ֣י אֱלֹֽהֵיהֶ֗ם 1 In this metaphor, Yahweh speaks of people worshiping other gods as if they were prostitutes going to other men. This metaphor is most often used regarding the unfaithfulness of the Israelites. The metaphor is not quite as clear with the other nations because while Yahweh is the only true God, he is not in special covenant with the other nations as their god. However, since the worship is still impurely following false gods, the metaphor is used here. This is an important Biblical metaphor that should be kept in translation if at all possible. Alternate translation: “and they worship their gods” or “because they worship their gods like prostitutes who go to other men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
34:15 d1m0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְזָנ֣וּ׀ אַחֲרֵ֣י אֱלֹֽהֵיהֶ֗ם 1 This phrase may also be seen as a metonymy because sexual sin was a regular part of worshiping false gods. Alternate translation: “and they worship by fornicating with their gods’ cult prostitutes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
34:15 vijl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis וְקָרָ֣א לְךָ֔ 1 Here, what the inhabitant will invite the Israelite to is not stated, but can be inferred from context. At the most basic level it is an invitation to eat food the Israelites were forbidden to eat. It is unclear how much more participation in worshiping false gods is implied. If your language requires that you specify what the Israelite is being invited into you may have to add some information. Alternate translation: “and he will invite you to eat from his sacrifice” or “and he will invite you to a feast to honor his gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
34:15 ygd9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְאָכַלְתָּ֖ מִזִּבְחֽוֹ 1 The first part of the sin Yahweh is warning against in this and the next verse is to **eat from his sacrifice**. This clause is the result of disobedience regarding the **covenant** and the logical conclusion of the series of hypothetical events Yahweh presents before this. Alternate translation: “as a result, you will eat from his sacrifice” or “then you will eat from his sacrifice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
34:15 hhbc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche וְאָכַלְתָּ֖ מִזִּבְחֽוֹ 1 Here, **and you eat from his sacrifice** may represent any and all parts of the worship of the other nations’ false gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and you feast to honor his gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
34:15 bj2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְאָכַלְתָּ֖ מִזִּבְחֽוֹ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the consequence of eating food that is sacrificed to another god explicitly. Alternate translation: “and you will eat some of his sacrifice and become guilty of worshiping his gods” or “and you will prostitute yourself to his god by eating some of his sacrifice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
34:16 jaic rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical you will eat some of his sacrifice 0 The string of hypothetical actions, each with its logical result continues throughout this verse. Continue translating the transitions between clauses as you decided in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
34:16 d4ma rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְזָנ֣וּ בְנֹתָ֗יו אַחֲרֵי֙ אֱלֹ֣הֵיהֶ֔ן 1 In this metaphor, Yahweh speaks of people worshiping other gods as if they were prostitutes going to other men. This metaphor is most often used regarding the unfaithfulness of the Israelites. The metaphor is not quite as clear with the other nations because while Yahweh is the only true God, he is not in special covenant with the other nations as their god. However, since the worship is still impurely following false gods, the metaphor is used here. This is an important Biblical metaphor that should be kept in translation if at all possible. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and his daughters worship their gods” or “and his daughters worship their gods like prostitutes who go to other men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
34:16 k0lr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְהִזְנוּ֙ אֶת־בָּנֶ֔יךָ אַחֲרֵ֖י אֱלֹהֵיהֶֽן 1 In this metaphor, Yahweh speaks of people worshiping other gods as if they were prostitutes going to other men. The metaphor is clear here since it is referring to Israelite men who should be Yahweh worshipers. This is an important Biblical metaphor that should be kept in translation if at all possible. Alternate translation: “and cause your sons to worship their gods” or “and cause your sons to worship their gods like prostitutes who go to other men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
34:16 p98a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְהִזְנוּ֙ אֶת־בָּנֶ֔יךָ אַחֲרֵ֖י אֱלֹהֵיהֶֽן 1 This is the climatic consequence of living in peace the nations God is driving out before them: complete apostacy from Yahweh and loss of the next generation to wickedness. Specifically it is the result of intermarriage with the pagans, which God has explicitly forbidden for this very reason. If your language marks the final consequence of a string of actions in a particular way it may be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “and in the end, they will cause even your sons to prostitute after their gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
34:17 lgab you will eat some of his sacrifice 0 The prohibition here is focused on making gods. In your translation make sure that the focus is not on the method, but the god-making.
34:17 rux0 מַסֵּכָ֖ה 1 See how you translated **molten metal** in [Exodus 32:4](../32/04.md).
34:18 s1rr General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to most of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md).
34:18 i5ck rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הָאָבִ֑יב & הָֽאָבִ֔יב 1 This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. **Aviv** is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated **Aviv** in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
34:19 ly7d General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 13:12](../13/12.md).
34:20 sbrs buy back 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 13:13](../13/13.md).
34:20 j4tv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְשֶׂ֔ה & וַעֲרַפְתּ֑וֹ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express explicitly that either the **lamb** or **donkey** must be killed, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
34:20 c5ow לֹ֥א תִפְדֶּ֖ה 1 Alternate translation: “you do not ransom the donkey”
34:20 yz8x כֹּ֣ל בְּכ֤וֹר בָּנֶ֨יךָ֙ תִּפְדֶּ֔ה 1 Firstborn sons and firstborn donkeys belonged to Yahweh, but Yahweh did not want them sacrificed to Him. Instead, the Israelites were to sacrifice a lamb in their place. This allowed the Israelites to buy the donkeys and sons back from Yahweh.
34:20 u2p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives וְלֹֽא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖י רֵיקָֽם 1 Here understatement is used to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. This portion of the verse is identical to the end of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md). If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “come to me without a proper offering” or “always bring an offering to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
34:21 w9ed General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis command is similar to that in [Exodus 20:9](../20/09.md).
34:21 n2ka rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּבַיּ֥וֹם הַשְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 # General Information:\n\nIf your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day seven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
34:21 swm8 בֶּחָרִ֥ישׁ וּבַקָּצִ֖יר 1 Alternate translation: “Even when you are preparing the soil or gathering the crops”
34:22 lhxb Festival of Ingathering 0 This verse is similar to [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md), however the first festival is named **Festival of Weeks** here and “Festival of the Harvest” in 23:16.
34:22 d13l וְחַג֙ הָֽאָסִ֔יף 1 This festival celebrated the final harvesting of all the crops for the year. This festival was also known as the Festival of Shelters or the Festival of Booths. The idea came from the practice of the farmers living in temporary booths, or huts, out in the fields to guard the crop as it ripened. See Deuteronomy 16:13. See how you translated this in [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md). Alternate translation: “and the Festival of the Ingathering”
34:22 xqy4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor תְּקוּפַ֖ת הַשָּׁנָֽה 1 Like “the exiting of the year” in [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md), this refers to the end of the year. Here, the year is pictured as something that can turn. Which, thinking of the planet, is highly astronomically accurate. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
34:23 zh58 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for **God of Israel** and dropping “to,” this verse is identical to [Exodus 23:17](../23/17.md).
34:23 iagy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יֵרָאֶה֙ & אֶת־פְּנֵ֛י הָֽאָדֹ֥ן 1 # General Information:\n\nHere to **appear before the face of the Lord Yahweh** means to gather to worship. **Before the face** is a metonym for Yahweh’s presence, referring to worship. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
34:25 zx2v General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nSee the very similar [Exodus 23:18](../23/18.md).
34:25 e8v2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit דַּם־זִבְחִ֑י 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the fact that the blood is from an animal explicitly. Alternate translation: “the blood of an animal that you sacrifice to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
34:26 bv0a the blood of my sacrifice 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 23:19](../23/19.md).
34:27 x6j9 כִּ֞י עַל־פִּ֣י׀ הַדְּבָרִ֣ים הָאֵ֗לֶּה 1 Alternate translation: “for in accordance with these words” or “for according to these words”
34:27 ybz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כָּרַ֧תִּי אִתְּךָ֛ בְּרִ֖ית 1 See how you translated this in [verse 12](../34/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
34:28 wt1c אַרְבָּעִ֥ים יוֹם֙ וְאַרְבָּעִ֣ים לַ֔יְלָה 1 Alternate translation: “for 40 days, including the nights”
34:28 yun2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns וַיִּכְתֹּ֣ב 1 Here, **he** probably refers to Moses, based on Yahweh’s command in the previous verse. However, [Exodus 34:1](../34/01.md) opens the possibility that Yahweh wrote. It is best to leave it ambiguous, but if you must specify, saying Moses is better. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
34:29 t1s0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיְהִ֗י 1 This marks a change of scene which you should mark in a natural way in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
34:29 x70x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure וַיְהִ֗י בְּרֶ֤דֶת מֹשֶׁה֙ מֵהַ֣ר סִינַ֔י וּשְׁנֵ֨י לֻחֹ֤ת הָֽעֵדֻת֙ בְּיַד־מֹשֶׁ֔ה בְּרִדְתּ֖וֹ מִן־הָהָ֑ר 1 The statement about Moses’ descent from the mountain is repeated almost verbatim, but does not refer to two events. If this would be misunderstood you may need to state it only once in translation as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Then Moses came down from Mount Sinai. As he was coming down from the mountain, he was carrying the two tablets of the testimony in his hands.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
34:29 yagj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure וּמֹשֶׁ֣ה לֹֽא־יָדַ֗ע כִּ֥י קָרַ֛ן ע֥וֹר פָּנָ֖יו בְּדַבְּר֥וֹ אִתּֽוֹ 1 In some languages it will make more sense to state that Moses’ **face shone** before saying that he **did not know that** as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
34:30 yn9s rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וַיִּֽירְא֖וּ 1 They were afraid because of his bright face. Alternate translation: “because of that, they were afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
34:32 kt23 וַיְצַוֵּ֕ם אֵת֩ כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר דִּבֶּ֧ר יְהוָ֛ה אִתּ֖וֹ 1 This means that Moses commanded the Israelites to obey everything Yahweh had commanded Moses to command the Israelites to do.
34:34 fzm1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background he would remove 0 This and the next verse give a general statement about Moses’s practice for an unstated amount of time (it was probably from this point until his death as he continued to talk to Yahweh). You should mark this with a form in your language that is used for on-going action like **would** or the UST’s “Whenever.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
34:34 m1sv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive יְצֻוֶּֽה 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh had commanded him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
35:intro lew9 0 # Exodus 35 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n- v. 1-3: reiteration of Sabbath command\n- v. 4-9: list of materials for donation (see [Exodus 25:1-7](../25/01.md))\n- v. 10-19: things they need to make for the Dwelling complex\n- v. 20-29: the people bring all the things listed\n- v. 30-36:1: appointing of lead craftsmen to build these things\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n- In the last chapter some repetition of Yahweh’s instructions began, mostly around the covenant commands. Starting in this chapter and even more so in chapter 36, the commands regarding the construction of the Dwelling complex are repeated, often word for word, from chapters 25-31. In many verses the only difference will be a change of verb form from instruction to completion. As much as possible, these parallels will be pointed out for the translators with links to the previous verses. Translators should refer back to the previously translated verses for consistency and because notes in this section may not cover everything that was covered in the initial instruction section.\n- Many items, materials, and processes for building the Dwelling may be unknown, but should have already been addressed in chapters 25-31.
35:2 hfaq 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 31:15](../31/15.md).
35:2 c559 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּבַיּ֣וֹם הַשְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day 7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
35:2 ax6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive שֵׁ֣שֶׁת יָמִים֮ תֵּעָשֶׂ֣ה מְלָאכָה֒ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Six days you shall work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
35:2 zij9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָּל־הָעֹשֶׂ֥ה ב֛וֹ מְלָאכָ֖ה יוּמָֽת 1 If your language would not use passive here, you could state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “You must execute anyone who works on that day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
35:4 jdb8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 4-9, Moses tells the Israelites to collect the things Yahweh commanded him to collect in [Exodus 25:2-7](../25/02.md). You should check your translation for consistency between these passages.
35:4 ugn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֔ה אֶל־כָּל־עֲדַ֥ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֵאמֹ֑ר זֶ֣ה הַדָּבָ֔ר אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה לֵאמֹֽר 1 # General Information:\n\nVerses 5-19 are a second-level direct quotation. If it would be better to reduce the quotation level in your language, you may want to make this introductory comment (everything after the first **saying**) an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And Moses told all of the congregation of the sons of Israel the things that Yahweh commanded, saying,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
35:5 h5c8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 25:2-3](../25/02.md).
35:5 n2c8 קְח֨וּ מֵֽאִתְּכֶ֤ם תְּרוּמָה֙ לַֽיהוָ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “Take up a collection for Yahweh from what you have”
35:5 qq0a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis כֹּ֚ל 1 Here, “from” is omitted but suggested by the sentence grammar. Also, **every** means “every person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “from every person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
35:5 pqa2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כֹּ֚ל נְדִ֣יב לִבּ֔וֹ 1 # General Information:\n\nThis is an idiom that indicates a person’s desire to give an offering. Many languages will have a similar idiom, though the body part often varies. Alternate translation: “from everyone who wants to give one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
35:5 gx87 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nAfter this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list.
35:6 r12v General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
35:6 g615 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּתְכֵ֧לֶת וְאַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְתוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 # General Information:\n\nThis could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or “thread” may be the best understanding. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
35:6 cad9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְתוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 # General Information:\n\nA bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
35:7 nmv4 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md).
35:7 l5bq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מְאָדָּמִ֛ים 1 When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish. It is not clear if these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
35:7 wmsl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תְּחָשִׁ֖ים 1 The meaning of this word is not known; it may refer to some water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. [Sea cows on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sirenia) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
35:7 tzrk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שִׂטִּֽים 1 A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
35:8 ikm4 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for several uses of the word **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:6](../25/06.md).
35:8 y11w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וּבְשָׂמִים֙ 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **spices** are made from parts of plants that people dry and then grind into a powder to put in oil or food, giving it a particular smell or flavor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
35:9 f1dd General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for an initial **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md).
35:9 hcs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְאַ֨בְנֵי־שֹׁ֔הַם 1 # General Information:\n\nAn **onyx stone** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red, or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
35:9 kk7z וְאַבְנֵ֖י 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “and valuable gems for” or “and treasured gems for”
35:10 dc4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְכָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב 1 Here, **heart** and **spirit** are both referring to things innately possessed by a person, that is, traits of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftsman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “And every man with a skill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
35:10 lkp4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis צִוָּ֖ה 1 Here, some the words that a sentence would need to be complete in some languages are left out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
35:10 ugjb Every skilled man 0 After this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list.
35:11 s0ip מִכְסֵ֑הוּ 1 See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:14](../26/14.md).
35:11 j5t7 קְרָסָיו֙ 1 The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md).
35:11 u022 קְרָשָׁ֔יו 1 See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:15](../26/15.md).
35:11 pvft בְּרִיחָ֖יו 1 See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:26](../26/26.md).
35:11 f1gk עַמֻּדָ֖יו 1 See how you translated this in [26:32](../26/32.md).
35:11 syn4 אֲדָנָֽיו 1 These are heavy objects that rest on the ground and keep the object attached to them from moving. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
35:12 rj7s atonement lid 0 See how you translated these terms in [25:10-17](../25/10.md) and [26:36](../26/36.md).
35:13 l641 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לֶ֥חֶם הַפָּנִֽים 1 Here, **face** represents the presence of Yahweh. This bread represented the presence of God. Alternate translation: “the bread of the Presence” See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:30](../25/30.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
35:14 obmd bread of the presence 0 See [25:31-37](../25/31.md) for these items.
35:15 ht7x מִזְבַּ֤ח הַקְּטֹ֨רֶת֙ & שֶׁ֣מֶן הַמִּשְׁחָ֔ה & קְטֹ֣רֶת הַסַּמִּ֑ים 1 For the **altar**, see [30:1](../30/01.md). For the **oil**, see [30:25](../30/25.md). For the **incense**, see [30:7](../30/07.md).
35:16 h116 bronze grate 0 For the **grate**, see [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md). Most of the rest of the verse is almost identical to [30:28](../30/28.md).
35:17 h8zl קַלְעֵ֣י & מָסַ֖ךְ 1 These were large curtains made of cloth. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md).
35:17 x54f עַמֻּדָ֖יו 1 These were strong pieces of wood set upright and used as supports. See how you translated these in [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md).
35:17 xtm8 אֲדָנֶ֑יהָ 1 These were blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
35:18 n44r יִתְדֹ֧ת & יִתְדֹ֥ת 1 These were sharp pieces of wood or metal used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:19](../27/19.md).
35:19 x1pc finely-woven garments 0 Except for **for serving in the Holy Place** and two “ands,” this verse is identical to [31:10](../31/10.md).
35:21 p2ls rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וַיָּבֹ֕אוּ כָּל־אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣וֹ לִבּ֑וֹ וְכֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נָדְבָ֨ה רוּח֜וֹ אֹת֗וֹ הֵ֠בִיאוּ 1 These two phrases parallel each other and mean the same thing. It would be good to keep this poetic repetition in your translation unless it would be misunderstood. If repetition here would not highlight the joyful giving spirit of the Israelites in your language, you may need to combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “Everyone who was motivated, body and soul, came and gave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
35:21 r34y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche וַיָּבֹ֕אוּ כָּל־אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣וֹ לִבּ֑וֹ וְכֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נָדְבָ֨ה רוּח֜וֹ אֹת֗וֹ הֵ֠בִיאוּ 1 Here, **heart** and **spirit** both refer to a person’s will, their desire to do something. Many languages will have similar expressions, perhaps using different body and spirit words or concepts which you can use. If your language would not express a person’s will in this way, you could translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “And every man whose will lifted him came, and all who felt impelled brought” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
35:21 ckmu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣וֹ לִבּ֑וֹ 1 Here, **heart lifted** is a metaphor for being willing or excited. Many languages will have similar expressions, perhaps using a different body part or a different action. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who was excited” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
35:21 u7kq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations כָּל־אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣וֹ לִבּ֑וֹ וְכֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נָדְבָ֨ה רוּח֜וֹ אֹת֗וֹ 1 Here, **man, whose,** and **him** all refer to men and women in a general way. This is made explicit in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you may use terms that include men and women. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
35:21 kew0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּלְבִגְדֵ֖י הַקֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **holiness** in another way. See how you translated this in [28:2](../28/02.md). Alternate translation: “and for the holy clothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
35:22 mwx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche כֹּ֣ל׀ נְדִ֣יב לֵ֗ב 1 Here, **heart** refers to a person’s will, their desire to do something. It is spoken of as causing a person to bring these gifts to Yahweh. This is a shortening and combining of the figure used in the [previous verse](../35/21.md): **heart** and **impelled** are brought together. See how you translated these ideas in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “anyone whose will impelled him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
35:22 wwp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany חָ֣ח וָנֶ֜זֶם וְטַבַּ֤עַת וְכוּמָז֙ כָּל־כְּלִ֣י זָהָ֔ב 1 These are different kinds of jewelry. The exact identity of each object is not known. The phrase **all of the things of gold** could either modify the whole list, meaning “all these items were made of gold,” or could mean “many other gold things.” If taken as a summary statement, in some languages it may be clearer to move it to the front of the list. Alternate translation: “all kinds of gold jewelry including necklaces, nose rings, signet rings, and gold ornaments” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
35:22 frci rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations וְכָל־אִ֕ישׁ 1 Although the term **men** is used, the word here is used in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “And every person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
35:23 dweo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְכָל־אִ֞ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נִמְצָ֣א אִתּ֗וֹ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also, the meaning of this phrase is simple possession. Alternate translation: “And every man who owned” or “And every man having” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
35:23 hg0d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations וְכָל־אִ֞ישׁ 1 Here **man** includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “And every person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
35:23 t3ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole וְכָל־אִ֞ישׁ 1 The phrase **every man** is used here without the restriction, “who was willing,” from previous verses. The exaggeration is used to emphasize what a large portion of the Israelites gave willingly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses a large number or a majority. Alternate translation: “And very many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
35:24 qpep rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְכֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נִמְצָ֨א אִתּ֜וֹ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also, the meaning of this phrase is simple possession. Alternate translation: “and everyone who owned” or “and everyone having” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
35:24 zk6i כָּל־מֵרִ֗ים 1 Here, **all** is limited by **presenters**, meaning only everyone who brought contributions. Avoid implying that every single Israelite did this (though very many did). Alternate translation: “All who decided to offer”
35:24 loob rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole וְכֹ֡ל 1 The phrase **all** is used here without the restriction, “who were willing,” from previous verses. The exaggeration is used to emphasize what a large portion of the Israelites gave willingly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses a large number or a majority. Alternate translation: “and very many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
35:24 bab9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְכָל־מְלֶ֥אכֶת הָעֲבֹדָ֖ה 1 Here, **service** refers to worshiping Yahweh, and the phrase **work of the service** refers to building the Dwelling as a place for worshiping Yahweh. Alternate translation: “for any of the building of a place for worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
35:25 ae9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy חַכְמַת־לֵ֖ב 1 Here, **heart** is referring to something innately possessed by a person, that is, a trait of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftswoman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “who possessed the skill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
35:25 ebm5 אֶֽת־הַתְּכֵ֨לֶת֙ וְאֶת־הָֽאַרְגָּמָ֔ן אֶת־תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַשָּׁנִ֖י 1 This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
35:26 k1gy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche אֲשֶׁ֨ר נָשָׂ֥א לִבָּ֛ן אֹתָ֖נָה 1 Here, **heart** refers to a persons’ will, their desire to do something. It is spoken of as causing a person to use her skills for Yahweh. This is the same as the first phrase in [verse 21](../35/21.md). Alternate translation: “whose wills impelled them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
35:29 hqle rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure whose heart was willing 0 The order of clauses in the ULT is reversed from the original because of required English sentence structure. In the original, **The sons of Israel brought a freewill offering to Yahweh** is at the end of the verse. Other languages may be able to retain the original order. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
35:29 li5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche אֲשֶׁ֨ר נָדַ֣ב לִבָּם֮ אֹתָם֒ 1 Here, **heart** refers to a persons’ will, their desire to do something. It is spoken of as causing a person to bring these gifts to Yahweh. See how you translated this in [25:2](../25/02.md) and [35:22](../35/22.md). Alternate translation: “whose will impelled them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
35:29 w582 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה לַעֲשׂ֖וֹת בְּיַד־מֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 Here, **by the hand of Moses** refers to Moses as a messenger for Yahweh’s commands, not to Moses being the one who would build all these things. If this imagery of carrying a message would be misunderstood in your language, you may use another figure or translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “which Yahweh had told Moses to tell them to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
35:30 z1e2 Bezalel son of Uri son of Hur, from the tribe of Judah 0 What Moses says in this verse is a quote from [Exodus 31:2](../31/02.md)
35:30 kx4o rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בְּצַלְאֵ֛ל & אוּרִ֥י & ח֖וּר 1 These are men’s names. See [31:2](../31/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
35:31 gse9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיְמַלֵּ֥א אֹת֖וֹ ר֣וּחַ אֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 Yahweh speaks of giving Bezalel his spirit as if Bezalel were a container and God’s spirit were a liquid. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And he has given his spirit to Bezalel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
35:31 jsd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בְּחָכְמָ֛ה 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **skill** in another way. Alternate translation: “so he can work skillfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
35:31 hnju rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּבְדַ֖עַת 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **understanding** in another way. Alternate translation: “and so he can understand his work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
35:31 qx5o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּבְדַ֖עַת 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** in another way. Alternate translation: “and so he knows his work well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
35:31 cf63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּבְכָל־מְלָאכָֽה 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for **craftsmanship**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun in another way. Alternate translation: “and for making all kinds of crafts” or “and so that he can make all kinds of things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
35:34 xd67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּלְהוֹרֹ֖ת נָתַ֣ן בְּלִבּ֑וֹ 1 Here, **put in his heart** is an idiom referring to ability and desire. These are spoken of as if they are something that could be placed in a heart. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And he gave to them the ability and desire to teach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
35:34 ab2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names וְאָֽהֳלִיאָ֥ב & אֲחִיסָמָ֖ךְ 1 These are names of men. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 31:6](../31/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
35:35 ehu7 filled them with skill 0 This verse summarizes and pulls together many previously mentioned things. See [28:3](../28/03.md) (**skill of heart**), [25:4](../25/04.md) (for materials), [26:36](../26/36.md) (**embroiderer**), [28:32](../28/32.md) (**weaver**), [26:31](../26/31.md) (**skillful workman**), [31:3](../31/03.md) (**craftsman**), [28:6](../28/06.md) (**designer of designs**).
35:35 rcv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִלֵּ֨א אֹתָ֜ם חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 Here, **skill** to create beautiful objects is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He has made them very skillful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
35:35 jvtd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 Here, **of heart** refers to possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with ability” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
36:intro nz4n 0 # Exodus 36 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n\r\n\r\n* v. 1: finish Moses’ instruction\r\n* v. 2-7: craftsmen collect materials from Moses, inform him the people should stop bringing things because they have too much already -v. 8-38: construction of the Dwelling, verse-by-verse quotations marked below\r\n * v. 8-18: quote [Exodus 26:1-11](../26/01.md)\r\n * v. 19-34: quote [Exodus 26:14-29](../26/14.md)\r\n * v. 35-36: quote [26:31-32](../26/31.md)\r\n * v. 37-38: quote [26:36-37](../26/36.md)\n\n## Translation issues\n\n* The first verse of this chapter goes with the last chapter.\n* Most of this chapter exactly quotes chapter 26 with a shift from instruction to past narrative form on the verbs and a few other minor changes; some are Hebrew word order that will be invisible here. Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n* Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he**is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
36:1 ubk2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is the end of a quotation from Moses that begin in [35:30](../35/30.md). It should be connected as visually as possible to the previous verses, as the chapter break here is poorly placed.
36:1 ds99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בְצַלְאֵ֨ל וְאָהֳלִיאָ֜ב 1 **Bezalel and Oholiab** are the names of men. See how you translated this in [Exodus 31:2](../31/02.md) and [31:6](../31/06.md) as well as in the end of [chapter 35](../35/30.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
36:1 y1h1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations אִ֣ישׁ 1 We know from [35:25](../35/25.md) that women were included in the skilled workers, so **man** means every person. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
36:1 tr3p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche חֲכַם־לֵ֗ב 1 Here, **of heart** refers to innately possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with innate ability” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
36:1 ah6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns חָכְמָ֤ה 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **skill** in another way. See [35:31](../35/31.md). Alternate translation: “the ability to work skillfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
36:1 d6os rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּתְבוּנָה֙ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **understanding** in another way. See [35:31](../35/31.md). Alternate translation: “and so he can understand his work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
36:1 mdi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מְלֶ֖אכֶת עֲבֹדַ֣ת הַקֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 Here, **service** refers to worshiping Yahweh, and the phrase **work of the service** refers to building the Dwelling (**Holy Place**) where the Israelites would worship Yahweh. See [35:24](../35/24.md). Alternate translation: “the building of the Holy Place for worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
36:2 tda7 אֶל־בְּצַלְאֵ֘ל וְאֶל־אָֽהֳלִיאָב֒ וְאֶל֙ כָּל־אִ֣ישׁ חֲכַם־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֨ר נָתַ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה חָכְמָ֖ה בְּלִבּ֑וֹ 1 See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../36/01.md).
36:2 vvtz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns חָכְמָ֖ה 1 See how you translated **skill** in the [previous verse](../36/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
36:2 yuq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כֹּ֚ל אֲשֶׁ֣ר נְשָׂא֣וֹ לִבּ֔וֹ 1 See how you translated this in [35:21](../35/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
36:3 est0 וַיִּקְח֞וּ 1 Alternate translation: “and the craftsmen took”
36:3 xkix rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִלִּפְנֵ֣י 1 Here, **before the face** means with Moses. Moses had received and kept the building materials. Alternate translation: “from the custody of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
36:3 mtkr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בַּבֹּ֥קֶר בַּבֹּֽקֶר 1 This is an idiom meaning every morning or every day. Use a similar expression or translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “morning by morning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
36:4 b772 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj הַ֣חֲכָמִ֔ים 1 Here the adjective **skilled** is used as a noun in order to describe the group of craftsmen. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the skilled workers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
36:4 pz6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִֽישׁ־אִ֥ישׁ 1 Here, **every single man** translates an idiom that cannot be rendered literally and sensibly in English. The original is “a man a man.” If your language would use repetition to emphasize that each and every man came to see Moses, you could follow the original; otherwise use a phrase or structure that emphasizes that they all came. Alternate translation: “every man without exception” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
36:4 gjrz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations אִֽישׁ־אִ֥ישׁ 1 As previously, noted, there were some women who contributed (particularly in the cloth crafts) so this use of **man** may include women. Alternate translation: “every single worker” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
36:5 tni7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיֹּאמְרוּ֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֣ה לֵּאמֹ֔ר מַרְבִּ֥ים הָעָ֖ם לְהָבִ֑יא מִדֵּ֤י הָֽעֲבֹדָה֙ לַמְּלָאכָ֔ה אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה לַעֲשֹׂ֥ת אֹתָֽהּ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The craftsmen told Moses that the people were bringing much more than enough for doing the work that Yahweh has commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
36:6 es1y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations אִ֣ישׁ וְאִשָּׁ֗ה אַל־יַעֲשׂוּ־ע֛וֹד מְלָאכָ֖ה לִתְרוּמַ֣ת הַקֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “that no one should bring any more contributions for the work of the Holy Place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
36:6 k3g1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַיַּעֲבִ֨ירוּ ק֥וֹל 1 Here, **sound** refers to the message. This means they spread Moses’ message orally. Alternate translation: “everyone to share this message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
36:6 ak26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun אִ֣ישׁ וְאִשָּׁ֗ה אַל־יַעֲשׂוּ 1 Here, **man and woman** is intended to mean everyone, or in this case because of the negation, no one. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “No one shall make” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
36:6 k1qm מְלָאכָ֖ה 1 Here, **work** means the sorts of crafted items listed in the previous chapter.
36:6 utcw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis מֵהָבִֽיא 1 In some languages you may need to provide an object for this sentence. Alternate translation: “from bringing contributions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
36:7 ipiu וְהַמְּלָאכָ֗ה 1 Here, **work** means the sorts of crafted items listed in the previous chapter.
36:8 kw33 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for tense and the addition of **every skilled of heart among the doers of the work,** this verse is identical to [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
36:8 l7ub rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche כָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֜ב 1 See how you translated this in [35:21](../35/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
36:8 zz0w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun עָשָׂ֥ה 1 Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he** used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “they made” or “a craftsman made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
36:9 p2mr General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 26:2](../26/02.md). Tense is implied.
36:10 z6sq General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:3](../26/03.md).
36:11 yw91 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:4](../26/04.md).
36:12 k1qq General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:5](../26/05.md).
36:13 z2zi General Information 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md).
36:14 m2ac General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:7](../26/07.md).
36:15 fa6i General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:8](../26/08.md).
36:16 wwj6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to the first sentence of [Exodus 26:9](../26/09.md).
36:17 qt9b General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:10](../26/10.md).
36:18 mq1j General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 26:11](../26/11.md). The difference is the absence of the middle clause from 26:11.
36:19 p3ke General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:14](../26/14.md).
36:20 t739 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:15](../26/15.md).
36:21 prx5 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 26:16](../26/16.md).
36:22 l8yx General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:17](../26/17.md).
36:23 ev65 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:18](../26/18.md).
36:24 ln2x General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
36:25 w2wz General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:20](../26/20.md).
36:26 gbm9 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 26:21](../26/21.md).
36:27 a7js General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:22](../26/22.md).
36:28 hw9c General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:23](../26/23.md).
36:29 u396 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:24](../26/24.md).
36:30 mu5n General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:25](../26/25.md).
36:30 r252 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שְׁנֵ֤י אֲדָנִים֙ שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֔ים תַּ֖חַת הַקֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָאֶחָֽד 1 The list formula from [26:25](../26/25.md) is strangely shortened here but has the same meaning. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
36:31 cf2p General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:26](../26/26.md).
36:32 p4wd General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:27](../26/27.md).
36:33 h94y General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:28](../26/28.md).
36:34 i17v General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:29](../26/29.md).
36:35 pfc5 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:31](../26/31.md).
36:36 hg2q General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nAside from some verbal differences, this verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:32](../26/32.md).
36:37 r5ya General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md).
36:38 pr67 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:37](../26/37.md).
37:intro mt99 0 # Exodus 37 General Notes\n\n## Structure\r\n\r\n- v. 1-9 Making the ark, see [Exodus 25:10-20](../25/10.md)\r\n- v. 10-16 Making the table, see [Exodus 25:23-29](../25/23.md)\r\n- v. 17-24 Making the lampstand, see [Exodus 25:31-39](../25/31.md)\r\n- v. 25-28 Making the altar for incense, see [Exodus 30:1-5](../30/01.md)\r\n- v. 29 Making the oil and incense, see [Exodus 30:22-38](../30/22.md)\n\n## Potential translation issues\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the Dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
37:1 byr3 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:10](../25/10.md).
37:2 kb3s General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md).
37:3 pb6v General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:12](../25/12.md).
37:4 nr8y General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:13](../25/13.md).
37:5 v9j7 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:14](../25/14.md).
37:6 liw8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:17](../25/17.md).
37:7 nhi3 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md).
37:8 g96y General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:19](../25/19.md).
37:9 e6na General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:20](../25/20.md).
37:10 ktf8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:23](../25/23.md).
37:11 l2kv General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:24](../25/24.md).
37:12 i1ba General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:25](../25/25.md).
37:13 b56c General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:26](../25/26.md).
37:14 tc3u General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:27](../25/27.md).
37:15 zkr8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:28](../25/28.md).
37:16 h598 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:29](../25/29.md).
37:17 edx6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:31](../25/31.md).
37:18 kuh2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:32](../25/32.md).
37:19 g1y9 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:33](../25/33.md).
37:20 nl54 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:34](../25/34.md).
37:21 x1u5 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:35](../25/35.md).
37:22 ks9z General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:36](../25/36.md).
37:23 b2jq General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical with [Exodus 25:37-38](../25/37.md), excluding the purpose clause in v. 37 (“and it will hold up its lamps, and it will make light on the side of its face”).
37:24 uz5h General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:39](../25/39.md).
37:25 el8w General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 30:1-2](../30/01.md).
37:26 ep66 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 30:3](../30/03.md).
37:27 zez2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 30:4](../30/04.md).
37:28 hw37 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 30:5](../30/05.md).
37:29 c992 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nFor the **oil**, see [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md), and for the **incense** see [25:6](../25/06.md) and [30:35](../30/35.md).
38:intro hp86 0 # Exodus 38 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the Dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency. Verses 1-20 of this chapter follow [Exodus 27:1-19](../27/01.md) almost verse for verse.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
38:1 r81c General Information 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:1](../27/01.md).
38:2 g71x General Information 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md).
38:3 v73t General Information 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:3](../27/03.md).
38:4 rx7v General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md) and [Exodus 27:5](../27/05.md). One part of 27:4 is rearranged into 38:5.
38:5 kp6w General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to the second half of [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md).
38:6 l258 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:6](../27/06.md).
38:7 ys63 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:7](../27/07.md) and the first part of [27:8](../27/08.md).
38:8 e6gd וַיַּ֗עַשׂ אֵ֚ת הַכִּיּ֣וֹר נְחֹ֔שֶׁת וְאֵ֖ת כַּנּ֣וֹ נְחֹ֑שֶׁת 1 This portion is almost identical to [Exodus 30:18](../30/18.md).
38:8 mdx9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּמַרְאֹת֙ 1 The **bronze** came from the **mirrors.** If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the bronze mirrors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
38:9 clk6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 27:9](../27/09.md).
38:10 nz6q General Information 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md).
38:11 mp6n General Information 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:11](../27/11.md).
38:11 xl4c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis מֵאָ֣ה בָֽאַמָּ֔ה 1 Here, “the curtains of the courtyard” and “long” are both omitted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the curtains of the courtyard were 100 cubits long” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
38:12 g5iz General Information 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:12](../27/12.md).
38:13 iju3 General Information 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:13](../27/13.md).
38:14 n1xj General Information 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:14](../27/14.md).
38:15 dlq7 General Information 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:15](../27/15.md).
38:17 s5g5 General Information 0 See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:17](../27/17.md).
38:18 hmi5 General Information 0 See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:16 and 18](../27/16.md).
38:18 yf6z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance וְעֶשְׂרִ֤ים & חָמֵ֣שׁ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m … 2.3m (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
38:18 trz5 וְקוֹמָ֤ה בְרֹ֨חַב֙ חָמֵ֣שׁ אַמּ֔וֹת 1 This probably refers to the general dimensions (20 cubits long by 5 cubits wide) but clarifies that the **width** would become the **height** of the curtain when the craftsmen or Levites set up the Dwelling. Alternate translation: “and the width, which corresponded to the height when hung, was five cubits”
38:19 fjw4 General Information 0 See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:17](../27/17.md).
38:20 ye5c General Information 0 This verse is very similar to the second half of [Exodus 27:19](../27/19.md).
38:21 k2ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֥ר פֻּקַּ֖ד 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which the Levites recorded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
38:21 qivw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom עַל־פִּ֣י מֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 This is an idiom referring to Moses telling them to make these records. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “following Moses’ instructions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
38:21 op5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּיַד֙ אִֽיתָמָ֔ר בֶּֽן־אַהֲרֹ֖ן הַכֹּהֵֽן 1 Here, **by the hand of** could mean: (1) Ithamar was in charge of the group that recorded these records (2) Ithamar was the scribe who actually wrote these records. Alternate translation: “under the direction of Ithamar son of Aaron the priest” or “written down by Ithamar son of Aaron the priest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
38:21 ex1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אִֽיתָמָ֔ר 1 **Ithamar** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [Exodus 6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
38:22 d86g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names וּבְצַלְאֵ֛ל בֶּן־אוּרִ֥י בֶן־ח֖וּר 1 **Bezalel**, **Uri,** and **Hur** are the names of men. See how you translated these in [Exodus 31:2](../31/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
38:22 i4ha rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis מֹשֶֽׁה 1 This sentence leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “Moses to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
38:23 f93b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אָהֳלִיאָ֞ב בֶּן־אֲחִיסָמָ֛ךְ 1 **Oholiab** and **Ahisamak**are names of men. See how you translated these in [Exodus 31:6](../31/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
38:23 wvw4 חָרָ֣שׁ וְחֹשֵׁ֑ב וְרֹקֵ֗ם בַּתְּכֵ֨לֶת֙ וּבָֽאַרְגָּמָ֔ן וּבְתוֹלַ֥עַת הַשָּׁנִ֖י וּבַשֵּֽׁשׁ 1 This is very similar to part of [Exodus 35:35](../35/35.md).
38:24 tl4k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָּל־הַזָּהָ֗ב הֶֽעָשׂוּי֙ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “All the gold that the craftsmen used” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
38:24 y7hy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight תֵּ֤שַׁע וְעֶשְׂרִים֙ כִּכָּ֔ר וּשְׁבַ֨ע מֵא֧וֹת וּשְׁלֹשִׁ֛ים שֶׁ֖קֶל בְּשֶׁ֥קֶל הַקֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 A talent is about 34 kilograms, and a shekel is about 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time; **by the shekel of the sanctuary** specified which one was to be used. See how you translated this in [Exodus 30:13](../30/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
38:25 ni5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight מְאַ֣ת כִּכָּ֑ר וְאֶלֶף֩ וּשְׁבַ֨ע מֵא֜וֹת וַחֲמִשָּׁ֧ה וְשִׁבְעִ֛ים שֶׁ֖קֶל בְּשֶׁ֥קֶל הַקֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 A talent is about 34 kilograms, and a shekel is about 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time, **by the shekel of the sanctuary** specified which one was to be used. See [the previous verse](../38/24.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
38:26 rp46 one hundred talents 0 See how you translated many of the same things in [Exodus 30:13-14](../30/13.md).
38:26 t2gi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight בֶּ֚קַע לַגֻּלְגֹּ֔לֶת מַחֲצִ֥ית הַשֶּׁ֖קֶל בְּשֶׁ֣קֶל הַקֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 A beka is 1/2 a shekel. A shekel is 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time; **by the shekel of the sanctuary** specified which one was to be used. See [verse 24](../38/24.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “five and a half grams” or “5 1/2 grams” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
38:26 fyy5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction מַחֲצִ֥ית הַשֶּׁ֖קֶל 1 A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
38:26 nvf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis לְכֹ֨ל הָעֹבֵ֜ר עַל־הַפְּקֻדִ֗ים מִבֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙ וָמַ֔עְלָה לְשֵׁשׁ־מֵא֥וֹת אֶ֨לֶף֙ וּשְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת אֲלָפִ֔ים וַחֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת וַחֲמִשִּֽׁים 1 Here the account leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The idea that this silver was “received” **from** these “men” is left out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “received from every passer over to the counted ones from a son of 20 years and older—received from 603,550 men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
38:26 ll8b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מִבֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙ 1 This is an idiom meaning 20 years old. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from those 20 years old” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
38:27 p7r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight מְאַת֙ כִּכַּ֣ר 1 A talent is about 34 kilograms. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
38:28 nxf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis הָאֶ֜לֶף וּשְׁבַ֤ע הַמֵּאוֹת֙ וַחֲמִשָּׁ֣ה וְשִׁבְעִ֔ים 1 Here the words **shekels of silver** have been omitted because they are understood from [verse 25](../38/25.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the 1,775 shekels of silver” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
38:28 rcda Bezalel 0 See how you translated some of these in [Exodus 27:17](../27/17.md).
38:29 p3mr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight שִׁבְעִ֣ים כִּכָּ֑ר וְאַלְפַּ֥יִם וְאַרְבַּע־מֵא֖וֹת שָֽׁקֶל 1 A talent is about 34 kilograms, and a shekel is about 11 grams. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
38:30 rck7 מִכְבַּ֥ר 1 A **grate** is a frame of crossed bars for holding wood when burning. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md).
38:31 bvr9 יִתְדֹ֧ת & יִתְדֹ֥ת 1 These are sharp bronze stakes that were used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:19](../27/19.md).
39:intro mll6 0 # Exodus 39 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions. The special, holy clothing mentioned in previous chapters is produced to the correct specifications in this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\nBe sure to consult your previous work to maintain consistency. Verses 1-31 of this chapter follow [Exodus 28:1-37](../28/01.md) with some differences. Verses 33-41 follow [35:10-19](../35/10.md).\n- Throughout the chapter the people making the items are referred to interchangeably as **he** or **they**. Both are generic nouns referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could change all instances to “they” or “he” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
39:1 h8kg as Yahweh had commanded Moses 0 See how you translated similar instructions in [Exodus 28:4-5](../28/04.md).
39:1 e1xh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בִּגְדֵ֤י הַקֹּ֨דֶשׁ֙ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in [28:2](../28/02.md). Alternate translation: “the holy clothes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
39:2 b9mg General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:6](../28/06.md).
39:4 pq62 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [28:7](../28/07.md).
39:5 g75w General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:8](../28/08.md).
39:6 k7vw General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 28:9](../28/09.md) and especially [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md). Here, as there, the **sons of Israel** literally means the twelve sons, Rueben through Benjamin, not the Israelite nation.
39:7 ize6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to the first half of [Exodus 28:12](../28/12.md).
39:8 mlf6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:15](../28/15.md); a few words are omitted here.
39:9 lkt1 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:16](../28/16.md); a few words are added or repeated here.
39:10 m54c They set in it 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:17](../28/17.md).
39:11 qx96 an emerald, a sapphire, and a diamond 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 28:18](../28/18.md).
39:12 kk8t a jacinth, an agate, and an amethyst 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 28:19](../28/19.md).
39:13 l9wa a beryl, an onyx, and a jasper 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:20](../28/20.md).
39:14 z5va General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:21](../28/21.md).
39:15 byz8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:22](../28/22.md).
39:16 b8m6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:23-24](../28/23.md).
39:17 w2s4 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:24](../28/24.md).
39:18 bw76 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 28:25](../28/25.md) except for verb tense.
39:19 nd41 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 28:26](../28/26.md) except for verb tense.
39:20 w8wz General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 28:27](../28/27.md) except for verb tense.
39:21 zu91 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:28](../28/28.md) except for the note about Yahweh’s command.
39:22 vdw1 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to most of [Exodus 28:31-32](../28/31.md).
39:23 cyc1 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:32](../28/32.md).
39:24 eak6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to part of [Exodus 28:33](../28/33.md).
39:25 sx9b General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to parts of [Exodus 28:33](../28/33.md).
39:26 gtg5 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThe first part of this verse is almost identical to the first part of [Exodus 28:34](../28/34.md).
39:27 pz63 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40](../28/40.md), and [42](../28/42.md) but in a different order.
39:28 um4e turban 0 Verses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40](../28/40.md), and [42](../28/42.md) but in a different order.
39:29 hn5g sash 0 Verses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40](../28/40.md), and [42](../28/42.md) but in a different order.
39:30 kq33 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical [Exodus 28:36](../28/36.md). See [29:6](../29/06.md) for the **crown of holiness**.
39:31 fml2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:37](../28/37.md).
39:32 jh64 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse marks the end of the narrative of the construction of the Dwelling. More precisely, it seems to mark the beginning of an ending section. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
39:32 z1z7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד 1 The **tabernacle** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing. The two interchangeable terms are brought together here in a poetic doubling to bring this part of the narrative to a close. If your readers would find this confusing you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST. Alternate translation: “holy meeting tent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
39:32 et19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וַֽיַּעֲשׂוּ֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כְּ֠כֹל אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֖ה כֵּ֥ן עָשֽׂוּ 1 Here, **thus they did** parallels the whole rest of the sentence. Like the doubling of the terms for **tabernacle** this brings the narrative of building to an emphatic conclusion. If this sort of parallelism would convey a meaning other than this emphatic conclusion in your language you may need to use another natural way to close the narrative with emphasis on the Israelites complete obedience. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel faithfully did exactly according to all that Yahweh had commanded Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
39:33 ri54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent So the work on the Dwelling, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything 0 This verse starts a short narrative of the Israelites bringing and presenting the items for the Dwelling to Moses for inspection. It is a summary of the construction and extended conclusion to the last few chapters. Your team may need to decide how to group verse 32, as it both closes the construction narrative and introduces this next section, which ends with a very similar summary statement in [verses 42-43](../39/42.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
39:33 y9ym clasps 0 This verse, especially the list of items, is very similar to [35:11](../35/11.md).
39:34 z6r6 וְאֶת־מִכְסֵ֞ה עוֹרֹ֤ת הָֽאֵילִם֙ הַמְאָדָּמִ֔ים וְאֶת־מִכְסֵ֖ה עֹרֹ֣ת הַתְּחָשִׁ֑ים 1 See how you translated similar phrases to this in [Exodus 26:14](../26/14.md).
39:34 l0fi פָּרֹ֥כֶת הַמָּסָֽךְ 1 See how you translated similar phrases to this in [35:12](../35/12.md).
39:35 i7d9 atonement lid 0 See how you translated similar phrases to this in [35:12](../35/12.md).
39:36 knn8 bread of the presence 0 This verse is almost identical to [35:13](../35/13.md).
39:37 nzph bread of the presence 0 This verse is very similar to [35:14](../35/14.md).
39:38 elv1 bread of the presence 0 This verse is very similar to [35:15](../35/15.md).
39:39 e755 grate 0 This verse is almost identical with [35:16](../35/16.md).
39:40 i8lm Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis verse is almost identical with [35:17](../35/17.md) and parts of [35:18](../35/18.md).
39:40 ajt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet הַמִּשְׁכָּ֖ן לְאֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד 1 These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [verse 32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
39:41 z3ip the Dwelling, the tent of meeting 0 This verse is identical to [35:19](../35/19.md).
39:42 ct6k Thus the people 0 This verse is almost identical to the second half of [verse 32](../39/32.md).
39:43 t26m וְהִנֵּה֙ 1 Here, the word **behold** draws attention to the information that follows. Use a word or marking in your language that draws attention to the next information.
39:43 z79s rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory As Yahweh had commanded, in that way they did it 0 This (and really verse 42) is the end of the conclusion of the construction of materials portion of the story. The ending began in [verse 32](../39/32.md). If your language has specific features that should be part of the end of a section like this, consider using them here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
40:intro fa6e 0 # Exodus 40 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- In this chapter, **just as Yahweh commanded Moses** is repeated seven times, as in the previous chapter, to show that Moses was obedient to every detail of Yahweh’s command.\n- This chapter is repetitive both internally and with other parts of the book. Verses 17-33 parallel verses 2-8 in an expanded way.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n- The **Dwelling** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing, but both appear next to each other many times in this chapter. The two interchangeable terms are brought together throughout this chapter in a poetic doubling to bring book to a close. If your readers would find this confusing, you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST.\n- This chapter says that Moses did all these things. Just like with Bezalel in earlier chapters, it would have been impossible for him to do all this personally. The people helped him set up the Dwelling. In many translations this will more clear if you make this explicit.\n- “the glory of Yahweh filled the Dwelling”: This phrase indicates that Yahweh began to dwell within the Dwelling, among Israel, in a special way. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])
40:1 ea7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent 0 There is a transition to a new event at the beginning of this chapter. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
40:2 bgv1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בְּיוֹם־הַחֹ֥דֶשׁ הָרִאשׁ֖וֹן בְּאֶחָ֣ד לַחֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “On day one of the month, in month one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
40:2 gzk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד 1 These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
40:2 clkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis לַחֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 Here, the new or next year is omitted because it can be inferred from context. However, if that would be misunderstood by your readers (perhaps they would think it just meant “next month” or something), you could add a phrase to make it clear that it is the first month of the year. This refers to exactly one year after God rescued his people from Egypt. See [Exodus 12:2](../12/02.md). Alternate translation: “month of the year” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
40:6 nqha rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֥ן אֹֽהֶל־מוֹעֵֽד 1 These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
40:10 yiq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִֽׁים 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
40:12 gqld General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses 12-15 are similar to [Exodus 29:4-9](../29/04.md).
40:16 xl61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis statement starts a new section in which Moses does all the things **just as Yahweh had commanded**; this poetic obedience statement was seen so often in the previous chapter. You may wish to mark this transition and poetic statement in a particular way in your language that is similar to how you did in the last chapter. See [39:32](../39/32.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
40:17 r6pc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הוּקַ֖ם הַמִּשְׁכָּֽן 1 The use of the passive here indicates that the important thing is the completion of the task of setting up the tent on the specific date Yahweh had commanded. If your language would show that focus in a different way, use a natural form to do that. Alternate translation: “that they set up the Dwelling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
40:17 gzu5 בַּחֹ֧דֶשׁ הָרִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּשָּׁנָ֥ה הַשֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּאֶחָ֣ד לַחֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 This refers to exactly one year after God rescued his people from Egypt. See [Exodus 12:2](../12/02.md).
40:17 wnh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּחֹ֧דֶשׁ הָרִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּשָּׁנָ֥ה הַשֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּאֶחָ֣ד 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “in month one, year two, on day one of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
40:18 kk4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַיָּ֨קֶם מֹשֶׁ֜ה אֶת־הַמִּשְׁכָּ֗ן וַיִּתֵּן֙ אֶת־אֲדָנָ֔יו 1 Moses was the leader. It would have been impossible for him to do all this personally; the people helped him set up the Dwelling. All references to Moses from here to all the Dwelling assembly listing through [verse 33](../40/33.md) can be understood this way. Alternate translation: “And Moses directed the people to raise up the Dwelling, and they placed its bases”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
40:20 chx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns וַיִּקַּ֞ח & וַיָּ֥שֶׂם 1 In this verse and the next, there may be an exception to the word **he** meaning someone who was helping Moses, because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the Dwelling, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
40:21 yhbs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns וַיָּבֵ֣א & וַיָּ֗שֶׂם 1 In this verse and the previous verse, there may be an exception to the word **he** meaning someone who was helping Moses, because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the Dwelling, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
40:27 iwuo in front of the curtain 0 See [30:7](../30/07.md).
40:35 ysd8 וְלֹא־יָכֹ֣ל מֹשֶׁ֗ה לָבוֹא֙ אֶל־אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֔ד כִּֽי־שָׁכַ֥ן עָלָ֖יו הֶעָנָ֑ן וּכְב֣וֹד יְהוָ֔ה מָלֵ֖א אֶת־הַמִּשְׁכָּֽן 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the cloud had settled on it and the glory of Yahweh had filled the Dwelling, Moses was not able to go into the tent of meeting.”
40:36 ak35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּבְהֵעָל֤וֹת הֶֽעָנָן֙ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Whenever Yahweh’s cloud moved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
40:37 s8y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְאִם־לֹ֥א יֵעָלֶ֖ה הֶעָנָ֑ן וְלֹ֣א יִסְע֔וּ עַד־י֖וֹם הֵעָלֹתֽוֹ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but if Yahweh did not take up the cloud, then they would not set out until the day he took it up.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
40:38 i8hu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְעֵינֵ֥י כָל־בֵּֽית־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Here, **before the eyes of** refers to being able to see. All the Israelites could see the cloud and fire. Alternate translation: “and all the house of Israel could see it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
40:38 bhi5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בֵּֽית־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Here, **house** represents a people group, the Israelites, who were descended from Jacob, who was also named Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a metaphor from your language or translate the meaning. This is a common biblical metaphor, so you may want to check other places this occurs. The **house of Israel** is equivalent to “sons of Israel” or “Israelites.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
See in Reader
